001-056 alfa gt gb - fiat

1

Dear Client,

Thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo.

Your Alfa GT has been designed to guarantee the safety, comfort and driving pleasure typical of Alfa Romeo.

This booklet will help you to get to know the characteristics and operation of your vehicle.

The following pages contain all the indications necessary for you to be able to maintain the high standards of performance, quality, safetyand respect for the environment which characterise this Alfa GT.

The Warranty Booklet also contains the regulations, the warranty certificate and a guide to the services offered by Alfa Romeo.

Services which are essential and precious because, when you purchase an Alfa Romeo, you are not only acquiring a car, but the tranquillitythat comes from knowing that an efficient, willing and widespread organisation is at your service for any assistance problems you may have.

We would like to point out Alfa Romeo’ s commitment in protecting the environment through "total material recycling": at the end of yourAlfa GT useful lifespan, any Alfa Romeo dealer would be pleased to make arrangements for your car to be recycled properly and eco-logically (in compliance with current law regulations).

Nature benefits in two ways: there’s no pollution from waste disposal and the demand for raw materials is reduced.

Enjoy the reading. And have a good trip.

This booklet describes all the versions of the Alfa GT, so you should only consider the information concerningthe trim level, engine and version purchased by you.

2

VERY IMPORTANT!

FUEL CAPACITY

Petrol engines: only use unleaded petrol with no less than 95 R.O.N.

JTD engines: only use Diesel fuel for motor vehicles that meet European Specification EN590.

STARTING THE ENGINE

Petrol engines with mechanical transmission: make sure that the handbrake is engaged; set the gearshift leverto neutral, fully depress the clutch without pressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soonas the engine has started.

Petrol engine with Selespeed transmission: keep the brake pedal fully depressed, turn the ignition key to AVVand release it as soon as the engine has started; the transmission sets to neutral automatically (the display shows positionN).

JTD engines: turn the ignition key to MAR and wait for the Y and m warning lights to go off; turn the ignitionkey to AVV and release it as soon as the engine has started.

PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL

While working, the catalyst develops a very high temperature. Do not park the car over grass, dry leaves, pine needles orany other inflammable materials: risk of fire.

K

�

3

ACCESSORY ELECTRICAL DEVICES

If after purchasing the car you wish to install accessories that need an electrical supply (with the risk of gradually drainingthe battery), contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services who will assess the overall electrical absorption and check whether thecar system is able to withstand the load required.�

CODE CARD

Keep it in a safe place, not in the car. IT is advisable to always keep the electronic code on the CODE card with you in caseemergency starting is necessary.

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Correct maintenance makes it possible to preserve vehicle performance levels and safety, respect for the environment andlow running costs unaltered over the course of time.

THE OWNER HANDBOOK…

…you will find important information, advice and warnings for correct use, driving safety and vehicle maintenance overtime. Pay particular attention to the symbols " (personal safety) # (protecting the environment) â (vehicle safety).

RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT

The vehicle is fitted with a system that allows continuous diagnosis of the components correlated with emissions to ensurebetter respect for the environment.

U

4

Any queries concerning servicing should be forwarded to the showroom from which the vehicle was purchased, the subsidiary company or toour branch offices or any point of the Alfa Romeo Network.

Warranty Booklet

The Warranty Booklet is delivered together with every new vehicle and contains the regulations tied to the service given by Alfa Romeo andto the warranty conditions.

Correctly carrying out the scheduled services specified by the manufacturer is the best way to maintain the performance, safety characteris-tics and low running costs of your vehicle. It is also necessary to maintain warranty cover.

“Service” guide

This contains Alfa Romeo Authorised Services. The Services can be recognised by the presence of the Alfa Romeo badge and logo.

The Alfa Romeo organisation in Italy can be found in the telephone directory under the letter “A” Alfa Romeo.

Not all of the models described in this booklet are available in all countries. Only some of the fittings described in this booklet are fitted asstandard to the vehicle. The list of available accessories should be requested from the Alfa Romeo Dealers.

5

THE SYMBOLS USED IN THIS BOOKLET

The symbols illustrated in these pages show the subjects which should, in particular, be closely studied.

This indicates the correct procedures to be followed to prevent the vehicle from damaging the environment.

Warning. Partially or fully ignoring these rules may lead to serious injury.

Warning. Partially or fully ignoring theserules may lead to serious damage being caused to the vehicle which, in some cir-cumstances, may cause forfeiture of thewarranty cover.

PERSONALSAFETY

PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT

VEHICLESAFETY

The texts, illustrations and specifications given in this booklet refer to the vehicle at the time of going to press.

As part of our ongoing striving to improve our products, Alfa Romeo may introduce technical changes during production, therefore the specifications and fittings may be altered without prior notice.

For details on this subject, please apply to the manufacturer’s sales network.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

6

THE ALFA ROMEO CODE SYSTEM

To increase protection against attemptedtheft, the car is fitted with an electronicengine lock system (Alfa Romeo CODE)which is activated automatically when thekey is removed from the ignition. In factthe grip of each key contains an electron-ic device which modulates the radio fre-quency signal transmitted when theengine is started by a special aerial incor-porated in the ignition switch. This modu-lated signal is the “password” by whichthe control unit recognises the key andonly in this condition can the engine bestarted.

KEYS

Two keys are delivered together with thecar (A-fig. 2) with metal insert andremote control function.

The key remote control operates:

– centralised door unlocking/locking

– tailgate opening

– electronic alarm on/off (if existing)

– window unlocking/locking (on ver-sions/markets where provided).

GGEETTTTIINNGG TTOO KKNNOOWW YYOOUURR CCAARR

fig. 2

A0A0002b

fig. 1

A0A00621b

SYMBOLS

On some of the components making upyour Alfa GT, or near to them, specialcoloured labels have been attached. Theselabels bear symbols that remind you of theprecautions to be taken as regards thatparticular component.A summary list of the symbols (fig.1) isto be found under the bonnet.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

7

The key metal insert operates:

– the ignition switch

-– The driver's door lock and, optional forversions/markets where applicable, the pas-senger's door lock

– the passenger’s side air-bag deactiva-tion

IMPORTANT To guarantee the perfectefficiency of the electronic devices con-tained in keys, avoid letting them directlyexposed to sunrays.

Together with the keys the CODE card isprovided (fig. 3), bearing in print thekey codes (both mechanical and electron-ic for emergency start up).

The code numbers on the CODE cardmust be kept in a safe place , not in thecar.

The driver should always keep the elec-tronic CODE card with him/her in theevent of having to carry out emergencystarting.

U.K. Vehicle only. At the behest of themotor Insurance Companies the CODEcard for the emergency starting andreplacement of keys are not provided. Ifyou need assistance please contact yourneed assistance please contact your near-est Fiat Dealership, or telephone FreePhone 0800717000.

KEY WITH REMOTE CONTROL

The key with remote control (fig. 4) isfitted with:

– a metal insert (A) that can beenclosed in the key grip

– a button (B) for power-assisted open-ing of the metal insert

– a button (C) for remote door unlock-ing and at the same time switching off theelectronic alarm

– a button (D) for remote door lockingand at the same time switching on theelectronic alarm

– a button (E) for remote boot unlock-ing

– removable hook ring (F).

fig. 3

A0A0003b

If the car changes owner,the new owner must begiven all the keys and the

CODE card.

fig. 4

A0A0600b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

8

The button B should onlybe pressed when the key isaway from the body, in

particular from the eyes, and fromobjects that can be spoilt (clothesfor instance). Make sure the keycan never be touched by others, es-pecially children, who may inad-vertently press the button.

OPENING THE TAILGATE

The tailgate can be opened from outsideby remote control pressing button (E), evenif the electronic alarm is on. Opening of thetailgate is accompanied by the direction indi-cators flashing twice; closing is accompaniedby a single flash.

If the electronic alarm is fitted, when thetailgate is opened the alarm systemswitches off volumetric protection and thetailgate control sensor, the system (withthe exception of versions for certain mar-kets)”beeps” twice.

Closing the tailgate again, the controlfunctions are restored, the system (withthe exception of versions for certain mar-kets) “beeps” twice.

The metal insert (A) of the key operates:

– the ignition switch– the driver's door lock and, optional for

versions/markets where applicable, the pas-senger's door lock

– the passenger’s side Air bag deactiva-tion switch

To bring the metal insert out of the keygrip, press the button (B).

To pull out the hook ring (F) use a fine-ly pointed object (e.g. pen) and work inthe direction of the arrow.

To insert the metal insert in the key grip:

– keep the button (B) pressed

– move the metal insert (A)

– release the button (B) and turn themetal insert (A) until hearing the click asit locks into place.

To unlock the doors by remote controlpress button (C), the doors unlock and thedirection indicators flash twice. To lock thedoors by remote control, press button (D),the doors lock and the direction indicatorsflash once. Pressing button (C) the doorsare released, if within the next 60 secondsa door or the tailgate are not opened, thesystem automatically locks everythingagain.

On cars fitted with electronic alarm sys-tem, pressing button (C) turns it off,pressing button (D) turns it on.

The codes of any keys notpresented during the mem-orising procedure are

erased. The reason for this is to en-sure that any lost or stolen keyscannot be used to start the engine.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

9

OPERATION

Each time the ignition key is turned to theSTOP position the Alfa Romeo CODE sys-tem deactivates the functions of the engineelectronic control unit.

Each time the car is started turning theignition key to MAR, the Alfa RomeoCODE control unit sends a recognitioncode to the engine control unit to deacti-vate the inhibitor. The code is crypted andvariable between over four billion possiblecombinations, and it is sent only if the sys-tem control unit has recognised the codetransmitted from the key which containsan electronic transmitter, through an aeri-al wound around the ignition switch.

IMPORTANT Turning on of the AlfaRomeo CODE warning light (Y) whentravelling with the ignition key at MAR:

1) If the warning light turns on, thismeans that the system is running a self-test (for example for a voltage drop). Atthe first stop, it will be possible to test thesystem: switch off the engine turning theignition key to STOP; then turn the igni-tion key to MAR: the warning light turnson and should go off in about one second.If the warning light stays on, repeat theprocedure described previously leaving thekey at STOP for over 30 seconds. Shouldthe inconvenience persists, contact AlfaRomeo Authorised Services.

If the code has not been recognised cor-rectly, the Alfa Romeo CODE warning light(Y) on the cluster turns on.

In this case, the key should be moved tothe STOP position and then back toMAR; if the lock continues, possibly tryagain with the other key provided with thecar. If it is still not possible to start the car,follow the instructions given in the “In anemergency” chapter and then contact AlfaRomeo Authorised Services.

IMPORTANT Every key has its owncode, which must be memorised by thesystem control unit. To memorise newkeys, up to a maximum of eight, applysolely to Alfa Romeo Authorised Servicestaking with you all the keys in your pos-session, the CODE card, a personal identi-ty document and the car’s ownership doc-uments.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

10

2) For versions without the reconfig-urable multifunction display, the flashingof the warning light means that the car isnot protected by the engine inhibitordevice. This condition for cars with recon-figurable multifunction display is shown bythe turning on of the warning light togeth-er with the display of the message: “CODESYSTEM NOT PROGRAMMED”. Contact AlfaRomeo Authorised Services immediatelyto have all the keys memorised.

If after about 2 secondswith the ignition key atMAR, for versions without

reconfigurable multifunction dis-play, the Alfa Romeo CODE warn-ing light (Y) turns on again flash-ing, or for versions with reconfig-urable multifunction display, thewarning light turns on again to-gether with the message “Codesystem not programmed”, thismeans that the code of the keyshas not been stored, therefore thecar is not protected by the AlfaRomeo CODE system against at-tempted theft. In this case contactAlfa Romeo Authorised Services tohave the key codes stored.

KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT

If when pressing button (B or C-fig. 6)on the remote control, nothing happens,the battery should be replaced by a newone of the same type to be found c/o nor-mal retailers.

Used batteries are harm-ful to the environment.They should be disposed of

as specified by law in the specialcontainers provided. Avoid expo-sure to naked flames and high tem-peratures. Keep out of reach ofchildren.

fig. 5

A0A0603b

Battery replacement:

– press button (A-fig. 5) and movethe metal insert (B) to the open position;

– using a finely-tipped screwdriver, turnthe opening device (C) and pull out thebattery holder (D);

– replace the battery (E) making surethat the bias is correct;

– re-insert the battery holder in the keyand lock it, turning the device (C).

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

11

ELECTRONIC ALARM

DESCRIPTION

The system comprises: a transmitter,receiver, control unit with siren and volu-metric sensors. The electronic alarm iscontrolled by the receiver incorporated inthe instrument cluster and it is turned onand off by the remote control in the keywhich sends the crypted and variablecode. The electronic alarm controls: theunlawful opening of doors, bonnet andboot (perimetral protection), operation ofthe ignition key, battery cable cutting, thepresence of moving bodies in the passen-ger compartment (volumetric protection),any abnormal raising/sloping of the car(for versions/markets where applicable)and central door locking. It also makes itpossible to cut off the volumetric protec-tion.

IMPORTANT The engine inhibitorfunction is guaranteed by the Alfa RomeoCODE system which is activated automati-cally when the ignition key is removed.

The remote control is incorporated in thekey with buttons (B, C, D-fig. 6) whichactivate the corresponding control andsend the code to the receiver. This code(rolling code) changes at each transmis-sion.

REQUEST FOR ADDITIONAL KEYS WITH REMOTE CONTROL

The receiver can recognise up to 5 keyswith incorporated remote control. Shoulda new key with remote control be neces-sary for any reason during the life of thecar, contact directly Alfa Romeo AuthorisedServices, taking with you the CODE card,a personal identity document and the car’sownership documents.

HOW TO ACTIVATE THEALARM

With the doors, bonnet and boot shutand the ignition key in the STOP orPARK position (key removed), point thekey with the remote control in the directionof the car, then press and release the but-ton (C-fig. 6).

With the exception of certain markets,the system sounds a “beep” and thedoors are locked.

Engagement of the alarm is preceded bya self-diagnostic test indicated by a differ-ent flashing frequency of the deterrent led(A-fig. 7) on the dashboard. If a fault isdetected the system sounds a furtherwarning “beep”.

fig. 6

A0A0601b

fig. 7

A0A0005b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

12

– if the led continues flashing, but at dif-ferent intervals than normal, this meansthat different attempts to break in haveoccurred. Through the number of flashes itis possible to identify the type of attempt:

1 flash: one or more doors

2 flashes: tailgate

3 flashes: bonnet

4 flashes: ultrasounds

5 flashes: abnormal vehicle lift-ing/sloping (for ver-sions/markets whereapplicable)

6 flashes: tampering with car start-ing cables

7 flashes: tampering with batterycables or cutting emer-gency key cables

8 flashes: connection line to sen-sors and siren

9 flashes: at least three causes ofalarm.

Surveillance

After switching on, the flashing of thedeterrent led (A-fig. 7) on the dash-board indicates the system surveillancemode. The led flashes throughout thisperiod.

IMPORTANT Operation of the elec-tronic alarm is adapted at the origin to therules of the different countries.

Self-diagnostic functions and door, bonnet, boot control

If, after engaging the alarm, a second“beep” is sounded, switch off the systempressing the button (B-fig. 6), checkthat the doors, bonnet and tailgate areproperly shut, then switch the system onagain pressing the button (C). Otherwise,the door, bonnet or tailgate that is notshut properly will be excluded from thealarm system control.

If the doors, bonnet and boot are shutcorrectly and the control signal is repeat-ed, the system self-diagnostic has detect-ed a system operating fault. It is thereforenecessary to contact Alfa RomeoAuthorised Services.

HOW TO DEACTIVATE THE ALARM

To deactivate the alarm press the button(B-fig. 6) of the key with remote control.The system will react as follows (with theexception of certain markets):

– two brief flashes of the direction indi-cators

– two brief “beeps” of the system

– door unlocking.

IMPORTANT If when the system isturned off the deterrent led (A-fig. 7)on the dashboard stays on (maximum 2minutes or until the ignition key is set toMAR) the following should be borne inmind:

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

13

WHEN THE ALARM IS TRIGGERED

When the system is on, the alarm comesinto action in the following cases:

– opening of one of the doors, bonnet ortailgate;

– disconnection of the battery or sec-tioning of electric cables;

– intrusion in the passenger compart-ment, for example breakage of windows(volumetric protection);

– attempt to start the engine (key inMAR position);

– abnormal car lifting/sloping (for ver-sions/markets where applicable).

Depending on the markets, the cutting inof the alarm causes operation of the sirenand hazard warning ligths (for about 26seconds). The ways of operating and thenumber of cycles may vary depending onthe markets.

A maximum number of cycles is howev-er envisaged.

Once the alarm cycle has ended, the sys-tem resumes its normal control function.

VOLUMETRIC PROTECTION

To make sure that the protection systemworks correctly the side windows and sun-roof (if fitted) must be properly shut.

The function can be cut off (if, for exam-ple, leaving animals in the car) carryingout the following operations in rapid suc-cession: starting from the condition withthe ignition key at MAR, move the keyto STOP, then immediately back toMAR and then to STOP again, thenremove the ignition key.

The deterrent led (A-fig. 7) on thedashboard lights up for about 2 seconds toconfirm that the function has been cut off.

To restore volumetric protection, movethe and keep the ignition key at MAR forover 30 seconds.

If, with the volumetric protection func-tion deactivated, an electric control con-trolled by the ignition key at MAR (e.g.power windows) turn the ignition key toMAR, operate the control and move thekey to STOP in a maximum time of 30seconds. This way volumetric protection isnot restored.

HOW TO CUT OFF THE ALARM SYSTEM

To deactivate the alarm system com-pletely (for instance during prolongedinactivity of the vehicle) simply lock thecar turning the key in the lock.

MINISTERIAL CERTIFICATION

In accordance with the law in force ineach country, on the subject of radio fre-quency, we wish to point out that for themarkets in which the transmitter needs tobe marked, the certification number isgiven on the component.

Depending on the versions/markets, thecode may also be given on the transmitterand/or on the receiver.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

14

IGNITION DEVICE

SWITCH (fig. 8)

The key can be turned to one of fourpositions:

– STOP: engine switched off, key canbe removed, engine inhibitor engaged,steering lock engaged, services excludedapart from those supplied directly (e.g.hazard warning lights).

– MAR: drive position. The engine lockis deactivated and all electrical devices arepowered.

fig. 8

A0A0016b

When leaving the vehiclealways remove the keyfrom the ignition to pre-

vent any occupants of the vehiclefrom accidentally activating thecontrols. Never leave children inthe vehicle unaccompanied. Re-member to engage the handbrakeand, if the vehicle is parked on anuphill slope, to engage the firstgear. If the vehicle is facing down-hill, engage reverse gear.

If the ignition device istampered with (for exam-ple an attempted theft)

have it checked over by AlfaRomeo Authorised Services beforetravelling again.

IMPORTANT Do not leave the key inthis position when the engine is stopped.

– AVV: unstable position for startingthe engine.

IMPORTANT If the engine fails tostart move the key back to STOP andrepeat.

The ignition switch has a safety devicewhich prevents passage to AVV whenthe engine is running.

– PARK: engine switched off, key canbe removed, engine lock engaged, steer-ing lock engaged, sidelights switched onautomatically.

IMPORTANT To turn the key to thePARK position, button (A) on the switchmust be pressed first.

It is absolutely forbiddento carry out whatever af-ter-market operation in-

volving steering system or steer-ing column modifications (e.g.: in-stallation of anti-theft Device) thatcould badly affect performance andsafety, cause the lapse of warran-ty and also result in non-compli-ance of the car with homologationrequirements.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

15

STEERING LOCK

Engaging:

– move the key to STOP or PARK,then remove the key and turn the steeringwheel slightly to facilitate the lockingaction.

Disengaging:

– turn the key to MAR gently rockingthe steering wheel from side to side.

Never remove the ignitionkey with the car on themove. The steering wheel

would lock automatically the firsttime the steering wheel is turned.This also occurs if the car is towed.

DOORS

Before opening a door, al-ways make sure that it canbe done safely.

OPENING/CLOSINGFROM OUTSIDE

Front doors

– To open the driver's door turn the keyclockwise and to open the passengers' door,optional for versions/markets where applic-able, turn the key anti-clockwise, then re-move the key and pull the lever (A-fig. 9).

– To close the door, turn the key in thelock in the opposite direction to the onefor opening.

fig. 9

A0A0017b

fig. 10

A0A0018b

OPENING/CLOSINGFROM INSIDE

Front doors

– To open the door, pull the handle(A-fig. 10).

– To close the door, pull it; then to pre-vent opening from outside, press button(A-fig. 11) on the dashboard, the deter-rent led (B) on the actual button lights upwith a yellow light to confirm that lockinghas taken place.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

16

FRONT SEATSCENTRAL LOCKING

This allows central locking of the doorlocks.

To engage central locking, the doorsmust be perfectly shut, otherwise lockingis denied.

IMPORTANT With central lockingengaged, pulling the inside lever for open-ing one of the front doors causes theunlocking of all the doors.

In the event of a power cut off (blownfuse, battery disconnected, etc.) it is stillpossible to work the lock by hand.

fig. 11

A0A0019b

Any adjustments are tobe carried out only withthe vehicle stationary.

LENGTHWISE ADJUSTMENT(fig. 12)

Raise the lever (A) and push the seatbackwards or forwards; in the driving posi-tion the arms should be slightly flexed andthe hands should rest on the rim of thesteering wheel.

fig. 12

A0A0602b

After releasing the ad-justment lever, alwayscheck that the seat is

locked on the runners, trying tomove it to and from. The lack ofthis clamping action could cause theseat to move unexpectedly andcause loss of vehicle control.

Upholstery of your car hasbeen designed to withstandwear deriving from com-

mon use of the car. You are how-ever recommended to avoid strongand/or continuous scratching withclothing accessories such as metal-lic buckles, studs, Velcro fasteningsand the like, since these items causecircumscribed stress of the coverfabric that could lead to yarn break-ing, and damage the cover as a con-sequence.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

17

CENTRAL ARMREST (fig. 13)The armrest, fitted on some versions, is

adjustable and can be raised and loweredto the required position.

To adjust, slightly raise the armrest, thenpress the the release device (A).

Inside the armrest there is an oddmentscompartment, to use it, raise the cover,pressing the device (B).

TILTING THE BACK REST (fig. 12)

To gain access to the rear seats, pull thehandle (E), the back rest folds and theseat is free to run forwards.

A recovery mechanism with memorymakes it possible to take the seat back toits previous position.

Once the seat back has been returned tothe travelling condition, make sure that itis correctly clamped, checking that the“red band” on the upper part of the han-dle (E) is concealed. In fact, this “redband” indicates that the seat back is notclamped.

Also check that the seat is firmly lockedon the runners, trying to move it to andfrom.

BACK REST ANGLE ADJUST-MENT (fig. 12)

Turn the knob(C) until reaching the posi-tion required.

fig. 13

A0A0023b

DRIVER’S SEAT LUMBARADJUSTMENT (fig. 12)

Turn the knob (D) until obtaining themost comfortable position.

DRIVER’S SEAT HEIGHTADJUSTMENT (fig. 12)

To raise the seat, pull the lever (B)upwards, then work the lever (up anddown) until reaching the required height,then release it. To lower the seat, push thelever (B) downwards, then work the lever(up and down) until reaching the requiredheight.

IMPORTANT Adjustment must be car-ried out only seated in the driver’s seat.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

18

REAR POCKETS (fig. 16)(for versions/markets whereapplicable)

The front seats are fitted with a pocketin the rear of the back rest.

HEADREST ADJUSTMENT (fig. 15)

To increase passengers’ safety, the head-rests are adjustable in height.

To adjust, press the button (A) andmove the headrest up or down until itclicks into place.

IMPORTANT The configuration of theheadrest cushion may vary depending onthe versions and markets. The purpose ofthe illustration is only to show how it isadjusted.

fig. 15

A0A0604b

Remember that headrestsshould be adjusted so thatthe nape, and not the neck,

rests on them. Only in this positiondo they exert their protective ac-tion in the event of a crash frombehind.

fig. 16

A0A0026b

SEAT WARMING (fig. 14)

Seat warming, fitted on certain versions,is turned on and off through the switch(A) on the outer side of the seat.

Switching on is shown by the lighting upof the led (B) on the switch itself.

fig. 14

A0A0024b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

19

REAR SEATS TILTING THE FRONT SEATBACK REST

To gain access to the rear seats, pull thehandle (A fig. 17), the back rest foldsand the seat is free to run forwards.

A recovery mechanism with memorymakes it possible to take the seat back toits previous position.

Always check that the seat is firmlylocked on the runners, trying to move it toand from.

EXTENDING THE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT

The split of rear seat makes it possible toextend the luggage compartment totallyor partially, acting separately on one ofthe two parts, thereby offering differentpossibilities of load depending on thenumber of rear passengers.

fig. 17

A0A0622b

If a particularly heavyload is placed in the boot,when travelling at night, it

is wise to check the height of thehigh beams (see “Headlamps”paragraph).

fig. 18

A0A0605b

Removing the rear parcel shelf

Proceed as follows:

– free the ends of the two rods (A-fig. 18) supporting the parcel shelf (B)pulling the eyelets (C) off the pins (D);

– release the pins (A-fig. 19) at theoutside of the shelf from their housings(B) obtained in the side supports, thenremove the shelf pulling it outwards.

fig. 19

A0A0255b



GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

20

– raise the headrest to the highest posi-tion, press both buttons (A-fig. 21) atthe side of the two supports, then removethe headrest pulling them upwards;

– move the seat belts to the sideextending them correctly without twisting;

– raise the levers (A-fig. 22) retain-ing the back rests and tilt them forwardsto obtain a single loading surface(fig. 23).

fig. 21

A0A0607b

fig. 23

A0A0608 b

Total extension

Proceed as follows:

– check that seat buckles of the sidebelts are fitted in the respective pocketson the back rest (A-fig. 20) and the tab(B) of the centre abdominal belt is insert-ed in the support (C).

– pull the handles in the centre of thecushions, then tilt them forwards;

fig. 20

A0A0623b

fig. 22

A0A0608 b

IMPORTANT For versions/marketswhere applicable, the retainer levers arereplaced by buttons (one for each side).To release the back rests and tilt them,use the buttons themselves.

Remember that headrestsshould be adjusted so thatthe nape, and not the neck,

rests on them. Only in this positiondo they exert their protective ac-tion in the event of a crash frombehind.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

21

Partial extension

For partial extension, proceed as fol-lows:

– tilt the cushion required pulling thehandle at the centre of the cushion, thentilting the actual cushion;

– move the seat belt to one side extend-ing it correctly without twisting;

– raise the lever retaining the back restand tilt it forwards.

To bring the seat back to its normal position

Proceed as follows:

– move the seat belts to one sideextending them correctly without twisting;

– raise the seat backs, pushing thembackwards until hearing both clampingdevices click into place;

– set the cushions to the horizontal posi-tion keeping the centre seat belt raised.

HEADREST ADJUSTMENT (fig. 24)

The car may be fitted with two headrestsfor the side seats and, depending on thetrim level, it may also have a third head-rest in the centre.

To use the headrest, raise it from the (2)“non use position” and reach the (1) “allremoved” position. To restore the “non useposition”, press button (A-fig. 21) andpush the headrest downwards.

All rear headrests can be removed.

fig. 24

A0A0610b

The particular headrest shape interferesintentionally with the rear passenger’s cor-rect position on the back rest; this forcesthe passenger to raise the headrest to useit correctly.

IMPORTANT When using rear seats,the headrests shall be kept in the “allremoved” position.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

22

STEERING WHEEL

The driver can adjust the steering wheelposition in rake and height.

To do this, release the lever (A-fig. 27)pulling it towards the steering wheel.

After moving the steering wheel to themost suitable position, lock it pushing thelever fully forwards.

LUGGAGE RETAINERNET (where fitted)

Present only on certain versions, theretainer net (fig. 26) is helpful in cor-rectly arranging the load and/or suitablefor transporting light materials.

fig. 27

A0A0706b

Any adjustment of thesteering wheel positionmust be carried out only

with the vehicle stationary.

CENTRAL ARMREST (fig. 25)

To use the armrest (A), present only oncertain versions, lower it as illustrated.

fig. 26

A0A0624b

fig. 25

A0A0611b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

23

REAR-VIEW MIRRORADJUSTMENT

INNER

The mirror, fitted with a safety devicethat causes it to be released in the eventof a violent crash, can be moved using thelever (A-fig. 28) to two different posi-tions, normal or antiglare.

fig. 28

A0A0039b

Folding (fig. 30)

– In the event of need (for examplewhen the mirror causes difficulty in narrowspaces) it is possible to fold the mirrormoving it from position (A) to position(B).

fig. 30

A0A0041b

When driving the mirrorsshould always be in posi-tion (A).

As the driver’s wing mir-ror is curved, it may slight-ly alter the perception of

distance.

OUTER

Electric adjustment (fig. 29)

– use the switch (A) to select the mir-ror required (right or left);

– pressing the button (B) in one of thefour directions, move the mirror selectedpreviously;

– position the switch (A) in the inter-mediate locking position.

IMPORTANT Adjustment is possibleonly with the ignition key at MAR.

fig. 29

A0A0040b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

24

POWER WINDOWS

For some versions, the power windowsare fitted with a safety system with crush-prevention seals. The electronic controlunit that operates the system is capable ofdetecting the presence of an obstacle dur-ing the window closing motion throughthe special seals. Should this occur, thesystem stops the movement of the win-dow and reverses it immediately.

IMPORTANT If the crush-preventionfunction is operated for 3 times in 1minute, the system automatically sets tothe “recovery” mode (self-protection). Toreset the correct system operating logic,press the control button until full windowopening. The logic is reset and if there areno faults, the window winder automatical-ly resumes normal operation; if not con-tact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

IMPORTANT With the ignition key atSTOP or removed, the power windowsremain activated for about 3 minutes andare deactivated immediately the momenta door is opened.

Driver’s side (fig. 33)

The driver’s door panel contains the but-tons that control the following windows,with the ignition key at MAR:A - left front windowB - right front window.Press the button to lower the window.

Pull to raise it.

Defrosting/demisting(fig. 31-32)

The electric mirrors are fitted with heat-ing coils which come into operation withrearscreen heating pressing the button(A) thereby defrosting and/or demistingthe mirrors.

IMPORTANT The function is timedand automatically switched off after a fewminutes.

fig. 32

A0A0612b

fig. 31

A0A0042b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

25fig. 33

A0A0043b

fig. 34

A0A0044b

IMPORTANT The driver’s power win-dow is fitted with the “continuous auto-matic operation” device for both loweringand raising the window. A brief press onthe upper or lower part of the button willcause it to move and continue automati-cally: the window stops in the requiredposition by pressing either the upper orlower part of the button again.

Passenger’s side (fig. 34)

The button (A) controls the passenger’sside window.

Button and window operation is thesame as that described for the driver'sside.

Do not keep the buttonpressed when the windowis completely raised or

lowered.

IMPORTANT For versions/marketswhere applicable, if the car is fitted with thesafety system with crush-prevention seals,after locking the doors, keeping the remotecontrol button pressed for about 2 seconds,causes automatic closing of the windows.The remote control button should be presseduntil the windows have completed theirstroke; releasing the button sooner, the win-dows stop in the position they are in at thatmoment.

On all versions, after unlocking the doors,keeping the remote control button pressedfor about 2 seconds, the windows and sun-roof (if present) are opened.

Improper use of powerwindows can be danger-ous. Before and during use,

always make sure that the pas-sengers are not exposed to the riskof harm either directly by the mov-ing windows or by personal objectsdrawn or knocked by them.

When leaving the car, al-ways remove the ignitionkey to prevent the power

windows from being operated in-advertently, and harming anyoneleft on board.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

26

Never press button (C)when travelling.

SEAT BELTS

USING THE SEAT BELTS

The belt should be worn keeping thechest straight and rested against the seatback.

To fasten the seat belts: hold thetongue (A-fig. 35) and insert it into thebuckle (B), until hearing the locking click.At removal, if it jams, let it rewind for ashort stretch, then pull it out again withoutjerking.

To unfasten the seat belts: pressbutton (C-fig. 35). Guide the seat beltwith your hand while it is rewinding, toprevent it from twisting. Through the reel,the belt automatically adapts to the bodyof the passenger wearing it, allowing free-dom of movement.

When the car is parked on a steep slopethe reel mechanism may block; this is nor-mal. The reel mechanism prevents thewebbing coming out when it is jerked or ifthe car brakes sharply, in a collision orwhen cornering at high speed.

fig. 35

A0A0045b

IMPORTANT After control unit powerdisconnection (battery replacement or dis-connection and replacement of power win-dow control unit protection fuses), the pow-er window automatism shall be restored.

Proceed as follows with doors closed:

1. open the driver's window completelykeeping the button pressed for at least3 seconds after window opening (windowlower stop);

2. close the driver's window completelykeeping the button pressed for at least3 seconds after window closing (window up-per stop);

3. repeat the same procedure (point 1 and2) also for the front passenger's window;

4. check for proper initialisation by oper-ating the windows automatically.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

27

After adjustment, alwayscheck that the slider is an-chored in one of the posi-

tions provided. To do this, with thebutton (A) released, exert a fur-ther pressure to allow the anchordevice to catch if release did nottake place at one of the preset po-sitions.

Always adjust the seatbelt height when the vehi-cle is stationary.

fig. 37

A0A0686b

Rear belts

To fasten the belt: gently pull the beltfrom its reel and guide the tape to preventit from twisting, then insert the tongue(A-fig. 37) into the buckle housing(B).

To unfasten the belt: press button (E).

FRONT SEAT BELT HEIGHTADJUSTMENT

Always adjust the height of the beltsadapting it to the person who is wearingit. This precaution improves their effective-ness substantially reducing the risk ofinjury in the event of a crash.

Correct adjustment is obtained when thebelt passes half way between the end ofthe shoulder and the neck.

The front seat belt ring can take 4 dif-ferent positions which make it possible toadjust the height of the belts.

To adjust, press button (A-fig. 36) andlower or raise the grip (B).

fig. 36

A0A0685b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

28

Rear seat belts shall be worn accordingto the diagram illustrated in (fig. 38).(Fig. 39) shows the incorrect seat beltfastening operation. To tilt the back rest,see the paragraph “Extending the luggagecompartment”.

IMPORTANT Remember that, in theevent of an accident, any passengersoccupying the rear seats who are notwearing a seat belt not only subject them-selves to great personal risk, but consti-tute a danger to the occupants of the frontseats.

PRE-TENSIONING DEVICES

To increase the efficiency of the frontseat belts, the car is fitted with pre-ten-sioning devices. These devices “feel” thatthe car is being subject to a violent impactby way of a sensor and rewind the seatbelts a few centimetres. In this way theyensure that the seat belt adheres to thewearer before the restraining actionbegins.

The seat belt locks to indicate that thedevice has intervened; the seat belt can-not be drawn back up even when guidingit manually.

IMPORTANT The pretensioner willgive maximum protection when the seatbelt adheres snugly to wearer’s chest andhips.

fig. 39

A0A0387b

fig. 38

A0A0386b

Front seat pretensioners activate only iffront seat belts are properly fitted into thebuckles.

A small amount of smoke may be pro-duced. This smoke is in no way toxic andpresents no fire hazard.

The emergency tensioning retractorneeds no maintenance or lubrication. Anymodification to its original features willnullify the retractor effectiveness. If, dueto unusual natural events (floods, highwaves, etc.), the device has been affect-ed by water and mud, it must be replaced.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

29

Pre-tensioning devicescan only be used once. Af-ter they have been trig-

gered contact Alfa Romeo Autho-rised Services to have them re-placed. The validity of the device is10 years from the date of produc-tion on the sticker; the pretension-ers should be changed at an AlfaRomeo Authorised Service as thisdate approaches.

Operations involvingbanging, vibrations orheating (above 100°C for

a maximum of 6 hours) in the areaof the pretensioners may damageor trigger off the device. Vibrationsfrom rough road surfaces or acci-dental jolting caused by mountingpavements etc. do not have any ef-fect on the pretensioner. If, how-ever, you need assistance, go to Al-fa Romeo Authorised Services.

fig. 40

A0A0675b

LOAD LIMITERS

To increase passengers’ protection in theevent of an accident, the front and rear(where provided) seat belt reels contain aload limiter which allows controlled sag insuch a way as to dose the force acting onthe shoulders and chest during the beltrestraining action in case of a crash.

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE USE OF THE SEATBELTS

All the occupants of the car are obligedto respect the local traffic laws regardingthe wearing of seat belts.

Always fasten the seat belts before start-ing.

Seat belts are also to be worn by expec-tant mothers: the risk of injury in the caseof accident is greatly reduced for themand the unborn child if they are wearing aseat belt. Pregnant women must of courseposition the lower part of the belt very lowdown so that it passes under the abdomen(as illustrated in fig. 40).

Under no circumstancesshould the components ofthe seat belt and preten-

sioner be tampered with or re-moved. Any operation should becarried out by qualified and autho-rised personnel. Always contact anAlfa Romeo Authorised Service.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

30

IMPORTANT The seat belt must not betwisted. The upper part must pass over theshoulder and diagonally across the chest.The lower part must rest across the pelvisand not across the (fig. 41) stomach. Donot use devices (clips, stoppers, etc.) whichkeep the belts away from the body.

To ensure the highest de-gree of protection, you arerecommended to keep the

seat backrest in the straightest po-sition possible, and the belt adher-ing well to the chest and pelvis.Seat belts should always be wornin both the front and rear positions!Travelling without seat belt in-creases the risk of serious injury ordeath in the case of accident.

fig. 41

A0A0673b

fig. 42

A0A0051b

IMPORTANT Each seat belt shall beworn only by one person: do not carry chil-dren on your knee using a single seat beltfor both (fig. 42). Do not fasten otherobjects to the body.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

31

HOW TO KEEP THE SEAT BELTSALWAYS IN EFFICIENTCONDITIONS

To keep the seat belts always in efficientconditions, observe the following:

– always use the belts with the tapewell taut and never twisted; make surethat it is free to run without impediments;

– after a serious accident, replace thebelt being worn at that time, even if itdoes not appear damaged. Always replacethe seat belts if pretensioners have beenactivated;

– to clean the belts, wash by hand withneutral soap, rinse and leave to dry in theshade. Never use string detergents, bleachor dyes or any other chemical substancethat might weaken the fibres;

– prevent the reels from getting wet:correct operation of them is only guaran-teed if water does not get inside;

– replace the seat belt if it shows signif-icant wear or cut signs.

If the seat belt has beensubjected to shock, for ex-ample during an accident, it

must be completely replaced to-gether with the attachments andtheir screws, and the pretension-ing devices, even if visible defectsare not detected, as the belt mayhave lost its resilience.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

32

CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY

For the best level of protection in theevent of a crash, all occupants must trav-el seated and secured by suitable restraintsystems. This is even more important forchildren.

According to 2003/20/EC Directive,this prescription is compulsory for allEuropean Community countries.

Compared with adults, a child’s head isproportionately larger and heavier thanthe rest of the body, while muscles andbone structure are not completely devel-oped. Therefore, in order to restrain themcorrectly in the event of a crash, differentsystems are needed than adult seat belts.

The results of research on the best pro-tection for a child are summarised inEuropean Standard ECE- R44, which inaddition to making them compulsory, sub-divides restraint systems into five groups:

Group 0 - until 10 kg in weight

Group 0+ - until 13 kg in weight

Group 1 9 - 18 kg in weight



As it may be noted, the groups overlappartly and in fact, in commerce it is possibleto find devices that cover more than oneweight group.

All the restraint devices must bear thehomologation data, together with the con-trol brand, on a solidly fixed label whichmust absolutely not be removed.

Over 1,50 m in height, from the point ofview of restraint systems, children are con-sidered as adults and wear belt normally.

The Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo includesseats for each weight group, which are therecommended choice because they havebeen designed and specifically experi-mented for Alfa Romeo cars.

With passenger’s air bagactive, never place child’sseats with the cradle fac-

ing backwards since the air bag ac-tivation could cause to the child se-rious injuries, even mortal, re-gardless of the seriousness of thecrash that triggered it. You are ad-vised to carry children always withproper restraint systems on therear seats, as this is the most pro-tected position in the case of acrash.

SERIOUS DANGERIf it is absolutelynecessary to carry a

child on the front passenger seatwith the cradle child’s seat facingbackwards, the front passenger’sair bag must be deactivated usingthe key switch. In this case it is ab-solutely necessary to check thewarning light F on the instru-ment panel (see paragraph “Pas-senger’s front air bag”) to makesure that deactivation has actual-ly taken place. Moreover, the frontpassenger’s seat shall be adjust-ed in the most backward positionto prevent any contact betweenthe child’s seat and the dashboard.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

33

GROUP 0 AND 0+ (fig. 43)

Babies up to 13 kg must be carried fac-ing behind on a cradle seat which, sup-porting the head, does not induce strainon the neck in the event of a sharp decel-eration.

The cradle is restrained by the car safetybelts, as illustrated, and it should in turnrestrain the child with the belts incorporat-ed on it.

GROUP 1 (fig. 44)

Starting from 9 to 18 kg in weight, chil-dren may be carried facing forwards withseats fitted with front cushion, throughwhich the car seat belt restrains both childand seat.

The illustration is indica-tive only for assembly.Assemble the seat accord-

ing to the compulsory instructionsprovided with it.

Seats exist which aresuitable for coveringweight groups 0 and 1

with a rear connection to the carbelts and its own belts torestrain the child. Because oftheir mass, they can be danger-ous if installed incorrectly fas-tened to the car belts with acushion. Strictly adhere to theassembly instructions provided.

fig. 43

A0A0659b

fig. 44

A0A0660b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

34

GROUP 2 (fig. 45)

Starting from 15 to 25 kg in weight,children may be restrained directly by thecar seat belts.

Child seats only have the function ofpositioning the child correctly in relation tothe belts, so that the diagonal partadheres to the chest and never to the neckand that the horizontal part adheres to thechild’s pelvis and not to the abdomen.

GROUP 3 (fig. 46)

For children from 22 up to 36 kg thechild’s chest is thick enough not to needthe spacer back rest anymore.

The figure shows proper child seat posi-tioning on the rear seat.

Over 1,50 m in height, children maywear seat belts like adults.

The illustration is indica-tive only for assembly. As-semble the seat according

to the compulsory instructions pro-vided with it.

fig. 45

A0A0661b

fig. 46

A0A0662b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

35

PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON CHILD’S SEAT USE

The car omplies with the new EC Directive 2000/3 regulating child’s seat assembling on the different car seats according to the follow-ing table:

Key:

U = suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal category”, according to European Standard ECE-R44 for the specified “Group”.

Group

Group 0, 0+

Group 1

Group 2

Group 3

Range of weight

until 13 kg

9-18 kg

15-25 kg

22-36 kg

Frontpassenger

U

U

U

U

Rearpassengers

U

U

U

U

Centralpassenger

U

U

U

U

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

36

Below is a summary of the safe-ty rules to be observed when car-rying children:

– The recommended position forinstalling a child’s seat is on the rear seat,as it is the most protected in the event ofa crash.

– If the passenger’s air bag is deactivat-ed, always check the warning light Fon the cluster to make sure that it hasactually been deactivated.

– Carefully follow the instructions pro-vided with the child’s seat, which the sup-plier is obliged to attach. Keep them in thecar together with the documents and thisbooklet. Do not use used seats withoutthe instructions for use.

– Always pull the tape to check thatbelts are buckled.



– All restraint systems are strictly for onechild only: never use for two children atthe same time.

– Always make sure that the belts donot rest on the child’s neck.

– During the journey, do not allow thechild to stay in abnormal positions orrelease the belts.

– Do not carry children in your arms, noteven small babies. No-one, howeverstrong, can keep hold od them in a crash.

– In the case of accidents, replace thechild’s seat with a new one.

PRESETTING FORMOUNTING THE“TYPE ISOFIX” CHILDRESTRAINT SYSTEM

The vehicle is fitted with rear seatarranged for mounting type Isofix childrestraint system, a European standardisedsystem for mounting child restraints. TypeIsofix is an additional option that does notprevent from using traditional childrestraint systems. The type Isofix child’sseat covers three weight groups: 0, 0+and 1.

Due to its different anchoring system,the type Isofix child’s seat shall beanchored just using the metal brackets(A-fig. 47) set between rear seat backand cushion.

fig. 47

A0A0671b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

37

Mount the child restraintsystem only with the carstationary. The Isofix child

restraint system is properly an-chored to the mounting bracketswhen clicks are heard. In any case,keep to the installation instructionsthat must be provided by the childrestraint system Manufacturer.

– push the child restraint system untilhearing the locking clicks;

– check proper locking by moving thechild’s seat with force: the built-in safetymechanism actually inhibits proper cou-pling with only one coupling locked.

It is possible to mount both the tradi-tional restraint system and the type Isofixone, one on the left and the other on theright, for example.

Since sizes are different, it is possible toinstall max two traditional child’s seats onthe rear seats, or two type Isofix child’sseats. On the front passenger’s seat it ispossible to mount only traditional child’sseats.

These child’s seats are recommendedsince they have been designed and exper-imented expressely for this car.

fig. 48

A0A0663b

FITTING THE TYPE ISOFIXCHILD’S SEAT

Groups 0 and 0+For children of the 0 and 0+ group

(babies up to 13 Kg), the child’s seat isfacing backwards and the child is restrainedby the child’s seat belts (D-fig. 48).

As the child grows, passing to weightgroup 1, the child’s seat shall be fitted fac-ing forwards.

For proper mounting proceed as follows:

– check whether the release lever (B) isat rest position (inward);

– find the presetting brackets (A), thenposition the child restraint system with thefastening devices (C) aligned with thebrackets;

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

38

Group 1

For proper mounting proceed as follows:

– check whether the release lever (B-fig. 49) is at rest position (inward);

– find the presetting brackets (A), thenposition the child restraint system with fas-tening devices (C) aligned with the brack-ets;

– push the child restraint system untilhearing the locking clicks;

– check proper locking by moving thechild’s seat with force: the built-in safetymechanism actually inhibits improper cou-pling with only one coupling locked.

FRONT AND SIDE AIR BAGS

The car is fitted with front air bags forthe driver and for the passenger (sidebags - window bags).

FRONT AIR BAGS

The front air bag (driver’s and passen-ger’s) has been designed to protect theoccupants in the event of of head-oncrashes of medium-high severity by plac-ing the cushion between the occupant andthe steering wheel or dashboard.

Front air bags are designed to protectthe car occupants in front crashes andtherefore non-activation in other types ofcollisions (side collisions, rear-end shunts,roll-overs, etc...) is not a system malfunc-tion.

In the case of a crash, an electronic con-trol unit, when necessary, triggers inflationof the cushion.

The cushion inflates instantaneously, set-ting itself between the body of the frontoccupants and the structures that couldcause injury. The cushion then deflatesimmediately afterwards.

With this configuration, the child issecured also by the car seat belt and bythe upper belt. To apply car seat belts tochild’s seat refer to the child’s seat hand-book.

fig. 49

A0A0664b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

39

Do not apply stickers orother objects on the steer-ing wheel and on the pas-

senger’s air bag cover. Do not putobjects on the dashboard on thepassenger’s side (e.g. cell phones)because they may interfere withthe correct passenger’s air bagopening and seriously injure the oc-cupants of the car.

The driver’s and passenger’s front air baghas been designed to improve the protec-tion of a person wearing a seat belt.

Its volume at maximum inflation fillsmost of the space between the steeringwheel and the driver and between thedashboard and the passenger.

In the event of minor side crashes (forwhich the restraining action of the seatbelts is sufficient), the air bags are notdeployed. Also in this case it is of vitalimportance to wear the seat belts since incase of side crash they guarantee properpositioning of the occupant.

DRIVER’S FRONT AIR BAG

It is formed of a cushion contained in aspecial recess that inflates instantaneously(fig. 50).

The front air bag (driver’s and passen-ger’s) does not replace but is complemen-tary to the use of belts, which shouldalways be worn, as specified by law inEurope and most non-European countries.

In the event of a crash a person that isnot wearing the seat belt moves forwardsand may come into contact with the cush-ion while it is still opening. Under thesecircumstances the protection offered bythe cushion is reduced.

Front air bags may not be triggered inthe following conditions:

– collisions against highly deformableobjects which do not concern the car frontsurface (for example the bumper crashingagainst the guard rail);

– wedging under other vehicles or pro-tective barriers (for example under a lorryor guard rail);

as they do not offer any more protectionthan the seat belts and therefore activa-tion would be inappropriate. Therefore thefailure to be triggered does not mean thatthe system is not working properly.

fig. 50

A0A0613b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

40

PASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG

It is formed of a cushion contained in aspecial recess of the dashboard that inflatesinstantaneously and a cushion of bigger vol-ume than the driver’s one (fig. 51).

MANUAL DEACTIVATION OFPASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG(fig. 52) (optional for versions /markets where applicable)

Should it be absolutely necessary tocarry a child on the front seat, the pas-senger’s font air bag can be deactivated.

Deactivation/reactivation takes placewith ignition key at STOP and throughthe key operating the switch in the glovecompartment.

SERIOUS DANGERIf it is absolutelynecessary to carry a

child on the front passenger seatwith the cradle child’s seat facingbackwards, the front passenger’sair bags must be deactivated usingthe key switch. In this case it is ab-solutely necessary to check thewarning light F on the instru-ment panel (see paragraph “Pas-senger’s front air bag”) to makesure that deactivation has actual-ly taken place. Moreover, the frontpassenger’s seat shall be adjust-ed in the most backward positionto prevent any contact betweenthe child’s seat and the dashboard.

fig. 51

A0A0392b

fig. 52

A0A0392b



GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

41

The key can be inserted and removed inboth positions.

IMPORTANT Use the switch only withthe engine off and the ignition keyremoved.

The key-operated switch has two posi-tions:

– passenger’s front air bag activated(ON position P): warning light F oninstrument cluster off; it is absolutely pro-hibited to carry a child on the front seat.

– passenger’s front air bag deactivated(OFF positionF): warning light F oninstrument cluster on; it is possible tocarry a child protected by special restraintsystems on the front seat.

The warning light F on the clusterstays on permanently until the passen-ger’s air bag is reactivated.

Deactivation of the passenger’s front airbag does not inhibit operation of the sideair bag.

SIDE AIR BAGS(SIDE BAG - WINDOW BAG)

SIDE BAG (fig. 53)

The side bag is formed of an instanta-neously-inflating cushion housed in theback rest of the front seat and protects thechest of occupants in case of a side crashof medium-high severity.

WINDOW BAG (fig. 54)

The window bag is formed of two “cur-tain” cushions housed in the side roof lin-ing covered by a special trim, which pro-tects the head of front and rear occupantsin the event of a side crash thanks to thewide cushion inflation surface.

IMPORTANT In the event of sidecrash, you can obtain the best protectionby the system keeping a correct positionon the seat, thus allowing correct windowbag unfolding.

fig. 53

A0A0614b

fig. 54

A0A0615b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

42

IMPORTANT The front and/or side airbags may be activated if the car is sub-jected to heavy shocks or accidents thatinvolve the underbody area, such as forexample violent bumps against steps,pavements or fixed obstacles on theground, falling into big holes or bumpyroads.

IMPORTANT The triggering of airbags releases a small amount of powder.This powder is not harmful and does notindicate a start of fire; also the surfaces ofthe deployed bag and the car interior maybe covered with dusty residue: this mayirritate the skin and eyes. In the event ofexposure, wash with neutral soap andwater.

The validity of the air bag is 14 years forthe pyrotechnic charge and 10 years forthe twisted contact (see label on the frontdoor, on the left side of the lock area).Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services asthis date approaches.

IMPORTANT If an accident has trig-gered anyone of the safety devices, AlfaRomeo Authorised Services must be con-tacted to have the devices activatedreplaced and to have the whole systemchecked.

All operations involving checking, repair-ing and replacing components concerningthe air bag must be carried out by AlfaRomeo Authorised Services

If the car is to be demolished, AlfaRomeo Authorised Services should be con-tacted beforehand to have the systemdeactivated. If the car changes ownership,the new owner must be informed of theinstructions for use and of the above warn-ings and be given this “Owner’s Manual”.

IMPORTANT The triggering of thepretensioners, front air bags and side bagsis decided in a differentiated mannerdepending on the type of crash. The fail-ure to trigger one or more of them doesnot necessarily indicate a system malfunc-tion.

Never rest head, armsand elbows on the door, onthe windows and in the

window bag area to prevent pos-sible injuries during the inflationphase.

Never lean head, armsand elbows out of the win-dow.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

43

GENERAL CAUTIONS

If the ¬warning light doesnot turn on when turningthe ignition key to MAR or

if it stays on when travelling, thiscould indicate a failure in safety re-taining systems; under this condi-tion air bags or pretensioners couldnot trigger in the event of collisionor, in a restricted number of cas-es, they could trigger accidentally.Stop the car and contact AlfaRomeo Authorised Services.

Do not cover the back restof front seats with trims orcovers there are not set for

the use of side bags.

Never travel with objectson your lap, in front of thechest or with a pipe, pen-

cil, etc. Serious injury may result inthe case of the air bag being trig-gered.

Always keep your handson the steering wheel rimwhen driving, so that if the

air bag is triggered, it can inflatewithout meeting obstacles. Do notdrive with the body bent forwards,keep the seat back rest in the erectposition and lean your back wellagainst it.

If the car has been stolenor an attempt to steal ithas been made, if it has

been subjected to vandals orfloods, have the air bag systemchecked by Alfa Romeo AuthorisedServices.

You are reminded thatwhen the ignition key isengaged and in the MAR

position, even with the engine off,the air bags can be triggered alsoon a stationary vehicle, if it isbumped by another moving vehi-cle. Therefore, even with the carstationary, never allow children onthe front seat. You are also re-minded that with the ignition keyengaged in the STOP position, thesafety devices (air bags or preten-sioners) are not triggered in theevent of an impact; in this case thefailure to trigger the air bagsshould not be considered a systemfailure.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

44

STEERING WHEELLEVERS

The devices and services controlled bythe levers on the steering wheel can onlybe activated with the ignition key atMAR.

LEFT-HAND LEVER

The left-hand lever controls the outerlights except for the fog lamps and rearfog guards.

When the outer lights are switched on,the various controls on the dashboard areilluminated.

Only with the ignition key at PARK,regardless of the position of the knurledring, the sidelights and number platelights stay on.

Position (1 or 2-fig. 60) of the levercauses the turning on only of the side-lights (front and rear), on the right or leftrespectively.

Lights switched off (fig. 55)

When the pointer in the knurled ring isopposite the symbol O, the outer lightsare switched off.

Turning the ignition key toMAR, the Fwarning light(with the passenger’s front

air bag deactivation switch at ON)turns on and flashes for a few sec-onds to remind that the passen-ger’s air bag will be activated inthe event of a crash, then it goesoff.

The front air bags are de-signed to be triggered forheavier crashes than the

pretensioners. It is therefore nor-mal for the pretensioners only tobe triggered for crashes within thetwo activation thresholds.

Do not hook rigid objectsto the coat hooks and tothe support handles.

The air bag does not re-place the seat belts, but in-creases their effectiveness.

Additionally, as the front air bagsare not triggered for head-on-col-lision at low speed, side crashes,crashes from behind or overturn-ing, in these cases the occupantsare protected only by the seatbelts, which must, therefore, al-ways be fastened.

Do not wash the seatback with pressurised wa-ter or steam (by hand or at

automatic seat washing stations).

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

45

Sidelights (fig. 56)

The sidelights are switched on by turningthe knurled ring from O to 6.

The3 warning light on the instrumentcluster will come on at the same time.

Dipped-beam headlights (fig. 57)

These are switched on by turning theknurled ring from 6 to2.

fig. 55

A0A0063b

fig. 56

A0A0064b

Main beams (fig. 58)

To turn the main beams on, set theknurled ring to position 2 and push thelever towards the dashboard (stable posi-tion); warning light 1 on the instrumentpanel will turn on.

To set dipped-beams back pull the levertowards the steering wheel.

fig. 57

A0A0065b

fig. 58

A0A0066b

When the dipped beam headlights andthe fog lamps are switched on, the outerlight control unit (integrated in the BodyComputer) works according to the follow-ing logics:

– turning on the main beams, thedipped beams turn off while the fog lampsstay on, when restoring the starting con-dition at dipped beam setting;

or

– turning on the main beams, the foglamps turn off and then turn on againautomatically as the main beams areswitched off.

Therefore, in the event of BodyComputer replacement, the outer lightoperating logic may be different.

fig. 59

A0A0067b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

46

“Follow me home” device (fig. 61)

This function allows the illumination ofthe space in front of the car for the lengthof time set, and is activated with the igni-tion key at STOP or removed, pulling theleft-hand lever towards the steeringwheel.

This function is activated pulling the leverwithin 2 minutes from when the engine isturned off. At each single movement ofthe lever, the staying on of the dippedbeams and sidelights is extended by 30seconds up to a maximum of 3.5 min-utes; the lights switch off automaticallyafter the time set.

Each time the lever is operated, the 1warning light on the cluster turns on.

Flashing (fig. 59)

The headlights are flashed pulling thelever towards the steering wheel (instableposition) regardless of the position of theknurled ring. The 1 warning light on thecluster will come on at the same time.

IMPORTANT Only the main-beamlights are flashed. To avoid penalties followlocal regulations.

Direction indicators (fig. 60)

Regardless of the position of the knurledring, moving the lever to the stable posi-tion will:

up, position (1) - engage the right-handdirection indicators.

down, position (2) - engage the left-hand direction indicators.

One of the warning lights (R or E) willcome on on the instrument cluster at thesame time.

The lever is returned to its position auto-matically and the indicators are switchedoff when the steering wheel is straight-ened.

IMPORTANT If you wish to signal arapid change of direction involving only aminimal movement of the steering wheel,the lever can be removed up or downwithout it clicking (unstable position).When released, the lever will return to itshome position.

fig. 61

A0A0067b

fig. 60

A0A0068b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

47

This function can be interrupted by keep-ing the lever pulled towards the steeringwheel for more than 2 seconds.

RIGHT-HAND LEVER

The right-hand lever is used to operatethe windscreen wiper-washer andrearscreen wiper-washer. The windscreenwasher also activates the headlamp wash-ers, if fitted.

fig. 62

A0A0616b

Windscreen wiper-washer (fig. 62-63)

The lever can be moved to five differentpositions, corresponding to:

A - Windscreen wiper off.

B - Intermittent.

With the lever in position (B), turningthe ring (F), four possible intermittentspeeds are obtained:

■ = intermittent slow.■■ = intermittent medium.■■■ = intermittent medium-fast.■■■■ = ntermittent fast.

C - Continuous, slow.

D - Continuous, fast.

E - Fast, temporary (unstable position).

Operation in position (E) is limited to thetime the lever is held in this position. Whenthe lever is released, it returns to position(A) automatically stopping the wiper.

“Intelligent washing” function

Pulling the lever towards the steeringwheel (unstable position) operates thewindscreen washer.

Keeping the lever pulled, with only onemovement it is possible to operate thewasher jet and the wiper at the sametime; indeed, the latter comes into actionautomatically if the lever is pulled formore than half a second.

The wiper stops working a few strokesafter releasing the lever; a further “clean-ing stroke” after a few seconds completesthe wiping operation.

fig. 63

A0A0617b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

48

At each start, the rain sensor automati-cally stabilises at a temperature of about40°C to eliminate any condensation fromthe control surface and prevent the forma-tion of ice.

The rain sensor is able to detect andautomatically adapt to the presence of thefollowing particular conditions whichrequire different sensitivity:

– impurities on the control surface (salt,dirt, etc.);

– streaks of water caused by worn wiperblades;

– difference between day and night (thehuman eye is more disturbed during thenight by the wet glass surface).

Rain sensor (fig. 64)

The rain sensor (A), fitted only on cer-tain versions, is an electronic device com-bined with the windscreen wiper whichhas the purpose of automatically adjustingthe number of wipes during intermittentoperation to the intensity of the rain.

All the other functions controlled by theright-hand lever remain unchanged.

The rain sensor is activated automatical-ly moving the right-hand lever to position(B-fig. 62) and it has a range of adjust-ment that gradually varies between wiperstationary (no wiping) when the wind-screen is dry, to wiper at first continuousspeed (continuous, slow) with heavy rain.

Turning the knurled ring (F-fig. 62) itis possible to increase the sensitivity of therain sensor, obtaining a quicker changefrom stationary, when the windscreen isdry, to first continuous speed (continuous,slow).

Operating the windscreen washer withthe rain sensor activated (lever at positionB) the normal washing cycle is performedat the end of which the rain sensorresumes its normal automatic function.

Turning the ignition key to STOP therain sensor is deactivated and the nexttime the engine is started (MAR posi-tion) it will not be reactivated even if thelever has remained in position (B). In thiscase to activate the rain sensor, simplymove the lever to (A) or (C) and thenback to (B).

When the rain sensor is reactivated inthis way, the wiper performs at least onestroke, even if the windscreen is dry, toindicate that reactivation has occurred.

The rain sensor is located behind theinner rear-view mirror in contact with thewindscreen and inside the area cleaned bythe wiper and it controls an electronic con-trol unit which in turn controls the wipermotor.

fig. 64

A0A0331b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

49

Headlamp washers (fig. 65)

These come into operation when thewindscreen washer is turned on with thedipped/main beam headlights on.

IMPORTANT On certain versionswhen the headlamp washer is operating,the climate control system automaticallyengages inside air re-circulation, to pre-vent the smell of liquid detergent fromentering the passenger compartment.

CRUISE CONTROL

GENERAL

The speed regulator (CRUISE CON-TROL), with electronic control, makes itpossible to drive the car at the requiredspeed without pressing the acceleratorpedal. This reduces driving fatigue duringlong journeys because the speed memo-rised is automatically maintained.

IMPORTANT The device can only beengaged at speeds between 30 and 190km/h.

fig. 65

A0A0704b Cruise Control must be ac-tivated only when theroute and traffic allow a

constant speed for a sufficientlylong distance completely safely.

The device is disengaged automaticallyin any of the following cases:

– pressing the brake pedal;

– pressing the clutch pedal;

– if the ASR, MSR or VDC system cuts in;

– with Selespeed transmission if a gearis changed;

– inadvertently moving the Selespeedgear control lever to N.

CONTROLS (fig. 66)

Cruise Control is controlled by theON/OFF knurled ring (A), by the +/–ring(B) and by the RES button (C).

Ring (A) has two positions:

– OFF in this position the device isdeactivated;

fig. 66

A0A0077b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

50

TO MEMORISE THE SPEED

Move the ring (A) to ON and take thecar to the required speed normally. Turnthe ring (B) to (+) for at least three sec-onds, then release it. The car speed ismemorised and it is therefore possible torelease the accelerator pedal.

The car will continue to travel at thememorised constant speed until one ofthe following conditions takes place:

– pressing the brake pedal;

– pressing the clutch pedal;

– if the ASR, MSR or VDC system cutsin;

– with Selespeed transmission if a gearis changed;

– inadvertent movement of theSelespeed gear control lever to positionN.

IMPORTANT In the case of need(when overtaking for instance) accelera-tion is possible simply pressing the accel-erator pedal; later, releasing the accelera-tor pedal, the car will return to the speedmemorised previously.

TO RESET THE MEMORISED SPEED

If the device has been disengaged forexample pressing the brake or clutchpedal, the memorised speed can be resetas follows:

– accelerate gradually until reaching aspeed approaching the one memorised;

– engage the gear selected at the timeof speed memorising (4th, 5th or 6thspeed);

– press the RES button (C).

TO INCREASE THE MEMORISED SPEED

The speed memorised can be increasedin two ways:

1) pressing the accelerator and thenmemorising the new speed reached (turn-ing the ring to (B) for more than three sec-onds);

or2) momentaneously turning the ring (B)

to (+): each pulse of the ring will corre-spond to a slight increase in speed (about1.5 km/h) while pressing continuouslywill correspond to a continuous speedincrease. Releasing the ring (B) the newspeed will be memorised automatically.

– ON is the normal operating positionof the device. When the ring (A) is in thisposition, the warning light Ü on theinstrument cluster turns on.

Ring (B) serves for memorising andmaintaining the car sped or for increasingor lowering the speed memorised.

Turn the ring (B) to (+) to memorisethe speed reached or increase the speedmemorised.

Turn the ring (B) to (–) to lower thespeed memorised.

Each time the ring is actuated (B) thespeed increases or lowers by about 1.5km/h.

Keeping the ring turned the speedchanges continuously. The new speedreached will be maintained automatically.

The RES button (C) resets the memo-rised speed.

IMPORTANT Turning the ignition keyto STOP or the ring (A) to OFF, thespeed memorised is cleared and the sys-tem is switched off.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

51

TO REDUCE THE MEMORISED SPEED

The speed memorised can be reduced intwo ways:

1) disengaging the device (for instancepressing the brake pedal) and then mem-orising the new speed (turning the ring(B) to (+) for at least three seconds);

2) keeping the ring pressed (B) at (–)until reaching the new speed which will bememorised automatically.

The device may only be engaged in in4th, 5th or 6th gear, depending on thespeed of the car. Travelling downhill withthe device engaged the car speed mayincrease more than the memorised one,due to the change in the engine load.

The ring (A) may be left constantly atON without damaging the device. Youare, however, advised to switch the deviceoff when not in use, turning the ring toOFF, to avoid memorising speeds byaccident.

It is advisable to engage the cruise con-trol only when the conditions of the trafficor roads so permit under completely safeconditions, i.e.: straight and dry roads,dual carriage ways or motorways, flowingtraffic and smooth road surface. Do notengage the device in town or in heavytraffic conditions.

When travelling with thecruise control on, do notmove the gearshift lever to

neutral and do not move the Sele-speed selector to N.

Cruise control may onlybe engaged at speeds be-tween 30 and 190 km/h.

If the device is faulty ornot working, turn the ring(A) to OFF and contact Al-

fa Romeo Authorised Services af-ter checking that the protectionfuse is intact.

ESETTING THE MEMORISEDSPEED

The memorised speed is automaticallyreset turning off the engine or moving thering (A) to OFF.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

52

DASHBOARD(As concerns right-hand drive versions, see dashboard and instrument panel controls described in the dedicated paragraph at the end of this

manual)

1. Side swivel air vents - 2. Fixed side window air vents - 3. Outer light control lever - 4. Speedometer with mileage recorder and trip recorder and headlampaiming display - 5. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light - 6. Multifunction display - 7. Engine coolant fluid temperature gauge - 8. Rev counter - 9. Tail-gate release button - 10. Car holder (for versions/markets where applicable) - 11. Radio (for versions/markets where applicable) - 12. Centre swivel airvents - 13. Fixed upper vent - 14. Glass holder (for versions/markets where applicable) - 15. Fog lamp button - 16. Hazard warning light switch - 17. Rearfog guard button - 18. Passenger’s front Air bag - 19. Glove-box - 20. Door locking button - 21. Controls for heating, ventilation and climate control - 22. Cig-ar lighter/ashtray cover - 23. Temperature sensor - 24. Windscreen wiper control lever - 25. Ignition key and switch - 26. Horn - 27. Steering wheel lock-ing/release lever - 28. Driver’s front Air bag - 29. Set of controls: trip meter reset, headlamp aiming device, trip computer - 30. Bonnet opening lever.

fig. 67

A0A0618b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

53

A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warninglight - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge with maximum temperature warn-ing light - C. Speedometer - D. Odometerdisplay (mileage recorder, trip recorder withheadlamp position display - E. Reconfigu-rable multifunction display - F. Rev counter

Petrol version

A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warninglight - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge with maximum temperature warn-ing light - C. Speedometer - D. Odometerdisplay (mileage recorder, trip meter withheadlamp position display) - E. Reconfigu-rable multifunction display - F. Rev counter

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Petrol versions

fig. 68 - 1.8 T. SPARK - 2.0 JTS

fig. 69 - 2.0 JTS Selespeed

A0A0656b

A0A0655b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

54

fig. 70 - 3.2 V6

fig. 71 - JTD 16V

Petrol versions


Diesel versions


A0A0687b

A0A0657b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

55

SPEEDOMETER

The gauge (A-fig. 72) indicates thecar speed.

MILEAGE RECORDER

Odometer display (B-fig. 72) withdouble meter (total and trip) and head-lamp position display.

The display shows:

– the mileage on the first line (6 fig-ures)

– the trip meter on the second line (4figures)

– the position relating to the headlampaiming device.

To reset the trip meter, keep the button(A-fig. 73) on the plate at the side ofthe steering column pressed a few sec-onds.

IMPORTANT If the battery is discon-nected the trip meter reading is notstored.

REV COUNTER (fig. 74-75)

The danger zone (red) indicates exces-sively high engine speed. Do not drive forlong periods with the pointer in this area.

IMPORTANT The electronic injectioncontrol system gradually shuts off the flowof fuel when the engine is “over-revving”resulting in a gradual loss of engine power.

When the engine is idling, the rev countermay indicate a gradual or sudden higheringof the speed, this is normal as it takes placeduring normal operation, for example whenengaging the climate control system or thefan. In particular a slow change in the speedpreserves the battery charge.

fig. 73

A0A0082b

fig. 74 - Petrol versions

A0A0666b

fig. 75 - JTD 16V versions

A0A0667b

fig. 72

A0A0665b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

56

FUEL LEVEL GAUGE WITHRESERVE INDICATOR

This shows the amount of fuel left in thefuel tank.

The warning light K (A-fig. 76) turnson to indicate that approx. 7 litres of fuelare left in the tank.

IMPORTANT Under certain conditions(heavy slopes, for instance), the reading onthe gauge may differ from the actualamount of fuel in the tank and changes inlevel may be indicated late.

This condition falls within the operationlogics of the electronic control circuit toavoid highly unstable readings due toswaying of the fuel when travelling.

IMPORTANT Refuelling shall always beperformed with engine off and ignition keyat STOP. If the engine is off but the key isat MAR, a wrong fuel level could tem-porarily be indicated. This is due to the inter-nal system control logic and cannot be con-sidered as a system malfunctioning.

ENGINE COOLANT FLUID TEMPERATURE GAUGE WITH MAXIMUM TEMPERATUREWARNING LIGHT

This shows the temperature of theengine coolant fluid and begins when thefluid temperature exceeds approx. 50°C.

Normally the pointer should be towardsthe middle of the scale. If the pointerreaches the higher temperatures of thescale (red area) the request for vehicleperformance should be decreased.

The turning on of the u (B-fig. 76)warning light(on some versions togetherwith the message shown on the reconfig-urable multifunction display) indicates thatthe coolant fluid temperature is too high;in this case, stop the engine and contactAlfa Romeo Authorised Services.

IMPORTANT The temperature of theengine coolant may rise towards the max-imum values (red zone) when the vehicleis driven at low speeds, especially whenthe ambient air temperature is high. Inthis case it is advisable to stop the vehicleand switch off the engine for a few min-utes, after which the journey can beresumed, preferably at a higher speed.

fig. 76

A0A0668b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

57

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY (where fitted)

The digital multifunction display shows the following: clock, outside temperature, buzzer setting (buzzer on/off), rheostat (light adjust-ment), condition of the inertial fuel cut-off switch (FPS on).

CONTROL BUTTONS (fig. 75)

To make use of the information the digital display (with the ignition key at MAR) is able to give, you should firstly familiarise with thecontrol buttons on the plate at the side of the steering column, using them as described in the following paragraphs. Before doing anythingat all, you are advised to read this chapter in full.

To increase the value displayed

To decrease the value displayed

Press for less than 1 second (pulse), indicated with Q in the followingdescriptions, to access the various adjustments

Press for more than 2 seconds, indicated with R in the following descrip-tions, to confirm the choice required and return to the previous display

IMPORTANT When the standard display is on (clock + outside temperatured), pressingâ orã the lighting adjustment rheostat is turned on.

fig. 75

A0A0022b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

58

CLOCK (fig. 76)

Adjusting the hours

Press the MODE button in Q, the hourswill flash. Set the hour required using buttonâ orã.

Every press on the button will increaseby one unit.

Keeping the button pressed obtains auto-matic fast increase or decrease.

When you are near the value required,release the control and complete adjust-ment with single presses.

Then press the MODE button in R tostore.

fig. 76

Adjusting the minutes

Press the MODE button twice in Q,the minutes will flash. Set the minutesrequired using button â orã.

Every press on the button will increaseby one unit.

Keeping the button pressed obtains auto-matic fast increase or decrease.

When you are near the value required,release the control and complete adjust-ment with single presses.

Then press the MODE button in R tostore.

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE (fig. 76)

Outside temperature can be viewed onthe display lower side, under the hour indi-cation. When the outside temperature isbelow or 3° C, the indicator starts flashingtogether with the buzzer, to warn the dri-ver about the possible presence of ice onthe road. The acoustic signal lasts about 2seconds, while the outside temperatureindicator flashes for about 10 seconds.The signal of possible presence of ice onthe road is repeated only if the outsidetemperature is over 6° C and then reach-es again 3° C.

A0A0009b

fig. 77

A0A0083b

BUZZER (fig. 77-78)

The buzzer which accompanies the con-trols may be activated (ON) or deactivat-ed (OFF); proceed as follows:

Press the MODE button 3 times in Q,then use button â orã, to turn thebuzzer on or off.

The press the MODE button in R tostore the condition chosen.

clock and outside temperature display buzzer activated display (ON)

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

59

fig. 79

A0A0012b

fig. 80

A0A0013b

fig. 81

A0A0007b

plate at the side of the steering column)for more than 4 seconds the completeinstrument cluster lighting is turned onagain.

INERTIAL FUEL CUT-OFFSWITCH ON DISPLAY (fig. 81)

The display shown appears automatical-ly when the inertial fuel cut-off switch cutsin, following a crash of a certain magni-tude.

The switch shuts off the supply of fuel.

IMPORTANT See the description inthe Controls paragraph under the Inertialfuel cut-off switch.

display with minimum brightness

display with maximum brightness inertial fuel cut-off switch on display

fig. 78

A0A0014bbuzzer deactivated display (OFF)

LIGHT RHEOSTAT (fig. 79-80)

This function makes it possible to adjustthe lighting (dimming/increasing) of theinstrument cluster, odometer display (totaland trip meter, headlamp aiming devicedisplay) of the clock/outside temperaturedisplay and of the radio display.

To obtain the required lighting adjust-ment use button â or ã when thestandard display is on (clock + outsidetemperature).

Partial lighting

Keeping theã button pressed (on theplate at the side of the steering column)for more than 4 seconds the instrumentcluster lighting is turned off with the excep-tion of the speedometer.

Keeping theâ button pressed (on the

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

60

RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY

The reconfigurable multifunction displayis able to display all the useful and neces-sary information when driving and a menuallows the following adjustments and/orsettings:TIMEDATEOUTSIDE TEMPERATUREINFORMATION ABOUT VEHICLE CONDI-TION

- Trip computer- Lighting adjustment (rheostat)- Display of failure messages with corre-

sponding symbol- Display of warning messages with cor-

responding symbol (e.g.: possible iceon road)

- Gear selected, for 2.0 JTS Selespeedversions

- Engine oil level (JTD versions only)

Reconfigurable multifunctiondisplay menu

SPEED- Activation/deactivation of the corre-sponding indication (ON/OFF)

- Setting the speed limit

TRIP B- Activation/deactivation of the corre-

sponding function (ON/OFF)

TIME- Setting the hours- Setting the minutes

DATE- Setting the day- Setting the month- Setting the year

DST (SUMMER TIME)- Activation/deactivation of summer

time

MODE 12/24- Selecting the clock mode on 12 or 24

hours

RADIO- Activation/deactivation of the follow-

ing items on the display:frequency or RDS message of theradio station selected, compactdisc and corresponding track selected

TELEPHONE- Activation/deactivation of the follow-

ing items on the display:incoming or outgoing phone call withname and/or number of the sub-scriber connected

NAVIGATION- Activation/deactivation of the displays

and information concerning the routeto be followed

LANGUAGE- Setting the language of the messages

shown on the display

UNITS- Selection of the following units of mea-

sure: km, mi, °C, °F, km/l, l/100km,mpg

BUZZER- Buzzer volume adjustment

SERVICE- Display of information concerning cor-

rect vehicle maintenance, strictly con-nected with the ScheduledMaintenance Programme

MENU OFF- Exits the menu.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

61

T

CONTROL BUTTONS (fig. 82-83)

To use the information the reconfigurable multifunction display is able to give (with the ignition key at MAR) you should familiarise withthe control buttons (on the plate at the side of the steering column and on the top of the right lever) using them as described below. Beforedoing anything you are also advised to read this chapter in full.

fig. 82

fig. 83

Press for less than 1 second (pulse) indicated with T in the following dia-grams to move to the next screen

Press for more than 4 seconds indicated withU in the following diagrams toreset and then start a new journey

To scroll the display and the related options, upwards or to increase the valuedisplayed depending on the case

To scroll the display and the related options, downwards or decrease the valuedisplayed according to the case

Press for less than 1 second (pulse) indicated withQ in the following dia-grams, to confirm the choice required and/or move to the next screen oraccess the Menu

Press for more than 2 seconds indicated with R in the following diagrams,to confirm the choice required and return to the standard screen

A0A0022b

A0A0619b

IMPORTANT Buttonsâ andãacivate different functions depending on the follow-ing situations:

- When the standard screen is activated, they allow adjustment of the inner lighting (rheo-stat)

- Within the menu they allow scrolling up or down- They make it possible to increase or decrease during setting operations.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

62

MENU OFFSPEED

TRIP B

TIME

DATE

DST (SUMMER TIME)

MODE 12/24

RADIOTELEPHONE

NAVIGATION

LANGUAGE

UNITS

BUZZER

SERVICE

DESCRIPTION OF THE MENU

The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a “circular fashion” which can be selected through the â andã buttons foraccess to the different select operations and settings (see examples “LANGUAGE” and “DATE” below); for further details, also refer to“Access to the menu screen” in the previous chapter.

Day

Year Month

Q

English

Nederlands

Espãnol

Français

Deutsch

Italiano

Q

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

63

If the display shows a failure message, see the details given in the “Warning lights” chapter; if there are two or more failures, the display

shows them in cycle, one after the other. To eliminate the display of themessage and/or of the warning light repeated on the rev counter

by the reconfigurable multifunction display press button Q.

INITIAL CHECK

Turning the ignition key to MAR, the reconfigurable multifunction display shows the message CHECK ACTIVE: the diagnostic phase ofall the electronic systems on the car has started; this lasts for about 4 seconds (for JTD versions only, the multifunction reconfigurable dis-play is also able to show the engine oil level, see the “Engine oil level check” paragraph below). If no faults are detected, when the enginehas started, the display shows the OK message.

IMPORTANT If the reconfigurable multifunction display shows a failure message, see the details given in the “Warning lights” chapter.

Standard screen withmechanical transmission

Only JTD versions

Standard screen withSelespeed transmission

The Programmed MaintenanceSchedule includes vehicle

maintenance every 20,000km; this is shown automatical-

ly with the ignition key atMAR, starting from 2,000

km (or miles) from this dead-line and it is shown again

every 200 km.

If no failuresare present

Is the engine

started?YES

NO

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

64

Engine oil level check (JTD 16V versions)

Turning the ignition key to MAR thereconfigurable multifunction display showsthe engine oil level for 10 seconds. Duringthis phase, to clear the display and moveto the next screen, press Q.

IMPORTANT To make sure that theengine oil level displayed is correct, carryout the check with the vehicle on the levelground.

(Fig. 84) refers to the correct engineoil level display. As the oil level graduallyfalls, the full bars go off leaving room forthe empty ones.

fig. 84

A0A9101g

fig. 85

A0A9102g

fig. 86

A0A9103g

(Fig. 85) refers to the display with anoil level below the foreseen minimum. Inthis condition the bars are all empty.

IMPORTANT In this case the correctengine oil level should be restored as soonas possible, see “Checking levels” in the“Vehicle Maintenance” chapter.

(Fig. 86) refers to the display with anoil level above the foreseen maximum. Inthis condition the bars are all full.

IMPORTANT In this case, contact AlfaRomeo Authorised Services who willrestore the correct engine oil level.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

65

ACCESS TO MENU SCREEN

After the INITIAL CHECK, with the car stationary and with the standard screen, it is possible to access the menu screen: press Q.

To navigate use the â andã buttons.

Setting the speed limit is also possible with the car on the move.

If the waiting time (no operation) is above 10 seconds, the standard screen or the screen that was active before pressing the Q but-ton is restored automatically; all the operations confirmed are stored.

Display with mechanicaltransmission

Display with Selespeed transmission

Is the carmoving?

See next page to enterspeed limit.

SPEEDTRIP BTIMEDATEDST (SUMMER TIME)MODE 12/24RADIOTELEPHONENAVIGATIONLANGUAGEUNITSBUZZERSERVICEMENU OFF

Q

Q

SeeINITIAL CHECK NO

YES

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

66

SPEED

With this function it is possible to set the car speed limit which, if exceeded, automatically sounds a buzzer to alert the driver. To set thespeed limit, proceed as follows:

Use the â and/orãbuttons to set the speed required. During the setting operationthe value flashes on the screen. Every press of the button increases or decreases byone unit. Keeping the button pressed obtains fast increase or decrease. When you

are near the required setting release the button and complete adjustment with singlepresses. The possible setting is between 30 and 250km/h or between 20 and

160mph depending on the unit set previously (see UNITS paragraph described later).

Menu screen

Return to menu screen

Return to standard screen

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN

This screen is shownautomatically on the dis-play, together with the

sounding of a buzzer, assoon as the car exceeds

the set speed limit.

Q

R

Choose activation ordeactivation ON/OFF

Q

Q

R

âã

âã

âã

R

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

67

TRIP B (ON/OFF)

With this option it is possible to turn ON or OFF the TRIP B function (partial trip) which displays the figures relating to AVERAGE CONSUMPTIONB, AVERAGE VELOCITY B, TRAVEL TIME B, and TRAVEL DISTANCE B during a “partial mission” contained in the “general mission”. For further informa-tion see “General Trip - Trip B”.

Menu screen




Q

Q

R

R

âã

âã

Using the â orã buttonschoose activation or deactivation

ON/OFF

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

68

TIME

To adjust the clock (hours - minutes) proceed as follows:

Menu screen



Q

Q

Q

R

R

R

âã

âã

âã


Each press on the â orã button increases or

decreasesby one unit. Keeping the

corresponding button pressedobtains automatic fast increase ofdecrease. When you are near the

required value, release the control and complete adjustment

with single presses.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

69

DATE

To correct the date (day - month - year) proceed as follows:

Menu screen



Q

Q

Q

Q

R

R

R

R

âã

âã

âã

âã

Each press on the â orã button increases or

decreasesby one unit. Keeping the

corresponding button pressedobtains automatic fast increase ofdecrease. When you are near the

required value, release the control and complete adjustment

with single presses.


GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

70

DST (SUMMER TIME)

To activate/deactivate the summer time function (which corresponds to + 1 hour in relation to the daylight time), proceed as follows:

Menu screen



Selecting and activating the DST ON,

the display switches from daylight time to summer

timeand vice versa, with no need

to intervene manually on the TIME function described

previously.

Q

Q

R

R

âã

âã


GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

71

MODE 12/24

This function is used to set the clock in the 12 hour or 24 hour mode. To adjust, proceed as follows:

Menu screen


Return to standard screenQ

Q

R

R

âã

âã


GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

72

RADIO

In the RADIO DISPLAY ON condition, when the radio is turned on, the display repeats the display on the front panel of the radio itself. Toactivate/deactivate this function, proceed as follows:

Menu screen



Q

Q

R

R

âã

âã


GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

73

TELEPHONE

In the TELEPHONE DISPLAY ON condition, when a phone call arrives, the display shows (if listed) the name and phone number of thecaller. To activate/deactivate this function, proceed as follows:

Menu screen


Return tostandard screen

Q

Q

R

R

âã

âã


GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

74

NAVIGATION

In the NAVIGATION DISPLAY ON condition, during use of the radionavigator, the display repeats the display (pictograms) on the radion-avigator display itself. To activate/deactivate this function, proceed as follows:

Menu screen



Q

Q

R

R

âã

âã


GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

75

LANGUAGE

To select the language required for the texts and messages shown on the display, proceed as follows:

Menu screen



Q

Q

R

R

âã

âã


GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

76

UNITS

The display provides information in relation to the unit of measure set. To choose the units required, proceed as follows:

Menu screen



IMPORTANTThe units of temperature (°C or °F) set on the multifunction display are

also shown on the displays of the two-zone climate control and navigator.

Q

Q

Q

R

R

R

R

âã

âã

âã

âã

Q

R

âã

Q

R

âã

Q

R

âã

Q


GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

77

BUZZER

The buzzer that accompanies the controls in the car and any failure signals, can be adjusted to a pre-defined scale using the â and/orã buttons. To switch OFF or adjust, proceed as follows:

Menu screen



Q

Q

R

R

âã

âã

IMPORTANTIn the buzzer OFF condition any buzzer failure warnings

are maintained.


GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

78

SERVICE

With the SERVICE function it is possibleto receive information connected with cor-rect vehicle maintenance. To consult thisfunction, proceed as follows:

Menu screen

Return to menu screen Return to standard screen

IMPORTANTThe Programmed Mainte-nance Schedule includes ve-hicle maintenance every20,000 km; this is shown

automatically, with the ignition key at MAR, start-ing from 2,000 km (or miles) from this deadline andit is shown again every 200 km.This display can only be reset by Alfa Romeo AuthorisedServices.

Q

Q R

âã

â

ã

â

ã

â

ã

â

ã

â

ã

â

ã


Petrol versions

(•)

(•)

1.9 JTD 16V versions

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

79

MENU OFF

This is the last function that closes the circular setting listed in the initial menu screen.

Menu screen Return to standard screen

Qâã


GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

80

GENERAL TRIP - TRIP B

The TRIP COMPUTER function gives information relating to the operating status of the vehicle on the reconfigurable multifunction display.This function comprises the GENERAL TRIP concerning the complete mission of the car and TRIP B concerning the partial car mission. Thisfunction (as shown in the graph below) is contained within the complete mission. Both functions are resettable.

The GENERAL TRIP displays the figures relating to ACTUAL CONSUMPTION, AVERAGE CONSUMPTION, RANGE, AVERAGE VELOCITY, TRAVEL TIME (driving time),TRAVEL DISTANCE.

TRIP B, displays information concerning AVERAGE CONSUMPTION B, AVERAGE VELOCITY B, TRAVEL TIME B (driving time), TRAVEL DISTANCE B.

Start of journey procedure (reset)To start a new journey monitored by the GENERAL TRIP, with the ignition key at MAR, press the button with U (see “Control buttons”).

The reset operation (pressing the U button) in the presence of the screen concerning the GENERAL TRIP also makes it possible to resetTRIP B. The reset operation (pressing the U button) in the presence of only the screens concerning TRIP B makes it possible to reset only theinformation associated with this function.

IMPORTANT The range and actual consumption information cannot be reset.

End of partial mission Start of new partial mission

Reset TRIP B

˙

Reset TRIP B


˙

˙

Reset TRIP B

˙ ˙

˙

TRIP B

TRIP B

TRIP B



Reset TRIP B

GENERAL TRIP

End of complete missionStart of new mission

Reset GENERAL TRIP˙

End of complete mission Start of new mission

Reset GENERAL TRIP˙

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

81

Standard screen with mechanical

transmission


Reset GENERAL TRIP and TRIP B

T

T

TT

TT T

U

U

UU

T

U

SeeINITIAL CHECK

Continues on nextpage

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

82

TRIP B ON?

IMPORTANT Pressing the P button returnsautomatically to the standard screen.

TT

UUUU

T T

Reset TRIP BU


YES

NOContinued from previous page

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

83

DIMMER

With this function it is possible to adjust the lighting (dimming/brightening) of the instrument cluster, mileage recorder (total, trip meter),headlamp aiming display, radio display, radio navigator display and two-zone climate control.

Partial lighting

Keeping theã button pressed (on the plate at the side of the steering column) for more than 4 seconds, the instrument cluster light-ing is turned off with the exception of the speedometer.

Keeping the â button pressed (on the plate at the side of the steering column) for more than 4 seconds, the complete instrument clus-ter lighting is turned on again.

Standard screen with mechanical

transmission



IMPORTANTWhen the outer lights are switched on, dimming of the brightness can be perceived. In the event of any faults, lighting adjustment

(rheostat) is not possible and the display is shown at its maximum brightness.

Q R

âã

âã

âã

SeeINITIAL CHECK

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

84

DISPLAYS IN CONCURRENCE WITH THE EVENT

Standard screen:when the radio isturned on in theRADIO DISPLAY ONcondition

Standard screen:when a phone call isreceived in the TELEPHONEDISPLAY ON condition

Display with the ignition key removed open-ing or closing a door.The reconfigurable multifunction displaytogether with the mileage recorder display(total and trip) is timed, after 10 seconds itgoes off automatically.

In the event of a failuresee the “Warning lights”chapter

Standard screen:during assisted navigation in the NAVIGATION DISPLAYON condition

The displays illustrated are purely indicative.

fig. 87

A0A0676b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

85

Warninglight on dial

Messageon display

WARNING LIGHTS

IMPORTANT The number of warning lights present depends on the type of engine and equipment with which the car is fitted.

xLOW BRAKE FLUID AND/OR HANDBRAKE ON

Turning the ignition key to MAR the warning light on the dial turns on, but it should go off afterapprox. 4 seconds.

The warning light turns on when the level of the brake fluid in the reservoir falls below the min-imum level, due to a possible leak in the circuit and when the handbrake is engaged.

If the x warning light turns on when travelling check that the hand-brake is not engaged. If the warning light stays on with the handbrakeoff (on some versions together with the message + symbol shown on

the reconfigurable multifunction display) stop the car immediately and contactAlfa Romeo Authorised Services.

uHIGH ENGINE COOLANT FLUID TEMPERATURE


The warning light turns on (on some versions together with the message + symbol shown onthe reconfigurable multifunction display) when the engine is overheated. If it turns on when trav-elling, stop the car, leaving the engine on and slightly accelerated to further activate the circula-tion of the coolant fluid.

If the warning doesn’t go off within 2 or 3 minutes, stop the car immediately and contact AlfaRomeo Authorised Services.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

86


Messageon display

¬AIR BAG FAILURE

Turning the ignition key to MAR the warning light on the dial turns on, but it should go off afterapprox. 4 seconds. The warning light stays on glowing steadily if there is an operating failure inthe Air bag system.

If the ¬ warning light does not turn on when turning the ignition keyto MAR or if it stays on when travelling, this could indicate a failure insafety retaining systems; under this condition air bags or pretension-

ers could not trigger in the event of collision or, in a restricted number of cas-es, they could trigger accidentally. Stop the car and contact Alfa Romeo Autho-rised Services.

The failure of the ¬ warning light (warning light off) is also indicat-ed by the flashing for more than the normal 4 seconds of the passen-ger’s front air bag deactivated warning light.

vLOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE

Turning the key to MAR the warning light on the dial turns on, but it should go out as soon asthe engine is started.

If the v warning light turns on when the car is travelling (onsome versions there is also the message + symbol on the reconfig-urable multifunction display), stop the engine immediately and contact

Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

87


Messageon display

wLOW BATTERY CHARGE

Turning the key to MAR the warning light on the dial turns on, but it should go out as soon asthe engine is started.

If with the engine running the message + symbol are shown on the reconfigurable multifunctiondisplay, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

<SEAT BELTS NOT FASTENED

The warning light on the dial turns on glowing steadily when, with the ignition key turned toMAR, the driver’s belt is not correctly fastened.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

88

´INCOMPLETE DOOR CLOSING

The warning light on the dial turns on (on some versions the message + symbol are shown onthe reconfigurable multifunction display) when one or more doors or the tailgate are not proper-ly shut.


Messageon display

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

89


Messageon display

dBRAKE PAD WEAR

The warning light on the dial turns on with the brake pedal pressed (on some versions the mes-sage + symbol are shown on the reconfigurable multifunction display) if the front brake pads areworn; in this case have them changed as soon as possible.

IMPORTANT As the car is fitted with wear sensors for the front brake pads, when changingthem, also check the rear brake pads.

AUTOMATIC SELESPEED TRANSMISSION FAILURE

The message and the symbol t appear on the reconfigurable multifunction display whenthere is a fault in the Selespeed gearbox. Go to the nearest Alfa Romeo Authorised Service tohave the fault eliminated.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

90


Messageon display

UEOBD ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE

In normal conditions, turning the ignition key to MAR, the warning light turns on, but it shouldgo off when the engine has started. The initial turning on indicates that the warning light is work-ing properly.

If the warning light stays on or turns on when travelling (on some versions the message + sym-bol are shown on the reconfigurable multifunction display):

glowing steadily - means a fault in the supply/ignition system which could cause high emis-sions at the exhaust, possible lack of performance, poor handling and high consumption levels.

In these conditions it is possible to continue driving without however demanding heavy effort orhigh speeds. Prolonged use of the vehicle with the warning light on may cause damage. ContactAlfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible.

The warning light goes off if the fault disappears, but it is still stored by the system;

flashing - indicates the possibility of damage to catalyst (see “EOBD system” in the chapter).

If the warning light flashes, it is necessary to release the accelerator pedal to lower the speedof the engine until the warning light stops flashing; continue the journey at moderate speed, try-ing to avoid driving conditions that may cause further flashing and contact Alfa Romeo AuthorisedServices as soon as possible.

If, turning the ignition key to MAR, the U warning light does notturn on or if it turns on glowing steadily or flashing when travelling,contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

91


Messageon display

ALFA ROMEO CODE SYSTEM

Turning the key to MAR the warning light on the dial turns on; it should flash only once andthen go off. If, with the ignition key at MAR, the warning light stays on, this indicates a possi-ble failure: “Alfa Romeo CODE system”.

IMPORTANT The turning on at the same time of the U andY warning lights indicatesa failure of the Alfa Romeo CODE system.

If, with the engine running, the message + symbol are shown on the reconfigurable multifunc-tion display, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services immediately.

Y

If with the engine running, the Y warning light flashes, on some versions together with themessage + symbol on the reconfigurable multifunction display, this means that the car is not pro-tected by the engine inhibitor device (see “Alfa Romeo CODE system” in this chapter). ContactAlfa Romeo Authorised Services to have all the keys memorised.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

92


Messageon display

GLOW PLUGS

Turning the key to MAR the warning light on the reconfigurable multifunction display turns on;the warning light turns off when the glow plugs have reached the pre-established temperature.

Start the engine as soon as the warning light goes off.

IMPORTANT With a high environment temperature, the warning light may turn on for animperceptible length of time.

WATER IN FUEL OIL FILTER

The message + symbol are shown by the reconfigurable multifunction display when there iswater in the fuel oil filter.

The presence of water in the supply circuit may cause serious dam-age to the entire injection system and cause irregular engine opera-tion. If the message + symbol are shown by the reconfigurable multi-

function display, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possibleto have the system relieved.

GLOW PLUG WARMING FAILURE

The message + symbol are shown by the reconfigurable multifunction display when there is afailure in the glow plug warming system. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as pos-sible to have the fault eliminated.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

93


Messageon display

INERTIAL FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH

The message on the display is shown when the inertial fuel cut-off switch is triggered, on someversions together with the warning light.

If after the display of the message the smell of fuel or leaks from thesupply system are noted, do not re-engage the switch to avoid the riskof fire.

ENGINE OIL SENSOR FAILURE

The message is shown by the reconfigurable multifunction display when there is a failure to theengine oil level sensor. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible to have thefault eliminated.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

94


Messageon display

>INEFFICIENT ABS SYSTEM (where fitted)


The warning light turns on (on some versions the message + symbol are shown on the recon-figurable multifunction display) when the system is inefficient. In this case the braking systemkeeps its effectiveness unchanged, but without the potential offered by the ABS system. Cautionis advised, particularly in all cases of less than perfect grip. It is also necessary to contact AlfaRomeo Authorised Services.

The car is fitted with electronic braking distributor (EBD). The turn-ing on at the same time of the x and > warning lights on the dial(on some versions the message + symbol are shown on the reconfig-

urable multifunction display) with the engine running indicates an EBD systemfailure; in this case heavy braking may cause the rear wheels to lock beforetime, with the possibility of skidding. Driving extremely carefully, immedi-ately contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services to have the system checked.

The turning on only of the > warning light (on some versions themessage + symbol are shown on the reconfigurable multifunction dis-play) with the engine running normally indicates a failure of the ABS

system only. In this case the braking system maintains its effectiveness,without however the antilock function. In these conditions, the effectivenessof the EBD may also be reduced. In this case, too, you are recommended tocontact the nearest Alfa Romeo Authorised Service immediately, driving insuch a way as to avoid sharp braking, to have the system checked.

Inefficient EBD electronic braking distributor

x

>+

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

95


Messageon display

FPASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG DEACTIVATED

With the passenger’s front Air bag engaged, turning the ignition key to MAR the warning lightturns on, but it should go off after 4 seconds.

áVDC SYSTEM (VEHICLE DYNAMICS CONTROL) (where fitted)

Turning the ignition key to MAR, the warning light on the dial turns on and it should go offafter approx. 4 seconds.

If the warning light does not go out or stays on when travelling together with the message +symbol shown on the reconfigurable multifunction display, contact Alfa Romeo AuthorisedServices.

The flashing of the warning light when travelling indicates the cutting in of the VDC system.

ASR – WHEEL ANTISKID SYSTEM (where fitted)

Turning the ignition key to MAR, the warning light on the dial turns on, but is should go offafter approx. 4 seconds. The warning light turns on together with the led on the ASR OFF buttonwhen the system is switched off. The warning light flashes when the system cuts in, to alert thedriver that the system is adapting to the road surface grip conditions. The turning on of the warn-ing light, together with the message + symbol shown by the reconfigurable multifunction display,also indicates a failure of the ASR system. In this case contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services assoon as possible.

Warning light F indicates also warning light ¬ failure. This is indi-cated by intermittent flashing, over 4 seconds, of warning light F. Inthis event, warning light ¬ could be not up to indicate restraint sys-

tem failures, if any. Stop the car and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Servicesto have the system checked immediately.

The warning light turns on when the passenger’s front Air bag is deactivated.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

96


Messageon display

WLIGTH FAILURE

Turning the key to MAR, the warning light on the dial turns on but should go out after about6 seconds.

The message + symbol are shown by the reconfigurable multifunction display when a fault toany one of the following ligths is detected:

- sidelights- braking lights and corresponding fuse- rear fog lights- number plate lights.

The failure referring to these lights could be: one or more blown bulbs, a blown protection fuseor a cut-off electric connection.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

97


Messageon display

SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED

On some versions the warning light turns on, together with the message on the display and thesounding of the buzzer, when the vehicle exceeds the speed limit set previously (see the“Reconfigurable multifunction display” chapter).

KFUEL RESERVE

The warning light on the dial turns on (on some versions the message + symbol are shown onthe reconfigurable multifunction display) when about 7 litres of fuel are left in the tank and oncertain versions when autonomy is below 50 km.

AUTONOMY (TRIP COMPUTER)

The message + symbol are shown on the reconfigurable multifunction display when autonomyis below 50 km.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

This is shown on the reconfigurable multifunction display 2000 km from the deadline given inthe Scheduled Maintenance Programme (every 20,000 km) and it is shown again at timed inter-vals, turning the ignition key to MAR every 200 km.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

98


Messageon display

RLEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR (INTERMITTENT)

The warning light on the dial turns on when the direction indicator control lever is moved down-wards or, together with the right indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pressed.

ERIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR (INTERMITTENT)

The warning light on the dial turns on when the direction indicator control lever is movedupwards or, together with the left indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pressed.

3SIDELIGHTS AND DIPPED-BEAMS

The warning light on the dial turns on when the sidelights or dipped beams are turned on.

ÜCONSTANT SPEED ADJUSTMENT (CRUISE CONTROL)

The warning light on the dial turns on (on some versions the symbol is shown on the reconfig-urable multifunction display) with the knurled ring of the cruise control in the ON position.

1MAIN BEAMS

The warning light on the dial turns on when the main beams are turned on or when the “Followme home” device is turned on (see corresponding chapter).

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

99


Messageon display

WARNING LIGHT FAILURE

This is shown on the reconfigurable multifunction display when a fault is detected to one of thewarning lights indicated.

POSSIBLE PRESENCE OF ICE ON THE ROAD

The symbol √ + message are shown by the reconfigurable multifunction display and the buzzersounds, when the outside temperature reaches or falls below 3° C to warn the driver about the pos-sible presence of ice on the road. The buzzer lasts for 2 seconds while the outside temperature flash-ing message is displayed for about 10 seconds; after that time, only the symbol √ is displayed untilthe temperature goes beyond 6° C or the engine is stopped. If during travelling, after the signal ofpossible presence of ice on the road, temperature goes beyond 6° C, the symbol disappears and ifthe temperature reaches again 3°C, a new message (with outside temperature flashing) will be dis-played together with the corresponding symbol √ accompanied by the sound signal.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

100

1 Upper stationary vent for defrosting or demisting windscreen - 2 Upper centre adjustable vent - 3 Stationary vents for defrosting or demist-ing side windows - 4 Adjustable centre, swivel vents - 5 Side adjustable and swivel outlets - 6 Front feet area fixed vents - 7 Rear feet areafixed vents - 8 Rear adjustable swivel outlet.

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

fig. 88

A0A0703b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

101fig. 89 fig. 90 fig. 91

UPPER CENTRE VENT ADJUSTMENT (fig. 89)

The vent (1) has an opening/closing con-trol (A).

• = Completely closed.

I = Completely open.

CENTRE SWIVEL VENT ADJUSTMENT (fig. 89)

Each vent (2) has a lever (B) whichmakes it possible to direct the flow of air (inthe 4 directions: up/down, right/left).

To adjust the air flow, use control (C):


I = Completely open.

SIDE SWIVEL OUTLET ADJUSTMENT (fig. 90)

To direct the flow of air, turn the knurledring (A) and/or directly use control (B) asrequired.



I = Partially open.

II = Completely open.

D - fixed vent for defrosting or demistingside windows.

REAR SWIVEL OUTLET ADJUSTMENT (fig. 91)

To direct the flow of air, turn the knurledring (A) and/or directly use control (B) asrequired.



I = Partially open.

II = Completely open.

A0A0085b A0A0086b A0A0087b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

102

Below is a brief description of the manu-al heating system.

To obtain best performance from manualheater, set the knob pointer as shown in thedifferent figures.

For more detailed information about thesystem and how to make the best use ofit, read the instructions given in the follow-ing pages.

MANUAL HEATER

QUICK DEMISTING/DEFROSTING

MAXIMUM HEATING POWER

A0A0730b

A0A0731b

fig. 93

fig. 94

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

103

CONTROLS (fig. 95)

1 - Air temperature adjustment knob

2 - Fan speed adjustment knob

3 - Air distribution selector knob

4 - Inside air re-circulation on /off buttonv

5 - Rearscreen heating on/off button (.

fig. 95

A0A0732b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

104

AIR TEMPERATUREADJUSTMENT KNOB

Turn the ring of knob (1-fig. 95) clock-wise or counter-clockwise respectively tohigher or lower the temperature of the airadmitted to the passenger compartment.

AIRDISTRIBUTION KNOB

Turning the knob ring (3-fig. 95), thefollowing positions are selected in sequence:

Air flow towards the upper centre,front centre vents and from the front

and rear outlets with the possibility of ad-justment using the controls on the actualvents.

Splitting of air flow between the pre-vious vents and the lower part of the

passenger compartment.

Air flow to the lower part of the pas-senger compartment (front and rear).

Splitting of air flow between thewindscreen/front side windows and

the lower part of the passenger compart-ment.

Air flow towards the windscreen andfront side windows for demist-

ing/defrosting.

Flow air to allow quick demist-ing/defrosting of the windscreen

and front side windows, turning onrearscreen heating for defrosting/demisting(function called MAX-DEF).

μ

w

≤

y

-

¥

FAN SPEED ADJUSTMENTKNOB

Turning the ring of knob (2-fig. 95) it ispossible to select one of the fan speeds to per-sonalise the amount of air admitted to the pas-senger compartment.

Position 0 turns off the fan and automati-cally engages inside air re-circulation (shownby the lighting up of the led next to the but-ton 4v) thereby shutting off the inlet ofoutside air to the car.

To switch off inside air re-circulation, pressbutton (4)v.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

105

INSIDE AIR RE-CIRCULATIONON/OFF BUTTON

Pressing button (4-fig. 95)v acti-vates inside air re-circulation and the led nextto the button lights up.

In this case the climate control system di-rectly treats the air contained in the pas-senger compartment, the fan is on.

To switch the air re-circulation feature offand withdraw air from outside, press the but-ton again.

The inside air- re-circula-tion system makes it pos-sible to reach the required

“heating” or “cooling” conditionsfaster. It is however inadvisable touse it on rainy/cold days as itwould considerably increase thepossibility of the windows mistinginside, especially if the climate con-trol system is off.

It is advisable to turn onthe inside air re-circulationsystem v in queues or

tunnels to avoid admitting pollut-ed air from outside. The prolongeduse of this function should howev-er be avoided, especially with sev-eral persons on board, to avoid thepossibility of the windows mistinginside.

REARSCREEN HEATINGON/OFF BUTTON

Pressing the button (5-fig. 95) turns ondemisting/defrosting of the rearscreen, andif present, the wing mirror heating coils; si-multaneously the led next to the buttonturns on. This function is timed and switchedoff automatically after 20 minutes. To turnoff earlier, press the button again.

IMPORTANT The system automaticallyturns on rearscreen heating if the tempera-ture is below 3°C.

IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers onthe inside of the rearscreen over the heat-ing filaments to avoid damage which mightcause it to stop working properly.

When cleaning the insideof the rearscreen, takecare not to damage the

heating filaments.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

106

DEMISTINGAND/OR DEFROSTING THEWINDSCREEN AND FRONT SIDEWINDOWS, REARSCREEN ANDWING MIRRORS( MAX-DEF FUNCTION) (fig. 97)

Proceed as follows:

- turn the ring of the air distribution knob(3)to the - symbol.

The climate control activates all the functionsnecessary to quicken demisting/defrosting ofthe windscreen and side windows with tim-ing (switching off automatically after 3 min-utes), as follows:

- switches off air re-circulation, if engaged;

- sets the maximum air temperature;

- operates the fan at a predefined speed;

- directs the flow of air towards the wind-screen and front side window vents;

- turns on rearscreen heating and, if pre-sent, the wing mirror coils.

When the max def function is on, the fol-lowing are on: the led next to the rearscreenheating button (5)(.

IMPORTANT If the engine is not hotenough, the function does not immediate-ly engage the pre-established fan speed, torestrict the inlet of air to the passenger com-partment that is not warm enough to demistthe windows.

After demisting/defrosting, simply use thecontrols to maintain the optimum conditionsof vision and comfort.

IMPORTANT The hotter the engine themore effective defrosting will be.

IMPORTANT In cases of heavy dampand/or rain and/or big differences in tem-perature between inside the car and outside,it is advisable to proceed as follows todemist the windows:

- air re-circulation off, led next to button(4)v off;

- pointer of knob (2) at fan second speedat least;

- pointer of knob (3) on symbol ≤ withthe possibility of passing to position y ifmore misting is noted;

To defrost/demist the rearscreen, pressbutton (5) (, led next to button on.

A0A0733b

fig. 97

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

107

HEATING (fig. 98)

To obtain the temperature required, pro-ceed as follows:

- temperature adjustment knob pointer (1)on the red sector as required;

- air quantity adjustment knob pointer (2)on the fan speed required to personalise theamount of air admitted;

- air distribution knob pointer (3) on therequired position.

To obtain the maximum heating power pro-ceed as follows:

- knob pointer (1) as far as it will go clock-wise (maximum temperature red sector);

- knob pointer (2) on maximum fanspeed;

- air distribution knob pointer (3) on therequired position (position w) is recom-mended.

IMPORTANT To be able to obtain sat-isfactory passenger compartment warming,the engine should have reached normal op-erating temperature.

The filter has the specific capability of com-bining the mechanical filtering of the air withan electrostatic effect so that the outside airadmitted to the passenger compartment ispurified and free of particles such as dust,pollen, etc.

In addition to the above mentioned func-tions, is also reduces the concentration ofpollutants.

The filtering action is active in all air inletconditions and it is clearly more effectivewith the windows closed.

Have the conditions of the filter checkedat least once a year, preferably at the on-set of summer by Alfa Romeo AuthorisedServices.

If the car is habitually used in dusty or pol-luted areas, the filter should be checked andreplaced at shorter intervals than those spec-ified in the Programmed MaintenanceSchedule.

If the filter is not replacedthe efficiency of the cli-mate control system may

be seriously compromised up toblocking the air flow at the outletsand vents.

POLLEN FILTER(for versions/markets where applicable)

A0A0734b

fig. 98

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

108

AUTOMATIC TWO-ZONE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (for versions/markets where applicable)

To start the system (fig. 99):

- turn the knob rings to set the requiredtemperatures (driver’s side - passenger’sside).

- press the AUTO button.

IMPORTANT The climate control sys-tem makes it possible to personalise thetemperatures required on the two side witha maximum difference of 7°C between thedriver’s side and the passenger’s side.

IMPORTANT The climate control com-pressor only works with the engine runningand an outside temperature above 4°C.

With an outside tempera-ture below 4°C the climatecontrol compressor is un-

able to work. It is therefore unad-visable to use the inside air re-cir-culation feature v with a lowtemperature as the windows mightmist over quickly.

For further details about the system andhow to make the best use of it, read theinstructions given in pages that follow.

A0A0203b

fig. 99

The coolant used for theclimate control system isR134a which meets cur-

rent regulations and does not harmthe environment in the event of ac-cidental spillage.Absolutely avoid the use of oth-

er fluids which are incompatiblewith the system components.

GENERAL

The car is fitted with a two-zone climatecontrol system, controlled by an electroniccontrol unit which makes it possible to sep-arately adjust the air temperature on the dri-ver’s side and on the passenger’s side. Toobtain optimum temperature control in thetwo areas of the passenger compartment,the system has an outside sensor, a pas-senger compartment sensor and a two-zonesun ray sensor.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

109

- temperature of the air admitted to thepassenger compartment (for the driver’s andpassenger’s side separately)

- fan speed- air distribution - inside air re-circulation on/off- climate control compressor on/off en-

able.

It is possible to change the setting of thefollowing functions manually:

- fan speed- air distribution - inside air re-circulation on/off- climate control compressor on/off en-

able.

The control of functions not changed man-ually remains automatic and in any case thetemperature of the air admitted to the pas-senger compartment is controlled automati-cally according to the temperatures set onthe driver’s and passenger’s displays.

IMPORTANT Manual selections prevailover automatic ones and remain in storageuntil the user decides to resume automaticcontrol. The settings selected manually arestored when the engine is switched off andresumed the next time it is started.

To ensure correct opera-tion of the incipient mist-ing sensor, stickers must

not be applied (road licence holder,time card etc.). Care should also begiven to cleaning the windscreenand the actual sensor, avoiding theaccumulation of dust and other sub-stances.

IMPORTANT The demisting procedureis enabled each time the ignition key isturned to MAR or pressing the AUTO but-ton. When this procedure is working it canbe turned off pressing one of the followingbuttons: compressor, air recirculation, airflow, air capacity. This operation inhibits theincipient misting sensor signal until theAUTO button is pressed again or the nexttime the ignition key is turned to MAR.

On certain versions, the system is inte-grated by an antipollution sensor capable ofautomatically switching on inside air re-cir-culation to lessen the harmful effects of pol-luted air in cities, queues, tunnels and op-eration of the windscreen washer (with thetypical smell of spirit).

IMPORTANT The function of the an-tipollution sensor is subordinate to safetyconditions; therefore disabling the climatecontrol compressor or at an outside tem-perature below 4°C the sensor is disabled.The sensor can be re-enabled pressing there-circulation button v until taking it tothe automatic mode.

Air quality control is also entrusted to acombined particle and activated carbon fil-ter. The climate control system automaticallycontrols and adjusts the following parame-ters and functions:

On some versions the system is integrat-ed with an incipient misting sensor installedbehind the inside rear-view mirror, capableof “controlling” a predefined area of thewindscreen inner surface which can auto-matically act on the system to prevent or re-duce misting through a series of operationssuch as: opening air re-circulation, enablingthe compressor, air flow to the windscreen,fan speed sufficient for demisting; in thecase of heavy misting, enabling the MAX-DEF function.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

110

CONTROLS (fig. 100)

1 - Inside temperature set display (driver’sside)

2 - Inside temperature adjustment knob(driver’s side)

3 - Fan speed set and system off display(OFF)

4 - Knob for adjusting the fan speed andswitching the system off

5 - Inside temperature set display (pas-senger’s side)

6 - Inside temperature adjustment knob(passenger’s side)

7 - Maximum defrosting/demistingon/off button for windscreen and front sidewindows, rearscreen heating and wing mir-ror coils (MAX-DEF FUNCTION)

8 - Inside air re-circulation on/off buttonv (manual/automatic)

9 - Rearscreen heating and wing mirror de-frosting on/off button (10 - Air distribution selection buttons

11 - Inside air temperature sensor

12 - Button for aligning the temperatureset on the passenger’s side with that on thedriver’s side MONO

13 - Button for selecting the system au-tomatic mode AUTO

14 - Climate control compressor on/offenable button √

fig. 100

A0A0090b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

111

HOW TO USE THE AUTOMATICTWO-ZONE CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM (fig. 100)

IMPORTANT The knob rings do nothave a mechanical stopper therefore, oncethe maximum or minimum value has beenreached, they are free to turn in both direc-tions.

The system can be started in differentways, but it is advisable to set the temper-atures required on the displays; then pressthe (13) AUTO button.

This way the system will start workingcompletely automatically to reach the tem-peratures set as quickly as possible and thenmaintain them.

During completely automatic system op-eration, the temperatures set can bechanged at any time; the system will auto-matically change its settings to adjust to thenew requirements.

IMPORTANT To be able to be accept-ed by the system, the difference in the tem-perature between the driver’s and passen-ger’s side must be within a range of 7°C.

It is possible to personalise the choicesmade automatically by the system inter-vening manually on the following controls:

- fan speed adjustment knob (4)

- air distribution selection buttons (10)

- inside air re-circulation on/off button (8)v

- climate control on enable button (14)√.

Manually selecting one or more of thesefunctions turns off the right led on the but-ton (13) AUTO.

With one or more functions engaged man-ually, the adjustment of the temperature ofthe air admitted to the passenger compart-ment continues to be controlled automati-cally by the system (left led on button 13AUTO on) except with the climate controlcompressor off.

In fact, in this condition the air admittedto the passenger compartment cannot havea lower temperature than the outside air;this condition is indicated by the turning offof the two leds on button (13) AUTO andflashing on the display (1) and/or (5) re-lated with the temperature rate that can-not be obtained.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

112

AIR TEMPERATURE ADJUST-MENT KNOBS (fig. 101)

Turning the rings of knobs (2 or 6), clock-wise or counter-clockwise, respectively high-ers or lowers the temperature of the air re-quired respectively in the left zone (knob 2)or right zone (knob 6) of the passengercompartment. The temperatures set areshown on the displays (1) and (5) abovethe knobs.

Separate operation of the temperatures setis restored automatically using knob (6).

Turning the knob rings clockwise orcounter-clockwise until they reach the ex-treme selections HI or LO, the maximumheating or cooling functions are respective-ly engaged:

A0A0204b

fig. 101

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

113

HI function(highest heating power - fig. 102)

This is turned on setting on the display atemperature above 32,5°C, and can be ac-tivated independently from the driver’s orpassenger’s side or both; this setting bringsthe system to the “monozone” mode andis shown on both displays.

This function can be engaged when re-quiring to heat the passenger compartmentas quickly as possible, exploiting the maxi-mum potential of the system.

This function uses the maximum temper-ature of the coolant fluid, while air distribu-tion and fan speed are controlled accordingto the system settings.

This function is unadvisable withthe engine cold to prevent admit-ting air that is not warm enough tothe passenger compartment.

All manual settings are possible with thisfunction on.

To switch the system off, simply turn thering of knob (2) or (6) of the temperatureset to a value below 32,5°C; the oppositedisplay will show 32,5°C.

A0A0218b

fig. 102

Pressing key (13) AUTO the display willshow a temperature of 32,5°C and returnsto an operating condition with automatic tem-perature adjustment.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

114

LO function(highest cooling power - fig. 103)

This is turned on setting on the display atemperature below 16,5°C; this setting isshown on both displays.

This function can be engaged when re-quiring to cool the passenger compartmentas quickly as possible, exploiting the maxi-mum potential of the system.

The function cuts off air heating, engagesinside air re-circulation (to prevent admittinghot air to the passenger compartment) andthe climate control compressor, takes air dis-tribution to RE and the fan speed as setby the system.

All manual settings are possible with thisfunction on.

To switch the function off, simply turn thering of knob (2) or (6) of the temperatureset on a value above 16,5°C; the oppositedisplay will show 16,5°C.

Pressing key (13) AUTO the display willshow a temperature of 16,5°C and returnsto an operating condition with automatictemperature adjustment.

A0A0219b

fig. 103

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

115

MONO BUTTON FOR ALIGN-MENT OF THE TEMPERATURESET (fig. 104)

Pressing button (12) MONO automaticallyaligns the temperature on the passenger’sside with that on the driver’s side, thereforeit is possible to set the same temperaturebetween the two zones simply turning thering of knob (2) on the driver’s side.

This function is provided to simplify tem-perature adjustment of the whole passen-ger compartment when only the driver is onboard.

Separate operation of the temperatures setis automatically restored when the passen-ger uses the ring on knob (6) or pressesbutton (12) MONO.

A0A0207b

fig. 104

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

116

FAN SPEED ADJUSTMENTKNOB (fig. 105-106)

Turning the ring of knob(4), clockwise orcounter-clockwise, increases or decreasesthe speed of the fan, thus the amount of airadmitted to the passenger compartment;the 16 selectable speeds are shown on abar (in steps of 3), up to a maximum of 6bars lit:

- maximum fan speed = all bars lit;- minimum fan speed = one bar lit.The fan can be cut off (all bars off) only

if the climate control compressor has beenswitched off pressing button (14)√. Torestore automatic fan speed control, after amanual adjustment, press button (13) AU-TO. Completely turning the ring of knob (4)counter-clockwise switches the system off,with the following situation: display (1) off;display (5) off; centre display (3) with lit-display OFF and left led on inside air re-cir-culation button (8)v on.

IMPORTANT Pressing the inside air re-circulation button (8)v it is possible toobtain the inlet of untreated outside air tothe passenger compartment.

To turn the system on again, simply turnthe ring of knob (4) clockwise, or press anyone button, except the inside air re-circula-tion (8) and rearscreen (9) buttons; thisoperation restores all the operating conditions

stored previously.

IMPORTANT On leaving the OFF condi-tion, inside air re-circulation v returns tothe condition prior to switching off.

A0A0205b

A0A0206bfig. 105

fig. 106

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

117

AIR DISTRIBUTION SELECTIONBUTTONS (fig. 107)

Pressing one or more buttons (10) it ispossible to manually choose one of the 5possible air distributions to the passengercompartment:

RE Flow of air to the dashboard centreand side outlets and rear outlet.E

RZE Splitting of the air flow between the

vents to the lower part of the pas-senger compartment (warmest air)and the dashboard centre and sideoutlets and the rear outlet (coolestair). The air flow distribution is par-ticularly useful in spring and autumn,when the sun is shining.

Z Air flow towards the front and rearlower parts of the passenger com-partment. Due to the natural tenden-cy of heat to spread upwards, thistype of distribution allows heating ofthe passenger compartment in theshortest time, also giving a promptfeeling of warmth to the coldest partsof the body.

A0A0208b

QZ

Splitting of the air flow between thewindscreen and side window defrost-ing/demisting vents and the lowerpart the of the vehicle. This type of airdistribution allows satisfactory heat-ing of the passenger compartmentwhile preventing misting of the win-dows.

Q Air flow to the windscreen and frontside window vents to demist or de-frost them.

IMPORTANT Pressing one of these but-tons turns on (led on button itself on)or off (led on button off) the associ-ated functions if the combination cho-sen is among the 5 possible ones; ifnot it only activates the main functionof the button pressed, without thepossibility of turning off with anoth-er press (at least in one distributionthe air flow should be spread in thepassenger compartment).

To restore automatic air distributioncontrol after a manual selection, pressbutton (13) AUTO.

fig. 107

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

118

press button (13) AUTO; in which case,however, the other manual settings set willbe cancelled.

CLIMATE CONTROLCOMPRESSOR ON/OFF ENABLEBUTTON (fig. 108)

Pressing button (14)√ enables the turn-ing on of the climate control compressor.This condition is shown by the lighting up ofthe led on the button itself.

When the climate control compressor isturned off, the leds on buttons (13) AUTOand (14)√ go off; automatic inside air re-circulation control is also excluded (both ledsoff on button 8 v) which always staysoff to prevent misting the windows; evenif unadvisable, it is still possible to restoreautomatic operation of inside air re-circula-tion pressing button (8)v.

With the climate control compressor off, itis not possible to admit air to the passengercompartment with a temperaturebelow the outside temperature; in this case,the value flashes on the display concerningthe temperature that cannot be reached andthe left led on button (13 AUTO - fig.109) goes off.

The switching off of the climate controlcompressor remains in storage even whenthe engine has been stopped. To restore au-tomatic control for switching on the climatecontrol compressor, press button (14)√again, the led on the button turns on, or

Operation of the climatecontrol compressor is neces-sary for cooling and dehu-

midifying the air; it is advisable tokeep this function always on, to pre-vent window misting problems.

A0A0210b

A0A0211bfig. 108

fig. 109

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

119

INSIDE AIR RE-CIRCULATIONON/OFF BUTTON (fig. 110)

Inside air re-circulation is controlled ac-cording to three operating logics:

- automatic control, indicated by the turn-ing on of the right led on the button;

- forced engagement (inside air re-circula-tion always on), indicated by the turning onof the left led on the button (and by the rightled going off at the same time);

- forced switching off (inside air re-circula-tion always off with air inlet from outside),indicated by the turning off of both leds.

These operating conditions are obtainedpressing in sequence the inside air re-circu-lation button (8)v.

When inside air re-circulation is controlledautomatically by the system, the right ledon the air re-circulation button (8) vstays on all the time and the left led showsthe air re-circulation condition:

on = air re-circulation operating;

off = air re-circulation off.

If inside air re-circulation has been turnedon or off manually, the led on button (13)AUTO turns off.

In automatic operation , inside air re-circu-lation is turned automatically when the an-tipollution sensor detects the presence of pol-luted air, for example in cities, queues, tun-nels and operation of the windscreen wash-er (with the typical smell of spirits).

The inside air- re-circula-tion system makes it pos-sible to reach the required

“heating” or “cooling” conditionsfaster. It is however inadvisable touse it on rainy/cold days as itwould considerably increase thepossibility of the windows mistinginside, especially if the climate con-trol system is off.

A0A0212b

With the outside temper-ature below 4°C the cli-mate control compressor is

unable to work. It is therefore un-advisable to use the inside air re-circulation feature v with lowoutside temperature, as the win-dows may quickly mist over.

fig. 110

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

120

It is advisable to turn onthe inside air re-circulationsystem in queues or tun-

nels to avoid admitting polluted airfrom outside. The prolonged use ofthis function should however beavoided, especially with severalpersons on board, to avoid the pos-sibility of the windows misting in-side.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION AUTOBUTTON (fig. 111)

Pressing the (13) AUTO button the sys-tem automatically adjusts the amount anddistribution of the air admitted to the pas-senger compartment, cancelling all the pre-vious manual adjustments.

This condition is indicated by the lightingup of both leds on the button itself.

When the right led, on button (13) AU-TO is off, this means that one or more man-ual operations have been carried out andtherefore automatic control is not complete(except temperature control which is alwaysautomatic) indicated by the left led on, orthat the system is in the OFF condition.

In certain weather condi-tions (e.g.: outside tem-perature around 0°C) and

with automatic air re-circulationcontrol on, mist may form on thewindows. In this case press the in-side air re-circulation button (8)v, to switch off re-circulation(leds on button off) and if neces-sary increase the flow of air to thewindscreen.

A0A0209b

fig. 111

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

121

QUICK FRONT WINDOWDEMISTING/DEFROSTINGBUTTON (MAX-DEF FUNCTION)(fig. 112)

Pressing button (7)- the climate con-trol automatically activates timed operationof all the functions needed to quickendemisting/defrosting of the windscreen andfront side windows, i.e.:

- it turns on the climate control compres-sor;

- switches off inside air re-circulation, if on(both leds off);

- sets the maximum air temperature (HI)on both displays (1) and (5);

- operates the fan at a predefined speed;

- directs the flow of air towards the wind-screen and front side window vents;

- turns on rearscreen heating and, if pre-sent, the wing mirror coils.

When the maximum demisting/defrost-ing feature is on, the led on button (7)-, the led on the rearscreen heating button(9)( and the led on button (14)√turn on; at the same time the leds on but-ton (8)v.

IMPORTANT If the engine is not hotenough, the function does not immediate-ly engage the pre-established fan speed, torestrict the inlet of air to the passenger com-partment that is not warm enough to demistthe windows.

When the maximum demisting/defrost-ing function is on, the only manual opera-tion possible are manual adjustment of thefan and switching rearscreen heating off.

Pressing one of the following buttonsagain: (7)-, (8)v, (12) MONO,(13) AUTO or (14)√ the system switch-es off the maximum demisting/defrostingfunction, restoring the operating conditionsof the system prior to turning it on, in ad-dition to activating the last function required,if any.

A0A0213b

fig. 112

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

122

WING MIRROR ANDREARSCREENDEFROSTING/DEMISTINGBUTTON (fig. 113)

Pressing button (9)( turns on demist-ing/defrosting of the rearscreen and, if pre-sent, the wing mirror coils.

The turning on of this function is shown bythe turning on of the led on the button.

This function is timed and switches off au-tomatically after 20 minutes, or pressing thebutton again; the function is also switchedoff when the engine is stopped and will notbe switched on again the next time the en-gine is started.

IMPORTANT The system automaticallyturns on rearscreen heating if the tempera-ture is below 3°C.

IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers onthe inside of the rearscreen over the heat-ing filaments to avoid damage that mightcause it to stop working properly.

POLLEN FILTER

Have the conditions of the filter checkedby Alfa Romeo Authorised Services at leastonce a year, preferably at the onset of sum-mer.

If the vehicle is used mainly in dusty or pol-luted areas it should be checked and, if nec-essary, replaced at shorter intervals.

A0A0214b

The filter has the specific capability of com-bining the mechanical filtering of the air withan electrostatic effect so that the outside airadmitted to the passenger compartment ispurified and free of particles such as dust,pollen, etc.

In addition to the above mentioned func-tion, it also reduces the concentration of pol-lutants.

The filtering action takes place under allair inlet conditions and it is clearly most ef-fective with the windows shut.

The failure to replace thefilter may considerably re-duce the effectiveness of

the climate control system up toblocking the air flow from the out-lets and vents.

fig. 113

Rear sensors are auto-matically switched offwhen the trailer’s electric

cable plug is inserted into the cartow hitch socket.

Rear sensors are automatically switchedon by removing the trailer cable plug.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

123

PARKING SENSORS(fig. 113a)

(optional for versions/markets whereapplicable)

The parking system detects and informsthe driver (through an intermittent acousticsignal) about the presence of obstacles inthe rear part of the car.

ACTIVATION

The sensors are automatically activatedwhen the reverse gear is engaged.

The sound produced by the acoustic alarmbecomes continuous when the distance be-tween the car and the obstacle is less that30 cm.

ACOUSTIC SIGNAL

When the reverse gear is engaged an in-termittent acoustic signal is automaticallyactivated.

The acoustic signal:

– raises with the reduction of distance be-tween the car and the obstacle;

– becomes continuous when the distancebetween the car and the obstacle is less that30 cm and stops if the distance raises.

– is constant if the distance is unvaried.If this situation takes place for side sensors,the signal is stopped after about 3 secondsto prevent sound indications when per-forming manoeuvres near walls.

TOWING A TRAILER

fig. 113a

A0A0735b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

124

CONTROLS

TAILGATE OPENING (fig. 114)

Electric tailgate release is only allowed withthe ignition key in the ignition switch atMAR vehicle stationary, at STOP orPARK for 3 minutes without opening/clos-ing a door. To release the tailgate, press but-ton (A) on the centre console panel.

Use the hazard warninglights in compliance withlocal regulations.

FOG LIGHTS (fig. 114)

These are turned on pressing button (B),on the centre console panel, when the out-er lights are already on, at the same timethe led on the button itself turns on.

Turning the ignition key to STOP the foglights are turned off automatically and donot come on the next time the engine isstarted without pressing button (B).

Press button (B) again to switch off.

IMPORTANT The front foglights shouldbe used in compliance with local traffic laws.

fig. 114

A0A0091b

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS(fig. 114)

These are switched on by pressing button(C), on the centre console panel, regardlessof the position of the ignition key.

When the hazard warning lights areswitched on, the switch itself begins to flashtogether with the direction indicators andthe direction indicator warning lights on theinstrument cluster. This function is switchedoff by pressing the button again.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

125

If no leaks are found the vehicle can berestarted. Press button (A) to activate thefuel supply system again.

fig. 115

A0A0092b

If a smell of fuel is notedfollowing an accident, orthe fuel system is leaking,

to avoid the risk of fire do not re-set the switch.

REAR FOG GUARDS (fig. 114)

These are turned on, with the dipped beamheadlights or fog lights on, pressing button(D) on the centre console panel, at thesame time the warning light on the buttonitself turns on.

Turning the ignition key to STOP the fogguards are automatically turned off and theydo not come on the next time the engineis started unless button (D) is pressed. Toturn them off press button (D).

IMPORTANT Always use the rear fogguards in compliance with local regulations.

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM (fig. 114)

To lock the doors simultaneously, press but-ton (E), on the centre console panel, re-gardless of the position of the ignition key.

The deterrent led turns on as follows:

– with the ignition key at MAR glowingsteadily with a yellow light;

– with the ignition key at STOP flash-ing with a red light (deterrence condition).

INERTIAL FUEL CUT-OFFSWITCH (fig. 115)

This is an automatic safety switch, to befound on the floor next to the driver’s doorpillar, which is triggered in the event of acrash of a certain magnitude to interrupt theflow of fuel.

The cutting in of the inertial switch is shownon the display of the instrument cluster.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

126

The adjustment of Xenon headlights is au-tomatic, therefore the versions fitted withthis optional lack the headlight aiming de-vice (fig. 116a).

HAND BRAKE (fig. 117)

The hand brake lever is located betweenthe two front seats.

To operate the brake when the vehicle isstationary, pull lever (A) upwards, until therequired braking action is obtained.

When the ignition key is at MAR, thewarning light on the instrument cluster xwill come on.

fig. 117

A0A0620b

fig. 116a versions with Xenon headlights

A0A0677b

Adjust the beams everytime the load carriedchanges.

For correct adjustment, bear in mind thefollowing conditions:

– position 0: one or two people occupy-ing the the front seats

– position 1: five people;– position 2: five people + load in the

boot;– position 3: driver + maximum permis-

sible load all stowed in lug-gage compartment

fig. 116 versions without Xenon headlights

A0A0093b

HEADLIGHT AIMING DEVICE(fig. 116)

The headlights should be aimed correctlydepending on the vehicle load.

To do this, use the rocker button (A), onthe plate at the side of the steering column:

– press the arrow on the button (A), toincrease by one position (e.g.: 0 ➟ 1 ➟2 ➟3);

– press the arrow on the button (S), to lowerby one position (e.g.: 3➟2➟1➟0);

The display (B) in the tachometer shows thepositions during adjustment.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

127

To release the hand brake:

– slightly lift the lever (A) and press therelease button (B);

– keeping the button pressed lower thelever, the warning light x on the instru-ment cluster will go out.

To prevent the car from moving acciden-tally, keep the brake pedal pressed whenengaging the hand brake.

IMPORTANT The hand brake lever (A)is fitted with a safety device which preventsthe brake from being released when, withthe lever pulled, button (B) is pressed.Therefore, to release the brake, in additionto pressing button (B), it is also necessaryto pull lever (A) further upwards to releasethe safety device, then lower the lever com-pletely.

IMPORTANT On certain versions abuzzer sounds to alert the driver if the caris moved with the hand brake engaged.

GEARSHIFT LEVER (fig. 118)

The position of the single gears is shownby the pictogram on the gearshift leverknob.

When shifting gear, always fully depressthe clutch pedal. Before engaging reversegear (R) wait for the car to be stationary.

Certain versions are fitted with 6-gear gear-box.

IMPORTANT Reverse gear may only beengaged with the car completely at a stand-still. With the engine running, before en-gaging reverse gear it is necessary to waitfor at least 3 seconds with the clutch pedalfully depressed to prevent clashing and thepossibility of damaging the gears.

The wheels should belocked after a few clicks ofthe hand brake. If it does

not occur contact Alfa Romeo Au-thorised Services to have the handbrake adjusted.

To change gear smoothly,the clutch pedal must befully depressed. Therefore,

there should be no obstacles on thefloor under the pedal unit: makesure that any mats are well laidand do not interfere with the ped-als.

fig. 118

A0A0684b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

128

The gearbox can work in two operatingmodes:

– the first is semiautomatic(then calledMANUAL), in which the driver directly re-quests gearshifting through the lever on thecentre console or pressing the buttons at thesteering wheel;

– the second is automatic, called CITY(mode selectable with the specific buttonB-fig. 119, the CITY sign appears on thedisplay fig. 121), in which the system de-cides directly when to shift gear.

SELESPEEDTRANSMISSION(on request for versions/marketswhere applicable)

IMPORTANT To be able to use the Se-lespeed correctly, this chapter should be readin full to understand the correct, permissibleoperations to be carried out right from thestart.

This device comprises a conventional me-chanical gearbox to which an electronical-ly-operated electro-hydraulic device has beenadded which automatically controls theclutch and gear engagement.

The clutch pedal has been eliminated andthe vehicle moves off using only the accel-erator pedal.

Gearshifting takes place through the con-trol lever (A-fig. 119) which is of thefloating type with a “single central stableposition”. Using the lever it is possible to re-quest an increase/decrease of the gear ra-tio engaged and/or reverse gear engage-ment (R) or neutral (N).

There are also two buttons on the steeringwheel spokes (fig. 120) through which,only with the car on the move (with speedabove 0.5 km/h), it is possible to shift gearup or down.

fig. 119

A0A0697b

fig. 120

A0A0669b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

129

SYSTEM ACTIVATION

IMPORTANT When the driver’s door isopened the Selespeed starts the hydraulicpart of the system to prepare it for when theengine is started. This function (noted bythe turning of the electric pump) is deacti-vated after 10 door openings/closings notfollowed by actual system activation turningthe ignition key.

Turning the ignition key to MAR, all thesegments on the display turn on (fig.121) together with the gearbox failurewarning light (fig. 122) and the wordCITY. After about a second, the displayshows the gear engaged (N, 1, 2, 3, 4,5, R); from this moment onwards, the Se-lespeed system accepts gearshift com-mands.

IMPORTANT If after 10 seconds the dis-play segments do not show the gear en-gaged or the warning light stays on, turn theignition key to STOP and wait for the dis-play to turn off, then repeat system switchon. If the fault persists, contact Alfa RomeoAuthorised Services.

With the gearbox in the CITY mode it isstill possible to carry out manual gearshift-ing, both using the gear lever and the steer-ing wheel controls. The gearbox remains inthe CITY mode.

The gear engaged (fig. 121) is alwayssignalled on the display regardless of the se-lected mode.

N = neutral;

1 = first gear;

2 = second gear;

3 = third gear;

4 = fourth gear;

5 = fifth gear;

R = reverse.

During operation in the CITY or SPORTmode, the selected mode is shown as well.

IMPORTANT The SPORT mode can beengaged only after disengaging the CITYmode.

Failures of the Selespeed gearbox are sig-nalled to the driver through a warning lightconnected with the associated failure mes-sage (fig. 122) and accompanied by anacoustic signal.

The Selespeed considerably simplifies useof the car, reducing the fatigue of city dri-ving or when frequent gearshifting is re-quired, at the same time offering brilliantperformance.

fig. 121

A0A9017g

fig. 122

A0A9081g

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

130

IMPORTANT Once a gear has beenchanged it is necessary to immediately re-lease the gearshift control lever after mak-ing the request. A manoeuvre prolonged(over 10 seconds) makes the system au-tomatically switch to CITY mode; every-thing stops releasing the gearshift lever.

IMPORTANT When parking the vehicleon a sloping road and engaging a gear tokeep it braked, always check that the dis-play shows the new gear engaged and waitfor one or two seconds before releasing thebrake pedal to allow complete engagementof the clutch .

fig. 125

A0A0700b

OPERATION WITH ENGINE OFF

IMPORTANT Before using the gearshiftcontrol lever, always check the gear en-gaged on the display (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,R).

With the engine off and the vehicle sta-tionary it is possible to engage all the gears.

With the vehicle stopped and the brakepedal pressed, requests to change gear areaccepted only through the control lever onthe centre console.

To request gearshifting, in addition to keep-ing the brake pedal pressed:

– to shift upwards (+) (fig. 123) pushthe lever “forwards” (if the car is in first gearit shifts to second, if in second it shifts to thirdand so on up to fifth). If the system is in neu-

tral (N) or reverse (R) moving the lever for-wards causes the engagement of first gear(1).

– to shift downwards (–) (fig. 123)push the lever backwards (if the car is infifth gear it shifts to fourth, if in fourth itshifts to third and so on down to first gear).

To allow setting the transmission to neu-tral (N), starting from the condition withthe vehicle stationary and brake pedalpressed, move the gearshift lever to the right(fig. 124).

From any gear (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5) andwith the vehicle stationary, it is possible torequest the engagement of reverse gearpushing the lever to the right and then back-wards (fig. 125). If the car is moving, therequest is not accepted. Wait for the car tostop and then request gear engagementagain.

fig. 123

A0A0698b

fig. 124

A0A0699b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

131

Never remove the ignitionkey when the car is mov-ing. In addition to the fact

that the Selespeed system wouldnot work properly up to stoppingthe car, the steering wheel wouldlock automatically the first time itis turned.

STARTING THE ENGINE

The engine can be started either with agear engaged or in neutral (N), providedthat the brake pedal is fully depressed.

IMPORTANT Keep the pedal fully de-pressed during starting. Since the brake ped-al becomes hard if it is pressed repeatedlywith the engine off, in this situation it is nec-essary to increase the pressure on the ped-al itself to start the engine.

After starting, the gearbox sets to neutralautomatically, the display shows the letter(N) and the system selects the operatingmode memorised before switching off.

If the engine fails to startwith the gear engaged, thedriver is informed of the

potentially dangerous situation dueto the fact that the gearbox is inneutral by the buzzer and by thedisplay.

SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINEAND SYSTEM DEACTIVATION

Turning the ignition key to STOP the en-gine turns off but the Selespeed system isstill active waiting for the car to stop com-pletely. After about 2-4 seconds from whenthe key has been turned to STOP, the hy-draulic part is deactivated and immediatelyafter the gear sign on the display disappears.Now the Selespeed system is deactivated.

The gear selected before switching off theengine remains engaged.

If the engine is stopped with the gearboxin neutral (N), the buzzer calls the driver’sattention so that the car can be put in safe-ty conditions engaging first gear (1) or re-verse (R). In this case, the ignition keyshould be turned to MAR and with thebrake pedal pressed, engage first gear (1)or reverse (R).

NEVER leave the car withthe gears in neutral (N).

It is absolutely necessaryto turn off the engine andthen turn off the Selespeed

system keeping the brake pedalpressed: ONLY release the pedalwhen the display has gone out.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

132

This should not be considered a failure be-cause it is part of the operating logic. Forthe same reason, if sticking occurs on re-verse gear, the system controls partial clutchclosing so that the gear can be engaged;in this case the engagement of reverse gear(R) will not be as smooth as usual.

Moving off the car is obtained:

1) releasing the brake pedal;

2) gradually pressing the accelerator pedal.

The more the accelerator is pressed thehigher the pickup torque.

After a request to shiftgear with the car station-ary, before pressing the ac-

celerator pedal to make the carmove, the driver must alwayscheck the display to see that thegear engaged is the one required.

MOVING OFF THE CAR

With the engine on and the car stationary,the gears that can be engaged for movingoff are only first (1), second (2) or reverse(R).

To engage them, keep the brake pedal de-pressed and operate only the control leveron the central console, as the steering wheellevers make it possible to engage the gearsonly at speed over 0.5 km/h.

IMPORTANT Reverse gear (R) can beengaged from any of the following other ra-tios: neutral (N), first (1) or second (2).If the car is moving, the request is not ac-cepted, it is necessary to wait for the carto stop completely and request the en-gagement of reverse again (R).

The driver is informed of the reverse gearengaged condition by the display and by theintermittent sound of a buzzer.

IMPORTANT If when shifting from re-verse (R)/first (1) or neutral (N)/first (1)sticking occurs on first gear, the system au-tomatically engages second gear (2).

IMPORTANTS

– With the car stopped and a gear en-gaged always keep the brake pedal presseduntil deciding to move off;

– during prolonged halts with the enginerunning it is advisable to keep the gearboxin neutral;

– when the car is parked facing uphill, donot use the moving off manoeuvre to keepthe car still; use the brake pedal and pressthe accelerator pedal only when deciding tomove off;

– use second gear only when more con-trol is needed for moving off manoeuvres atlow speed;

– if, in reverse gear, first gear is engagedor vice versa, shift gear only when the caris stopped completely and with the brakepedal pressed.

Though highly unadvisable, if when trav-elling downhill for some unexpected reasonthe car is set to neutral (N), when the en-gagement of a gear is requested the systemautomatically engages the best gear in re-lation to the speed of the car to allow thecorrect transmission of torque to the wheels.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

133

OPERATION

The gearbox can work in two operatingmodes:

– the first is semiautomatic (MANUAL),in which the driver directly decides when toshift gear; this mode is based on two logics:

1) normal: comfortable driving;

2) sports (mode selectable with button B-fig. 126): sports driving.

The sports mode can be selected by press-ing the specific button SPORT (B-fig.126) on the gearbox lever knob; when thismode is selected, the SPORT sign appearson the display.

– the second is completely automatic(CITY), in which the system decides di-rectly when to shift gear according to thetype of driving.

The CITY mode can be selected by press-ing the specific button CITY on the gearboxlever knob; when this mode is selected, theCITY sign appears on the display.

When travelling downhill with a gear en-gaged and the accelerator released (if thevehicle is moving), beyond a pre-establishedspeed, the system engages the clutch au-tomatically to give the car adequate enginebraking.

For safety reasons the Selespeed systemactivates the buzzer when:

– clutch overheating occurs while the ve-hicle is being started; in this case it is nec-essary to “force” starting avoiding hesita-tion or, if the car is on a slope, release theaccelerator and use the brake pedal to stopthe car;

– the car moves in the opposite directionto the gear engaged, (e.g.: it moves for-wards with reverse gear engaged); in thissituation it is necessary to stop the car andengage the correct gear, keeping the brakepedal pressed.

Still due to safety reasons, with the car sta-tionary, the engine running and gear (1),(2) or (R) engaged, the system activatesthe buzzer and automatically shifts to neu-tral (N) when:

– no action is made on the acceleratorand/or brake pedals for at least 3 minutes;

– the brake is pressed for over 10 min-utes;

– the driver’s door is opened and the ac-celerator and brake are not touched for atleast 1 second.

STOPPING THE CAR

To stop the car, simply release the accel-erator pedal and, if necessary, press thebrake pedal.

Regardless of the gear engaged and theoperating mode activated (MANUAL orCITY) the system automatically disengagesthe clutch and shifts to a lower gear.

If deciding to move off again without hav-ing stopped the car completely, the mostsuitable ratio will be available for accelera-tor again.

Stopping the car the system automatical-ly engages first gear (1).

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

134

SEMIAUTOMATIC OPERATION(MANUAL)

In the MANUAL operating mode, the dis-play shows the gear engaged.

In this operating mode, the decision tochange gear is left to the driver who decidesthe most appropriate moment.

The requests to change gear may takeplace through:

– the control lever on the centre console(A-fig. 126);

– the buttons on the steering wheel (fig. 127), which can be operated onlywhen the car speed exceeds 0.5 km/h.

The MANUAL operating mode is setwhen, with the CITY mode selected, theCITY button(A-fig. 128) is pressedagain, excluding the previously selectedmode.

When changing gear it is not necessaryto release the accelerator pedal because theSelespeed system directly controls the en-gine in such a way as to:

– reduce and then increase engine torque;

– adapt the engine speed to the latestgear engaged.

When downshifting, the engine is accel-erated automatically to bring it to the speednecessary with the new gear ratio.

The neutral command (N) is accepted un-til the vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h.

The reverse gear engagement command(R) is accepted only if the vehicle is sta-tionary.

fig. 127

A0A0669b

fig. 126

A0A0702b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

135

With the accelerator pedal pressed to over60% of its stroke and an engine speedabove 5000 rpm, gearshifting becomesquicker. In the MANUAL operating modethere are certain automatic/security deviceswhich simplify driving:

– At slowing down the clutch is disen-gaged and the automatic reduction of thegearbox ratio is carried out to be ready forthe possible gear recovery; on the contrary,when the vehicle stops the gearbox will au-tomatically engage the first gear (1);

– requests to change gear that would takethe engine to above maximum speed or be-low minimum speed are not accepted;

AUTOMATIC OPERATION (CITY)

The automatic operating mode CITY is se-lected pressing button (A-fig. 128), atthe base of the gearshift lever or activatingthe Cruise Control system (where fitted).

In addition to the gear, the display showsthe word CITY.

The system decides directly when gearshift-ing according to the engine running speedand the driving style.

Releasing the accelerator pedal quickly, thesystem does not engage a higher gear in or-der to maintain an adequate level of enginebrake.

fig. 128

A0A0701b

– if jamming occurs during gear engage-ment, the system firstly tries to engage thegear required again and, if it is still not pos-sible, it automatically engages the imme-diately higher one to avoid leaving the carin neutral.

IMPORTANT It is advisable to wait forthe end of a gear shifting operation beforerequesting another one, to avoid multiplerequests in rapid succession.

In the event of a gearboxfault to any component,contact Alfa Romeo Autho-

rised Services as soon as possibleto have the system checked over.

In the case of a fault to the gearshift con-trol lever, the system automatically engagesthe automatic operating mode CITY tomake it possible to reach the nearest AlfaRomeo Authorised Service to have the faulteliminated.

In the case of a fault to the other gear-box components, the system only allows theengagement of certain gears: first gear (1),second gear (2) and reverse (R).

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

136

FAILURE WARNING

Failures of the Selespeed gearbox areshown on the display by the warning lightt (fig. 129) associated with a mes-sage and a buzzer.

If warning light t andthe message appear on thedisplay, contact Alfa

Romeo Authorised Services as soonas possible to have the fault elim-inated.

fig. 129

A0A9081g

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

137

PARKING THE CAR

To park the car safely it is absolutely nec-essary to engage first gear (1) or reverse(R) and also the handbrake if the road ison a slope.

Turning off the engine with the car on anuphill slope and a gear engaged, it is ab-solutely necessary to wait for the displayshowing the gear engaged to go off beforereleasing the brake pedal, so that the clutchis completely closed.

If the gearbox is in neutral (N) and want-ing to engage a parking gear, the systemshould be activated and with the foot on thebrake pedal it is necessary to engage (1)or (R).

TOWING THE CAR

IMPORTANT For towing the car followlocal regulations. Make sure that the gear-box is in neutral (N) (checking that the carmoves if pushed) and tow as for a car withnormal mechanical gearbox following theinstructions given in the chapter “In an emer-gency”.

Should it be impossible to set to neutral,do not tow the vehicle; contact Alfa RomeoAuthorised Services.

While towing the car donot start the engine.

BUZZER WARNINGS

The buzzer is activated when:

– reverse gear is engaged (R);

– the car is parked with the gearbox inneutral (N); signal that can be noted turn-ing the ignition key to STOP;

– clutch overheating occurs when movingoff;

– the car moves in the opposite directionto the gear engaged (e.g.: the car movesdownwards with reverse gear engaged);

– the system has shifted automaticallyto neutral (N) when:

no action is made on the acceleratorand/or brake pedal for at least 3 minutes;

or the brake is pressed for over 10 min-utes;

or the driver’s door is opened and no ac-tion is made on the accelerator and brakefor at least 1 second;

or a gearbox failure has been detected.

– In the event of gearbox failure.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

138

INTERIOR FITTINGS

GLOVEBOX

On the dashboard there is a glovebox withlid and light.

To open use handle (A-fig. 130).

When the glovebox is opened with the keyat MAR an inside courtesy light turns on(A-fig. 131).

FRONT ROOF LIGHT (fig. 139)

The roof light comprises two courtesy lightswith corresponding control switch.

IMPORTANT When a door is opened,the roof light turns on and timing of about3 minutes is activated automatically, afterwhich it goes off; closing the doors (withinthe 3 minutes) a second timing of about 7seconds is activated to allow vehicle start-ing.

fig. 130

A0A0108b

fig. 131

A0A0109b

Never travel with theglovebox open: the lidmight harm the passenger

in the event of an accident.

The fitting is completed by device (B), onthe lid, for inserting a pen or pencil.

IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key toSTOP, opening the glovebox, the light in-side can only be turned on for 15 minutes;after which the system turns it off to avoiddraining the battery.

fig. 132

A0A0111b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

139fig. 133

A0A0112b

Unlocking the doors using the remote con-trol, the roof light turns on gradually and tim-ing is activated automatically for about 15seconds. Locking the doors with the remotecontrol the roof light turns off gradually.

The lights are turned off moving the igni-tion key to MAR (with the doors closed).

With switch (A) in the central position(1), both lights are turned on when a dooris opened.

Pressing switch (A) to the left (position0), the lights stay off (OFF position).

Pressing switch (A) to the right (position2) both lights stay on.

Switch (B) turns the lights on individually.Pressing switch (B) to the left (position

0) the left light is turned on. Pressing theswitch to the right (position 2) the right lightis turned on.

With switch (B) in the central position (po-sition 1) the lights stay off.

IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key toSTOP, turning the roof light on is only pos-sible for 15 minutes; after which the systemturns it off to avoid draining the battery.

IMPORTANT Before leaving the car,make sure that both switches are in the cen-tral position. By so doing, the roof lights willturn off when the doors are closed. Forget-ting a door open the lights will turn off au-tomatically after a few seconds.

COURTESY LIGHTS (fig. 133)

On the back of the driver’s or passenger’ssun visor, opening the cover (A) the rooflights turn on (B) at the side of the courtesymirror, with the ignition key at MAR. Theselights allow use of the courtesy mirror whenthe light is poor.

IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key toSTOP the lights can be activated only for15 minutes: after which the system turnsthem off to avoid draining the battery.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

140

REAR ROOF LIGHT (fig. 134)

IMPORTANT When a door is opened,the roof light turns on and timing of about3 minutes is activated automatically, afterwhich it goes off; closing the doors (withinthe 3 minutes) a second timing of about 7seconds is activated to allow vehicle start-ing.

Unlocking the doors using the remote con-trol, the roof light turns on gradually and tim-ing is activated automatically for about 15seconds. Locking the doors with the remotecontrol the roof light turns off gradually.

The light turns off in any case turning theignition key to MAR (with the doorclosed).

PUDDLE LIGHTS (fig. 135)(for versions/markets whereapplicable)

The light (A) housed in the doors turns onwhen the associated door is opened, re-gardless of the position of the ignition key.

fig. 134

A0A0633b

On the light there is a switch with threepositions.

When switch (A) is in the central posi-tion (0) the light turns on automaticallywhen a door is opened.

Moving the switch to the right (position 1)the light stays off.

Moving the switch to the left (position 2)the light stays on.

IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key toSTOP the roof light can be turned on for on-ly 15 minutes; after which it is turned off toavoid draining the battery.

IMPORTANT Before leaving the car,make sure that the switch (A) is in the cen-tral position (0), so that the roof light turnsoff when the doors are closed.

fig. 135

A0A0243b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

141

Do not use the ashtray aswaste paper basket: itmight set on fire in contact

with cigarette stubs.

Always ensure that thecigar lighter has turned off.

The cigar lighter gets ex-tremely hot. Handle withcare and prevent its use by

children: danger of fire and/orburning.

DETERRENT LED (fig. 136)

The led (A) on the instrument clustercomes into operation when the doors arelocked (ignition key at STOP or removed)and it remains in the “deterrence” condition,flashing with a red light until the next timethe doors are unlocked.

IMPORTANT If a door or the tailgate arenot closed perfectly, the deterrent led flash-es at a higher frequency for 4 seconds andthen flashes at normal frequency again.

FRONT ASHTRAY AND CIGARLIGHTER (fig. 137)

To gain access to the ashtray and the cig-ar lighter open the lid (A).

To use the cigar lighter, with the key atMAR, press button (B); after a few sec-onds the button will return automaticallyto its initial position and the cigar lighter isready for use.

Remove the tray to empty and clean theashtray (C).

The position of the cigar lighter in relationto the ashtray and viceversa, may vary de-pending on the trim level.

fig. 136

A0A0005b

fig. 137

A0A0634b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

142

REAR ASHTRAYS (fig. 138)

For the rear passengers there are two con-cealed ashtrays.

To use or remove pull in the direction ofthe arrow.

CARD HOLDER RECESS AND GLASS HOLDER (fig. 139)(for versions/markets whereapplicable)

The interior fittings are completed by theremovable card holder recess (A) and glassholder (B) located on the centre of the dash-board. To use them, press as shown.

fig. 138

A0A0115b

fig. 139

A0A0116b

ODDMENT POCKETS ON FRONT DOORS (fig. 140)

Each front door has an oddment pocket(A).

fig. 140

A0A0117b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

143

CELL PHONEPROVISION

The car may be fitted with a provision forinstalling a cell phone.

The mobile phone provision consists of:

– radio + cell phone dual-purpose anten-na;

– connection and supply cables with spe-cific connector for connecting hands-free kit.

ODDMENT RECESSES ON CENTRE CONSOLE (fig. 141)

On the centre console, at the side of thehand brake lever, depending on the versions,the following recesses are provided:

– can holder (B);

– magnetic card or toll ticket holder (C);

– pen or pencil holder (D);

– coin holder (E).

SUN VISORS (fig. 142)

The visors can be directed at the front andside.

Behind, the visors have a courtesy mirrorwith a light at the side(A). To use, open thecover (B).

The lights allow use of the mirrors with dimlight.

The passenger’s sun visor has a symbolconcerning correct use of a child’s seat in thepresence of the passenger’s air bag. For fur-ther details, refer to the passenger’s frontair bag paragraph.

fig. 141

A0A0118b

fig. 142

A0A0121b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

144

For the installation of acell phone and connectionto the provision in the car,

contact only Alfa Romeo Autho-rised Services; this will guaranteefirst-rate results with no possibil-ity of any inconvenience that maycompromise the safety of the ve-hicle.

The voice kit should bepurchased by the customeras it must be compatible

with the customer’s phone.

RADIO TRANSMITTERSAND CELLULARTELEPHONES

Radio transceiver equipment (e.g.: e-tacsmobile phones, HAM radio systems and thelike) shall not be used inside the car unlessa separate aerial is mounted outside the car.

The use of these devices inside the pas-senger compartment (without external aer-ial) may cause electrical systems equippingthe car to malfunction. This could compro-mise car safety in addition to constitutinga potential hazard for the passengers.

In addition, transmission and reception ofthese devices may be affected by the shield-ing effect of the car body.

As concerns the use of mobile phones(GSM, GPRS, UMTS) provided with offi-cial EC approval, strictly comply with the in-structions given by the mobile phone man-ufacturer.

ACCESSORIESPURCHASEDBY THE OWNER

If after buying the car, you decide to installelectrical accessories that require a perma-nent electric supply (alarm, voice feature,radionavigator with satellite antitheft, etc.)or accessories that in any case burden theelectric supply, contact Alfa Romeo Autho-rised Services, whose qualified personnel,besides suggesting the most suitable devicesbelonging to Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo, willalso evaluate the overall electric absorption,checking whether the vehicle electric systemis able to withstand the load required, orwhether it needs to be integrated with amore powerful battery.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

145

OPENING FROM INSIDE (fig. 143)

Tailgate is released electrically and this canbe performed only when the ignition keyis in position MAR with car at a standstillor in STOP or PARK position for 3 min-utes without unlocking/locking one of thedoors.

To unlock the tailgate, press button (A)on the centre console panel.

Tailgate raising is facilitated by the gasshock springs.

OPENING WITH REMOTECONTROL (fig. 144)

The tailgate can be opened by remote con-trol from outside pressing the button (A),also when the electronic alarm is engaged.Opening of the tailgate is accompanied bya double flash of the direction indicators;closing is accompanied by a single flash.

If an electronic alarm is fitted, with theopening of the tailgate, the alarm systemswitches off volumetric protection and thetailgate control sensor, the system “beeps”twice (with the exception of certain mar-kets).

Closing the tailgate again, the control func-tions are restored, the system “beeps” twice(with the exception of certain markets).

fig. 143

A0A0129b

LUGGAGECOMPARTMENT

The tailgate can be opened:

from the outside of the car - by aremote control impulse;

from the inside of the door - by de-pressing the button (A-fig. 143).

IMPORTANT If the boot is not proper-ly shut, the ´ warning light will come on(on certain versions accompanied by themessage on the reconfigurable multifunctiondisplay).

The gas springs are cali-brated to ensure correcttailgate raising with the

weights foreseen by the manufac-turer. The arbitrary addition ofitems (such spoilers, etc.) maycompromise the correct operationand safety of the actual tailgate.

fig. 144

A0A0636b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

146

EMERGENCY OPENING OF TAILGATE

To succeed in opening the tailgate from theinside, should the car battery be flat, or be-cause of a defect of the electric lock of thetailgate itself, proceed as follows (see “Ex-tending the luggage compartment” in thechapter “Getting to know you car”):

– tilt the rear seat cushions;

– tilt the backrests;

– - pull the string to unlock (A-fig. 146)(the string is in the tailgate imprint on theright).

TAILGATE CLOSING

To lock, push in correspondence with theAlfa Romeo badge to lower tailgate, untilyou feel the click of the lock.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHTING (fig. 145)

When the tailgate is opened the light turnson automatically (A) in the right-hand sideof the boot. Closing the tailgate, the lightturns off automatically.IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key to

STOP, opening the tailgate, turning on thelight will only be possible for 15 minutes;after which the system turns it off to avoiddraining the battery.

fig. 145

A0A0637b

fig. 146

A0A0658b

SECURING THE LOAD (fig. 147)

The loads carried may be secured withstraps hooked to the special rings (A) in theboot.

The rings also serve for fastening the lug-gage restrainer, if present (in any case avail-able c/o Alfa Romeo Authorised Services).

CAUTIONS FOR CARRYING THE LUGGAGE

Travelling at night with a load in the bootit is necessary to adjust the height of the lowbeam headlights (see next paragraph“Headlights” in this chapter). For correct useof the aiming device, also make sure thatthe load does not exceed the values givenin the same paragraph.

fig. 147

A0A0638b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

147fig. 149

A0A0707b

Do this only with the carstationary.

DANGER-SERIOUS IN-JURY. When carrying outchecks or maintenance op-

erations in the engine compart-ment, take special care not to bumpthe head on the raised bonnet.

If checks are needed inthe engine compartment,when it is still hot, do not

approach the fan: it might startworking also with the ignition keyremoved. Wait for the engine tocool down.

BONNET

The bonnet opening lever is under the leftend of the dashboard.

To open:

– pull the lever (A-fig. 148) until thebonnet clicks open.

– press the safety lever (A-fig. 149)upwards.

– raise the bonnet.

IMPORTANT Bonnet raising is aided bytwo gas springs. Do not tamper with thesesprings and accompany the bonnet whileraising it.

fig. 148

A0A0135b

Do not load the bootabove the permitted max-imum (see “Technical spec-

ifications”). Also make sure thatthe objects contained in the bootare well secured to prevent themfrom being thrown forward, caus-ing harm to the passengers.

A heavy load that has notbeen secured may causeserious harm to passen-

gers.

If you want to carry re-serve fuel in a can, followlegal regulations, only us-

ing a certified can, suitably fastenedto the load securing eyelets. Evenin this way the risk of fire is in-creased in the case of an accident.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

148

Scarves, ties and otherloose clothing might bepulled by moving parts.

For safety reasons thebonnet shall always beperfectly closed when trav-

elling. Always check for properbonnet locking. If the bonnet is leftinadvertently open, stop the carimmediately and close the bonnet.

To close:

– lower the bonnet until approx. 20 cmfrom the engine compartment and then letit drop, ensuring it is fully closed and not justheld in position by the safety catch.

If the bonnet does not close properly donot push it down but open it again and re-peat the above procedure.

HEADLIGHTS

The adjustment of the headlights is vital toyour safety and comfort and to that of oth-er road users.

The adjustment of the headlights is alsogoverned by precise regulations.

Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services tohave the headlights correctly adjusted.

IMPORTANT The headlight inner sur-face may get slightly misted: this does notmean it is faulty; it is a natural phenome-non due to low temperature and the air hu-midity level. Misting will disappear as soonas the headlights are turned on. The pres-ence of water drops inside the headlight in-dicates water infiltration: contact Alfa RomeoAuthorised Services.

COMPENSATION FOR TILT (fig. 150)

When the vehicle is loaded, the beam fromthe headlights is raised due to the back-wards tilt of the vehicle.

In this case the headlights must be ad-justed correctly.

To do this, use the rocker button (A), onthe plate at the side of the steering column:

– press the arrow on the button (A), toincrease by one position (e.g.: 0 ➟ 1 ➟2 ➟3);

–pressthearrowonthebutton(S),thiswill low-er by one position (e.g.: 3 ➟ 2 ➟ 1 ➟ 0);

The display (B) in the tachometer showsthe positions while adjustment is being ma

fig. 150

A0A0093b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

149

Check beam aiming everytime the load carriedchanges.

fig. 152

A0A0199b

For correct adjustment, bear in mind thefollowing conditions:

– position 0: one or two people occupy-ing the front seats

– position 1: five people;

– position 2: five people + load in theboot;

– position 3: driver + maximum permis-sible load all stowed in lug-gage compartment

HEADLIGHT ADJUSTMENTABROAD (fig. 152)

The dipped-beam headlights are adjustedfor circulation in the country in which the ve-hicle is marketed. In countries with oppositecirculation, to avoid glaring oncoming vehi-cles it is necessary to cover the area of theheadlights as shown below; this is done us-ing non-transparent sticker tape.

The illustration refers to passing from right-hand drive to left-hand drive.

fig. 151

A0A00677b

IMPORTANT The compensation for tilt ofXenon headlights (if fitted) is carried out au-tomatically and therefore in the versions fittedwith this type of headlights the aiming de-vice is not present (fig. 151).

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

150

ABS(upon request forversions/markets whereprovided)

The car is fitted with an ABS braking sys-tem, which prevents the wheels from lock-ing when braking, makes full use of the gripand within the limits of the grip available,keeps the car controllable also in emergencybraking.

When braking a slight pulsing accompa-nied by noise may be felt on the brake ped-al due to the action of the ABS system.

This should not be interpreted as a brak-ing malfunction. It is the signal to the driverthat the ABS has come into action: it is thewarning that the car is travelling at the lim-it of its grip and therefore the speed shouldbe adapted to the type of road.

The ABS system is an additional part of thebase braking system; in the event of a fail-ure it is disabled, leaving the braking sys-tem in the same conditions as a vehicle with-out ABS.

The ABS better exploitsthe grip available, but can-not increase it; caution is

therefore necessary on slipperysurfaces, without taking unneces-sary risks.

If the ABS cuts in it meansthat the limit of the grip isbeing reached between the

tyre and the road surface: it istherefore necessary to slow downto adapt driving to the grip avail-able.

In the event of a systemfailure, with the turning onof the > warning light on

the instrument cluster, have the carchecked immediately by AlfaRomeo Authorised Services, to beable to have the system restoredto fully efficient conditions.

In the case of a failure, the anti-lock actionis no longer present, the braking capacity ofthe vehicle is not adversely affected at all.

If you have never previously used cars fit-ted with ABS, it is advisable to practice a lit-tle on a slippery surface, naturally in safe-ty conditions and in accordance with the lo-cal Highway Code; you are also advised toread the following instructions carefully.

The advantage of the ABS over a conven-tional system is that it makes it possible toobtain the highest degree of handling alsowhen braking completely under limited gripconditions, preventing the wheels from lock-ing.

However, with the ABS do not expect thebraking distance to always shorten: for ex-ample, on soft surfaces like gravel or freshsnow or a slippery surface, the space mightincrease.

To better exploit the possibilities of the an-ti-lock system in the case of need, the ad-vice given below should be followed.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

151

Always take due care when braking onbends, even with the help of the ABS.

The most important advice of all, howev-er, is this:

When the ABS cuts in, andyou feel the pulsing on thepedal, do not lighten the

pressure, but keep the pedal firm-ly pressed with no fear; this wayyou will stop in the least spacepossible, compatibly with the con-ditions of the road surface.

Following these instructions you will bein the best braking condition under all cir-cumstances.

IMPORTANT Cars fitted with ABS mayonly be fitted with the wheel rims, tyres andbrake linings of type and brand approved bythe Manufacturer.

The system is completed by the EBD (Elec-tronic Brake Distributor) which distributesthe braking action through the control unitand the ABS system sensors.

The car is fitted with anelectronic braking distribu-tor (EBD). If the > andx

warning lights turn on simultane-ously with the engine running, thisindicates an EBD system failure; inthis case with sharp braking therear wheels might lock too early,with the possibility of skidding.Driving extremely carefully, go tothe nearest Alfa Romeo AuthorisedService to have the systemchecked.

The turning on of only the> warning light with theengine running normally in-

dicates a fault to the ABS systemonly. In this case the braking sys-tem is still efficient, though with-out the aid of the anti-lock device.Under these conditions perfor-mance of the EBD system may bereduced. In this case too, you areadvised to go immediately to thenearest Alfa Romeo AuthorisedService to have the system checkedover, driving in such a way as toavoid sharp braking.

If the low brake fluid lev-el x warning light turnson, stop the car immedi-

ately and contact the nearest AlfaRomeo Authorised Service. Anyloss of fluid from the hydraulic sys-tem will negatively affect the op-eration of the braking system be itof the conventional type or of thetype with ABS.

If the compact spare wheelis used, operation of theABS system is cut off and

the>warning light on the instru-ment cluster turns on.

IMPORTANT If the battery is run downthe> andx warning lights might turnon when starting the engine and go off af-ter starting. This should not be consideredas a fault but as a warning that during start-ing the ABS is not active. The turning offof the warning lights ensures normal systemoperation.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

152

VDC SYSTEM(Vehicle Dynamics Control)(upon request forversions/markets whereprovided)

The VDC is an electronic system that con-trols vehicle stability, intervening on the dri-ving torque and braking the wheels in a dif-ferentiated manner, in the lack of grip, ithelps to bring the car back to the correctdirection.

When travelling the car is subjected to lat-eral and longitudinal forces which can becontrolled by the driver as long as the tyresoffer adequate roadholding; when this fallsbelow the minimum level, the car beginsto divert from the course required by the dri-ver.

Especially when travelling on an unevensurface (such as paving, or due to the pres-ence of water, ice or soil), changes in speed(acceleration or braking) and/or course(bends or the need to avoid obstacles) maycause the tyres to lose grip.

When the sensors detect the conditionsthat would lead to skidding, the VDC systemintervenes on the engine and on the brakesproducing a stabilising torque.

HOW THE VDC SYSTEM WORKS

The VDC system is engaged automatical-ly when the car is started and cannot beswitched off.

The basic components of the VDC systemare:

– an electronic control unit that process-es the signals received from the various sen-sors and brings about the most appropriatestrategy;

– a sensor that detects the position of thesteering wheels;

– four sensors that detect the turningspeed of each wheel;

– a sensor that detects rotation of the cararound its vertical axis;

– a sensor that detects lateral acceleration(centrifugal force).

The heart of the VDC system is the VDCcontrol unit, which with the data suppliedby the sensors installed on the car calculatesthe centrifugal forces generated when thecar is cornering. The yawing sensor, whichoriginates from the aeronautical industry, de-tects the rotations of the car around its ownvertical axis. The centrifugal forces gener-ated when the car is cornering are detect-

The performance of thesystem, in terms of activesafety should not induce

the driver to take pointless and un-necessary risks. The style of dri-ving must in any case always beadapted to the conditions of theroad surface, visibility and traffic.The responsibility for road safetyis always and in any case the dri-ver’s.

The VDC system helps the driver to keepthe car under control in the event of a lossof tyre grip.

The forces induced by the VDC system tocontrol the loss of vehicle stability alwaysdepend on the grip between the tyre andthe road surface.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

153

ed by a highly sensitive lateral accelerationsensor.

The stabilising action of the VDC system isbased on the calculations of the system elec-tronic control unit, which processes the sig-nals received from the steering wheel rota-tion sensor, acceleration sensor and rotationspeed sensor of each wheel. These signalsallow the control unit to recognise the ma-noeuvre the driver intends to do when thesteering wheel is turned.

The control unit processes the informationreceived from the sensors and therefore isable to know the position of the car instantby instant and compares it with the coursethe driver would like to follow. In the eventof a discrepancy, in a fraction of a secondthe control unit chooses and commands themost suitable intervention to bring the carimmediately back to the required course:braking one or more wheels at different in-tensity and, if necessary, reducing the pow-er transmitted by the engine.

The corrective actions are modified andcontrolled continuously in seeking the courserequired by the driver.

The action of VDC system considerably en-hances the active safety of the car in verycritical situations and it is particularly help-ful when the grip conditions of the road sur-face change.

For the VDC system towork correctly, the tyresmust be of the same brand

and type on all wheels, in perfectconditions and above all of thespecified type, brand and size.

CUTTING IN OF THE VDC SYSTEM

The cutting in of the VDC system is indi-cated by the flashing of the áwarning lighton the instrument cluster, to inform the dri-ver that the car is in critical conditions of sta-bility and grip.

VDC system failure warning

In the event of a failure the VDC systemdisengages automatically and the á warn-ing light on the instrument cluster turns onglowing steadily, together with the messageon the reconfigurable multifunction display.

In the event of an VDC system failure thecar behaves like a vehicle not fitted with thissystem: in any case it is advisable to con-tact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soonas possible.

During use of the compactspare wheel, the VDC sys-tem continues working. It

should be borne in mind that thespare wheel is smaller than a nor-mal tyre, therefore its grip is low-er than that of the other tyres ofthe car.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

154

SWITCHING ON THE ASR FUNCTION

The ASR function switches on automati-cally each time the engine is started.

When travelling the device can be switchedoff and on again pressing switch (A-fig. 153) on the centre console.

When the device is switched off this isshown by the lighting up of the led on theswitch itself.

If the function is switched off when trav-elling, it will turn on again automatically thenext time the engine is started.

fig. 153

A0A0639b

ASR SYSTEM(Antislip Regulation)(upon request forversions/markets whereprovided)

The ASR function controls the vehicle dri-ve and cuts in automatically every time oneor both driving wheels slip.

In slipping conditions, tow different controlsystems are activated:

1) if slipping involves both driving wheels,being caused by excessive power transmit-ted, the ASR device cuts in reducing the pow-er transmitted by the engine.

2) if slipping involves only one drivingwheel, the ASR system cuts in automatical-ly braking the wheel that is slipping, withan effect similar to that of a self-locking dif-ferential.

The performance of thesystem in terms of activesafety should not induce

the driver to take pointless and un-necessary risks. The style of dri-ving must in any case be adaptedto the conditions of the road sur-face, visibility and traffic. Roadsurface is always the driver’s re-sponsibility.

The action of the ASR is particularly help-ful in the following circumstances:

– slipping of the inner wheel on a bend,due to the effect of dynamic load changesor excessive acceleration.

– too much power transmitted to thewheels also in relation to the conditions ofthe road surface.

– acceleration on slippery, snowy or frozensurfaces.

– in the case of loss of grip on a wet sur-face (aquaplaning).

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

155

ASR system failure warning

In the event of a fault, the ASR systemswitches off automatically and the Vwarn-ing light on the instrument cluster turns on,together with the message on the reconfig-urable multifunction display.

In the event of an ASR system operatingfailure, the car behaves in the same wayas a car that is not fitted with this system:in any case, it is advisable to contact AlfaRomeo Authorised Services as soon as pos-sible.

MSR SYSTEM (Engine drive adjustment)

The car is fitted with a special system, in-tegral with the ASR system, that in case ofsudden gear shifting, cuts in providing torqueto the engine thus preventing excessive dri-ving wheel drive that, specially in poor gripconditions, can lead to loss of stability.

EOBD SYSTEMThe EOBD system (European On Board Di-

agnosis) allows continuous diagnosis of thecomponents of the car correlated with emis-sions.

It also alerts the driver, by turning on thewarning light U on the instrument panel(on some versions together with the mes-sage + symbol on the reconfigurable multi-function display) (see section “Warninglights and messages”), when these condi-tions are no longer in peak conditions.

The objective is:

– to keep the system efficiency under con-trol;

– to warn when a fault causes emissionlevels to increase;

– to warn of the need to replace deterio-rated components.

The system also has a diagnostic connec-tor that can be interfaced with appropriatetools, which makes it possible to read theerror codes stored in the control unit, to-gether with a series of specific parametersfor engine operation and diagnosis. Thischeck can also be carried out by the trafficpolice.

During use of the compactspare wheel, the ASR func-tion is cut off and the V

warning light on the instrumentcluster turns on glowing steadilytogether with the message on thereconfigurable multifunction dis-play.

For correct operation ofthe ASR system the tyresmust absolutely be of the

same brand and type on all wheels,in perfect conditions and, above all,of the specified type, brand andsize.

IMPORTANT When travelling on snowwith snow chains, it may be helpful to turnthe ASR device off: in fact, in these condi-tions, slipping of the driving wheels whenmoving off makes it possible to obtain bet-ter drive.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

156

IMPORTANT After eliminating the in-convenience, to check the system com-pletely, Alfa Romeo Authorised Services areobliged to run a bench test and, if necessary,road tests which may also call for a long jour-ney.

INTRODUCTION

The radio is fitted with CD player (radiowith Compact Disc player) or CD MP3 play-er (radio with Compact Disc MP3 player)and has been designed in accordance withthe specific features of the passenger com-partment, with a personalised design thatblends with the style of the dashboard. Theradio dimensions are suitable for the car andas it is of fixed type it cannot be installed onany other vehicle.

The instructions for use also include howto control the CD Changer (if fitted) throughthe radio. For the instructions for use of theCD Changer, refer to the specific manual.

ADVICE

Too high a volume whendriving can put the driverslife at risk and that of oth-

er people. Therefore the volumeshould always be adjusted in sucha way that it is always possible tohear the noises of the surroundingenvironment (e.g. horns, ambu-lance, police sirens, etc.).

Road safety

You are advised to learn how to use thevarious radio functions (e.g. storing stations)before starting to drive.

Reception conditions

The reception conditions change constant-ly when travelling. Reception may be dis-turbed by the presence of mountains, build-ings or bridges in particular if far away fromthe broadcasting transmitter.

If, turning the ignition keyto MAR, the warning lightU does not turn on or if,

while travelling it turns on glow-ing steadily or flashing (on someversions together with the mes-sage + symbol on the reconfig-urable multifunction display), con-tact Alfa Romeo Authorised Ser-vices as soon as possible.

RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC PLAYER(Upon request for versions/markets where applicable)

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

157

Compact Disc

Remember that the presence of dirt, marksor distortion on Compact Discs can causeskipping and poor sound quality.

For top performance conditions, we givethe following advice:

only use Compact Discs which have the fol-lowing brand:

– do not expose Compact Discs to directsunlight, high temperatures or damp for pro-longed lengths of time to prevent them frombending;

– do not stick labels or write on therecorder surface of Compact Discs.

To remove a Compact Disc from its con-tainer, press the centre and raise the disccarefully, holding it by the outer circumfer-ence.

Always take the Compact Disc by the out-er circumference. Never touch the surface.

To remove fingerprints and dust, use a softcloth starting from the centre of the Com-pact Disc outwards.

Do not use highly scratched, cracked, ordistorted discs, etc. The use of these discswill involve malfunctioning or damage to theplayer.

To obtain the best sound quality, use orig-inal CD supports. Correct operation is not en-sured if not correctly written CD-R/RW sup-ports and/or with capacity higher than 650MB are used.

IMPORTANT During the reception oftraffic information, the volume may be high-er than normal.

ATTENTION

Care and maintenance

The radio is made in such a way that itdoes not require particular maintenance. Inthe event of a failure, contact Alfa RomeoAuthorised Services.

To clean the front panel only use a soft,antistatic cloth. Cleaning and polishing prod-ucts might spoil the surface.

– carefully clean all Compact Discs of fin-gerprints and dust using a soft cloth. HoldCompact Discs from the outer circumferenceand clean them from the centre outwards;

– never use chemical products for clean-ing (e.g. spray cans, antistatic or thinners)as they might damage the surface of Com-pact Discs;

– after use put Compact Discs back in theircontainer, to avoid marks or scratches thatmay cause skipping when playing;

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

158

IMPORTANT Do not use the protectivesheets for CD in commerce or discs with sta-bilisers, etc. as they might get stuck in theinternal mechanism and damage the disc.

IMPORTANT In case CDs protected bycopy are used, it is possible to wait for a fewseconds before the system starts playingthem.

New discs may be rough around the edges.

When these discs are used, the playermight not work or the sound might skip.

To remove the roughness from the edge ofthe disc use a ball-point etc.

The radio is installed in a user-friendly po-sition for the driver and the passenger andthe graphics on the front panel make loca-tion of the controls quick, facilitating useuse.

The CD Changer for 10 discs, if present,is housed in the left-hand side of the boot.

Below you will find the instructions for use,which you are advised to read through care-fully.

GENERAL

The set possesses the following functions:

Radio section

– PLL tuning with FM/MW/LW frequen-cy bands

– RDS (Radio Data System) with TA (traf-fic information) - PTY (Program Type) - EON(Enhanced Other Network) - REG (RegionalProgrammes) functions

– Alternative frequency search selection inRDS mode (AF function)

– Emergency alarm reception provision

– Automatic/manual station tuning

– Manual storage of 30 stations: 18 inthe FM band (6 in FM1, 6 in FM2, 6 inFMT), 6 in the MW band and 6 in the LWband

– Automatic storage (Autostore function)of 6 stations in FMT band

– SENS DX/LO function (sensitivity ad-justing in searching radio stations)

– Scan function (scanning stored stations)

– Automatic Stereo/Mono switching.

Compact Disc section

– Disc select (disc n)

– Track select (forward/backward)

– Fast forward/backward

– Repeat function (repetition of last piece)

– Scan function (scanning the tracks onthe Compact Disc)

– Mix function (random playing)

– TPM function (storing CD track playingsequence)

– CLR function (clearing CD track storage).

For installation and con-nection of the CD-Changerapply only to Alfa Romeo

Authorised Services.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

159

PROTECTION AGAINST THEFT

The radio is fitted with an antitheft pro-tection system based on the exchange of in-formation between the radio and the elec-tronic control unit (Body Computer) installedon the car. This system warrants the high-est level of security and prevents entry ofthe secret code every time the radio sup-ply is disconnected.

After every re-connection an automaticcheck procedure is performed during whichthe display shows the wording “CAN-CHECK” for about one second. If the resultof the check is positive, the set starts work-ing, whereas if the comparison codes arenot the same or if the radio is connected forthe first time to the vehicle electric system,the device informs the user of the need toenter the secret code according to the pro-cedure described in the following paragraph.

During the code entry procedure the dis-play shows the word “CODE”. The set willnot work until the correct code is entered.

This way the protection system makes theradio unusable after removal from the dash-board in the case of theft.

On multimedia CDs in ad-dition to sound tracks alsodata tracks are recorded.

Playing one of these CDs may causerustling at such a volume as to com-promise road safety, as well ascausing damage to the final stagesand speakers.

Sound section

– Pause function

– Loudness function (excluding versionswith HI-FI BOSE sound system)

– 7 band graphic equaliser

– Separate bass/treble adjustment

– Right/left and front/rear channel bal-ancing.

CAUTIONS

If it is very cold inside the car and the CDplayer is used a little after turning the heateron, a film of damp may form on the Com-pact Disc or on the player optics and thesound may not be perfect. In this case donot use the CD player for at least an hour,so that the condensation dissolves natural-ly and normal operation is resumed.

Driving on rough roads with heavy vibra-tions may cause skipping when the CD play-er is working.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

160

Entering the secret code

Entry of the secret code is required to al-low the radio to work after the first con-nection to the vehicle electric system or toa different Body Computer than the originalone.

Connecting the radio to the car supply, thedisplay will show the wording “CODE” forabout 2 seconds, followed by four dashes“- - - -”.

The secret code comprises four figures from1 to 6, each corresponding to one of thedashes.

To enter the first digit of the code, pressthe corresponding key of the preset stations(from 1 to 6). Enter the other code digits inthe same way.

If the four figures are not entered within20 seconds, the display shows the word“CODE” for 2 seconds and then four dash-es “- - - -”. This is not to be consideredas in incorrect code entry.

After entering the fourth digit (within 20seconds), the radio starts to work.

If a wrong code is entered, the radiosounds a “beep”, the display shows theword “CODE” for 2 seconds and then fourdashes “- - - -” to inform it is necessaryto enter the correct code.

Every time the user enters a wrong code,the waiting time increases gradually (1 min,2 min, 4 min, 8 min, 16 min, 30 min, 1h,2h, 4h, 8h, 16h, 24h) until reaching a max-imum of 24 hours.

The waiting time will be shown on the dis-play with the word “WAIT”. When thisgoes off it is possible to start the new codeentry procedure.

Code Card

This is the document that certifies posses-sion of the radio. The Code Card containsthe radio model, serial number and secretcode.

IMPORTANT Keep the Code Card care-fully to be able to give the related data tothe competent authorities in the event oftheft.

GLOSSARY

AF (Alternative Frequency)

Function that allows the radio to stay tunedon the FM station selected also passingthrough areas served by transmitters withdifferent frequencies.

In fact the RDS system keeps the intensi-ty and quality of the signal received undercontrol, automatically switching tuning onthe frequency of the transmitter that is send-ing the strongest signal.

Autostore/Travelstore

Function with which it is possible to auto-matically store radio stations.

Balance (Channel balancing)

Function with which it is possible to ap-propriately adjust the sound from the rightor left speakers.

Bass

This function adjusts the bass tones.

CD-Changer

Multiple Compact Disc player.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

161

CLR (Clear)

Function with which it is possible to clearall the tracks of the CD stored with the TPMfunction.

EON (Enhanced Other Network)

Function that allows the radio to tune au-tomatically on a different radio station thanthe one being listened to which broadcaststraffic information.

Fader

Function with which it is possible to ap-propriately adjust the sound from the frontor rear speakers.

Hicut (Treble reduction)

Function with which it is possible to reducethe treble tones, in accordance with the sig-nal transmitted.

Distant/Local (Sens Dx/Loc)

These are the two levels of reception.

1) Distant (maximum sensitivity), whichmakes it possible to tune all the stations thatcan be received.

2) Local (minimum sensitivity), whichmakes it possible to tune only those stationswith sufficiently strong signals, such for ex-ample local stations.

Loudness

A function that automatically emphasisesthe bass and treble tones when listening, atlow level. It is cut off with the volume setto the maximum.

Mix

This function is used to randomly select aCompact Disc among those present in theloader and all the tracks on this CompactDisc are played in random sequence.

MSS (Searching previous/nexttrack)

With this function it is possible to listen tothe next or previous track on the cassette.

Mute

Function which, if activated, for examplein the presence of a cell phone in the car,brings the volume to zero when a phone callis being made/received.

Presettings

Number of radio stations that can be storedmanually or automatically.

PTY (Program Type)

This function allows the presetting of a cat-egory of programmes such as for instance,news bulletins, music, sport, etc. The set au-tomatically gives priority to the type of pro-gramme selected when transmission starts,interrupting the one in progress.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

162

RDS (Radio Data System)

This is a radiophonic information systemwhich uses the 57 kHz subcarrier of normalFM broadcasts.

With this function it is possible to receivedifferent types of information such as traf-fic bulletins and station names and to au-tomatically tune to a station with thestrongest signal that is broadcasting thesame programme.

REG (Regional transmissionreception function)

Function with which it is possible to tuneonly to local (regional) stations.

Repeat (Track repetition)

Function with which it is possible to con-tinuously listen to the last track played onthe Compact Disc.

Scan

Function with which it is possible to listenfor a few seconds to all the radio stationsstored, or the beginning of all the tracks con-tained on the Compact Disc.

Scrolling

Function with which it is possible to receivedifferent programmes in the same network(in the FM band only).

PLL tuning

Digital tuning with Phase Lock Loop circuitto obtain the best radio channel tuning.

Soft Mute

Function that gradually highers and low-ers the volume when Mute is turned on oroff.

Sound Flavour

A function that sets the best equalizing pos-sible depending on the type of music se-lected (Classic, Jazz, Rock, etc).

SVC

Function that automatically adjusts the lev-el of the volume to the speed of the car tomaintain the ratio with the noise level in thepassenger compartment.

TA (Traffic information)

Function with which it is possible to receivethe traffic information broadcast by the sta-tions enabled, also when tuned to anotherstation or listening to a cassette, CD, or dur-ing a phone call.

TPM (Track Program Memory)

Function with which it is possible to storethe sequence for playing the tracks of a CD,to be able to play them later in the sequenceset.

Treble

This adjusts the treble tones.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

163

CONTROLS ON FRONT PANEL(fig. 154)

1. AF-TA Function select button:– AF (alternative frequen-

cies)– TA (traffic information)

2. PTY Function select button:– RDS PTY (type of RDS pro-

gramme)– Choice of the subject of

PTY transmission in EONmode

3. Compact Disc slot

4. ¯¯ Selected Sound and Menu ad-justment and manual stationsearch button

5. ˚ Compact Disc eject button

6. ▲ Sound and Menu select buttonand automatic station search

7. ˙˙ Selected Sound and Menufunction adjustment and man-ual station search

8. ▼ Sound and Menu select buttonand automatic station search

9. MENU-PS Menu and Scan functionbutton (hearing storedstations in sequence)

10. 6 Function select button:– Call station no. 6– Store station no. 6

6 MP3 | (only if car radio withreader MP3 is present)

Function selection key:– Calling station no. 6– Storing station no. 6– Displaying folders/pieces

in format MP3

fig. 154A0A0230b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

164

11. 5-MIX Function select button:– Call station no. 5– Store station no. 5– Random CD track playing

12. 4-RPT Function select button:– Call station no. 4– Store station no. 4– Continuous CD track playing

13. BN-AS Radio frequency range selectfunction (FM1, FM2, FMT,MW, LW) - Autostore

14. SRC-SC Operating mode select buttonRadio - Compact Disc - CD-Changer and Scan function(hearing stations in se-quence)

15. 3-II Function select button:– Call station no. 3– Store station no. 3– CD playing pause

16. 2-CLR Function select button:– Call station no. 2– Store station no. 2– CLR function (CD track stor-

age clearing)

17. 1-TPM Function select button:– Call station no. 1– Store station no. 1– TPM function (storing CD

playing sequence)

18. AUD-LD Sound function select button:bass tones, treble tones,right/left and front/rear bal-ancing and Loudness (ex-cluding versions with HI-FIBOSE sound system)

19. VOL- Volume lowering button

20. ON-z Function select button:– Set on/off– Mute on/off

21. VOL+ Volume highering button

CONTROLS ON THE STEERINGWHEEL (fig. 155)

The main radio function controls are re-peated on the steering wheel, to allow eas-ier control.

1. Volume increase button

2. Volume decrease button

3. Mute button

4. Radio frequency range select button(FM1, FM2, FMT, MW, LW) and avail-able sources (Radio - Compact Disc - CD-Changer)

5. Multifunction button:– Radio: call preset stations (from 1 to

6)– Compact Disc player: select next piece

fig. 155

A0A0640b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

165

6. Multifunction button:– Radio: call preset stations (from 6 to

1)– Compact Disc player: select previous

track.

Volume adjustment and Mutebuttons

The buttons for volume adjustment (1)and (2) and for turning Mute on/off (3)work in the same way as the correspondingbuttons on the radio.

Radio frequency and soundsource select button

To cyclically select the radio frequenciesand sound sources, briefly and repeatedlypress button (4).

The frequencies/sources available are:FMI, FMII, FMT, MW, LW, CD*, CDC**.

(*) Only if the Compact Disc is inserted

(**) Only if the CD-Changer is connected

Multifunction buttons (5) and (6)

Multifunction buttons (5) and (6) call thepreset radio stations, or select the next/pre-vious track when listening to a CompactDisc.

Press button (5) to select stations from1 to 6 or to listen to the next track on a CD.

Press button (6) to select stations from6 to 1 or to listen to the previous track ona CD.

FUNCTIONS ANDADJUSTMENTS (fig. 154)

Switching on

The set is turned on keeping the “ON”(20) button pressed. If the radio was onbefore the engine was turned off, it will turnon again automatically the next time the en-gine is started.

If the radio is turned on with the ignitionkey at STOP, it will turn off automaticallyafter about 20 minutes.

With the ignition key at MAR the “ON”button is always lit to facilitate turning onthe radio.

When the radio is turned on again it willresume with the same settings that wereworking before turning off, with the excep-tion of the volume which, if it was set toabove 20, it is activated at 20.

Turning the radio off

To turn off keep the “ON” button (20)pressed again.

If the ignition key is turned to STOP whenthe radio is on, it will turn off automatical-ly and turn on again the next time the keyis turned to MAR.

Selecting the Radio/CompactDisc/CD-Changer functions

Briefly and repeatedly pressing the “SRC”button (14) it is possible to select the fol-lowing functions in sequence:

– TUNER (Radio)

– CD (only if the Compact Disc is insert-ed)

– CHANGER (only if the CD-Changer is con-nected).

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

166

After each change of the sound source, forabout 2.5 seconds, the display shows thefunction selected: TUNER (Radio), CD(Compact Disc), CHANGER (CD-Chang-er).

The functions that cannot be selected (e.g.“CD” when the Compact Disc is not insert-ed) are disabled automatically. If the Com-pact Disc is not inserted and the CD-Chang-er is not connected, pressing the “SRC” but-ton (14) for about 2.5 seconds, the displaywill show only “NO CD”.

IMPORTANT When listening to the ra-dio with a Compact Disc inserted and theCD-Changer connected, pressing the “SRC”button (14) will select the last function usedbetween Compact Disc and CD-Changer.

Pause function

If, while listening to a Compact Disc, an-other function is selected (e.g. the radio),playing is stopped and when the CompactDisc mode is resumed, it starts again fromthe point in which it was stopped.

If, while listening to the radio, anotherfunction is selected, when the Radio modeis resumed, it is tuned to the last stationselected.

Volume adjustment

Press button “VOL+” (21) to higher thevolume or “VOL-” (19) to lower it.

Pressing the button briefly the change isgradual by steps. Pressing longer, thechange is fast. For a few seconds the dis-play shows the wording “VOL” and the vol-ume level (from 0 to 66).

If the volume level is changed during thebroadcast of a traffic bulletin or during useof the phone (if the voice feature is in-stalled), the new setting is maintained on-ly until the end of the bulletin or phone call.

Volume changing with speed(excluding versions with HI-FIBOSE sound system)

The SVC function makes it possible to au-tomatically adapt the volume level to thespeed of the car, increasing it as the speedincreases to maintain the ratio with the noiselevel inside the passenger compartment.

To activate the SVC function, briefly press(less than 1 second) the “MENU” button(9), then use buttons “▲” (6) or “▼” (8)to scroll the menu functions stopping on theSVC function and buttons “˙ ”̇ (7) or“¯¯” (4) to turn the function on or off se-lecting respectively “SVC ON” or “SVCOFF”.

This function can be turned on or off in allthe operating modes of the device (Ra-dio/Compact Disc/CD-Changer).

Mute function (turning off the volumecompletely)

To turn on the Mute function, briefly press(less than 1 second) the “z” button (20).The volume will lower gradually (Soft Mute)and the display will show “MUTE”.

To turn the Mute function off, briefly pressthe “z” button again (20). The volumewill increase gradually (Soft Mute) return-ing to the value set before using the Mutefunction.

The Mute function is also turned off press-ing one of the volume adjustment buttons“VOL+” (21) or “VOL-” (19): in thiscase the volume is changed directly.

With the Mute function on, all the otherfunctions can be used and if a traffic bul-letin arrives with the TA function on or anemergency alarm is received, the messageignores the Mute function.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

167

Soft Mute function

When the Mute function is turned on oroff, the volume lowers or increases gradu-ally (Soft Mute function). The Soft Mutefunction is also activated when one of thesix presetting buttons, the“BN” button(13) or “ON” button (20) is pressed.

Tone adjustment

Proceed as follows:

– briefly and repeatedly press the “AUD”button (18) until the display shows thewording “BASS” or “TREBLE” (Bass orTreble select function)

– press “▲” (6) to increase the bassesor trebles or “▼” (8) to lower them.

Pressing the buttons briefly, the changeis gradual by steps. Pressing them longer,the change is fast.

For a few seconds the display shows thelevels of the basses/trebles (from -6 to +6).

After about 5 seconds from the last ad-justment the display returns to the main ra-dio screen.

Balance adjustment

Proceed as follows:

– briefly and repeatedly press the “AUD”button (18) until the display shows thewording “BALANCE” (Balance functionselect)

– press “▲” (6) to increase the soundfrom the right speakers or “▼” (8) to in-crease the sound from the left speakers.

Pressing the buttons briefly, the changeis gradual by steps. Pressing them longer,the change is fast. For a few seconds thedisplay shows the balancing levels from R+9to L+9 (“R” = right, “L” = left). Afterabout 5 seconds from the last adjustment,the display returns to the main radio screen.

Fader adjustment

Proceed as follows:

– briefly and repeatedly press the “AUD”button (18) until the display shows thewording “FADER” (Fader select function)

– press “▲” (6) to increase the soundfrom the rear speakers “▼” (8) to increasethe sound from the front speakers.

Pressing the buttons briefly the change isgradual by steps. Pressing them longer, thechange is fast. For a few seconds the dis-play shows the fader levels from R+9 toF+9 (“R” = rear, “F” = front).

After about 5 seconds from the last ad-justment the display returns to the main ra-dio screen.

Loudness function (excluding versions with HI-FI BOSEsound system)

The Loudness function improves the soundvolume when listening at low level, in-creasing the basses and trebles. It is cut offwhen the volume is set to maximum. Toswitch the function on/off keep the “AUD”(button 18) pressed until hearing the“beep”. The function condition (on or off)is shown on the display for a few secondsby “LOUD ON” or “LOUD OFF”.

On versions with BOSE HI-FI sound, theLoudness function is activated automatical-ly by the amplifier.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

168

TELEPHONE PROVISION (fig. 154)

If the voice kit is installed on the car, whena phone call is received the radio sound isconnected to the phone input. The telephonesound is heard with a fixed volume, but itcan be adjusted during the conversation us-ing “VOL+” (21) to higher the volume or“VOL-” (19) to lower it.

The fixed telephone volume can be ad-justed through the “PHONE” function ofthe menu (see “MENU” paragraph).

The only buttons active during phone callsare:

– “VOL+” (21), “VOL-” (19): forvolume adjustment

– “ON” (20): turning the radio on/off

– “AF-TA” (1): traffic information.

While the sound is off for a phone call, thedisplay shows the word “PHONE”.

The sound of the phone call will be inter-rupted in the case of transmission of a traf-fic bulletin or a PTY31 announcement; ifwishing to interrupt the bulletin press the“AF-TA” button (1).

RADIO (fig. 154)

When the set is turned on the last functionselected before turning off is played (Radio,Compact Disc or CD-Changer).

To select the Radio function while listeningto a Compact Disc, briefly and repeatedlypress the “SRC” button (14) until thisfunction is selected.

Selecting the frequency band

If in the Radio mode, briefly and repeat-edly press the “BN” button (13) to selectthe required reception band.

Every time the button is pressed the fol-lowing bands are selected in sequence“FM1”, “FM2”, “FMT”, “MW” and“LW” shown by the respective wording onthe display.

The FM band is divided into section: FM1,FM2 and FMT.

The FMT reception band is reserved to thestations stored automatically with the Au-tostore function.

The radio is always ready to receive sta-tions in the RDS Mode (Radio Data System).

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

169

Presetting buttons

The buttons with the symbols 1 to 6(“17”, “16”, “15”, “12”, “11”,“10”) make it possible to choose the fol-lowing presettings:

– 18 in the FM band (6 in FM1, 6 inFM2, 6 in FMT)

– 6 in the MW band

– 6 in the LW band

– 6 types of PTY programming (only inthe FM mode when PTY is selected).

To call a preset station, choose the requiredfrequency band and then press briefly (lessthan 1 second) the corresponding preset but-ton (from 1 to 6). For a few seconds thedisplay will show the number of the stationpreset and the related frequency beforeshowing the frequency band and the nameof the RDS station.

Storing the last station heard

The radio automatically keeps in storagethe last station heard for each receptionband, which is tuned when the radio isturned on or the reception band is changed.

Automatic tuning

Briefly press (less than 1 second) “▲”(6) or “▼” (8) to start automaticallysearching the tuning for the next station thatit is possible to receive in the direction cho-sen.

If “▲” (6) or “▼” (8) is pressed forlonger (over 1 second) quick searchingtakes place: upon having tuned into the firstwell receivable station, the tuner stops forabout 1 second (in Mute) before quicksearching continues. When the button is re-leased, the tuner stops on the next receiv-able station.

If the TA function is on (traffic information),the tuner only searches stations which broad-cast traffic bulletins.

If the PTY function is on, the tuner onlysearches PTY stations. When searching thedisplay alternatively shows the type of pro-gramme and the word “SEARCH”.

If the station on which the tuner stops isone of the stations stored with the presetbuttons, the display will show the presettingnumber for a few seconds.

Manual tuning

This allows manual station searching in thechosen band.

– Select the band with the “BN” button(13): FM1, FM2, FMT, MW or LW.

– Briefly and repeatedly press “¯¯” (4)or “˙ ”̇ (7).

– Pressing the button longer (over 1 sec-ond) obtains fast forward searching, whichis stopped when the button is released.

To turn on manual tuning search it is nec-essary to turn off the PTY and AF (alterna-tive frequencies) functions, if on.

If the station tuned is a station stored withthe preset buttons, the display will show thepresetting number for a few seconds.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

170

Station scanning (Scan function)

Keeping the “SRC” button pressed (14)until the hearing the “beep” starts the sta-tion scan in the selected frequency band(FM, MW,LW). Each station found will beheard for a few seconds and the name andfrequency will flash on the display. Whilesearching, the display will show “FM-SCAN”, “AM-SCAN” or “PTY-SCAN”for a few seconds.

If the TA function is on (traffic information),the system will search only the stations thatbroadcast traffic bulletins. If the PTY func-tion is on, the system will only search PTYstations.

When the scan function is on, all the oth-er functions are cancelled.

When wanting to continue listening to astation selected during scanning, press“SRC” (14) again.

The Scan function is interrupted in the fol-lowing cases:

– turning the set off

– pressing “SRC” (14)

– pressing “▲” (6) or “▼” (8) (startsmanual or automatic tuning)

– pressing a preset button

– turning Autostore on

– turning PTY on/off

– changing the chosen frequency band

– pressing “AUD” (18)

– pressing “MENU” (9)

– when a station is found that is broad-casting a traffic bulletin, if the TA functionis on

– inserting a Compact Disc.

In any case the search function will beturned off after scanning the frequencyband, even if no station is selected.

Scanning preset stations

Press the “MENU” button (9) to startscanning the preset stations in the presentfrequency band:

– FM: FMI 1, FMI 2, ..., FMI 6, FMII 1,FMII 2, ... FMII 6, FMT 1, FMT 2, ..., FMT 6

– MW: MW 1, MW 2, ..., MW 6

– LW: LW 1, LW 2, ..., LW 6.

Each preset station will be heard for a fewseconds and its name or frequency will flashon the display, if the signal intensity is suf-ficient. In passing from one presetting to an-other the display will show the word“SCAN” for about 2 seconds.

In the first 2 seconds in which the new pre-set station is heard, the display shows thecurrent frequency band and the number ofthe pre-select button.

If the TA function is on (traffic information),the system will only search stations thatbroadcast traffic bulletins.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

171

The preset station Scan is interrupted inthe following cases:


– pressing “BN” (13)

– pressing “▲” (6) or “▼” (8) (startsmanual or automatic tuning)



– turning PTY on/off

– changing the sound source (CD, CD-Changer)

– changing the FM level or frequency bandselected


– pressing “MENU” (9)

– when a station is found that is broad-casting a traffic bulletin, if the TA functionis on

– inserting a Compact Disc.

If no presetting has been selected, hear-ing the station chosen previously will be re-sumed.

Manual station storage

The station being heard can be stored inthe range selected with buttons (17),(16), (15), (12), (11), (10) numberedfrom 1 to 6.

Keep one of these buttons pressed (from1 to 6) until receiving the confirmation“beep”. After storage, the display shows thenumber of the button with which the stationhas been stored.

Autostore function

To turn on the Autostore function keep the“BN” button (13) pressed until hearingthe confirmation “beep”. With this functionthe radio automatically stores the stationswith the strongest signal in decreasing orderof intensity of the FMT frequency band.

IMPORTANT Activating the Autostorefunction cancels the stations stored previ-ously in the FMT band.

If the TA function is on (traffic information),only the stations that send traffic informa-tion will be stored. This function may alsobe turned on when listening to a CompactDisc or the CD-Changer.

During automatic storage the display willshow the wording “A-STORE”. To inter-rupt the storage process press the “BN”(13) button again: the radio will automat-ically tune to the station heard before acti-vation of the Autostore function.

At the end of the Autostore function the ra-dio automatically tunes on the first presetstation in the FM1 band.

On buttons (17), (16), (15), (12),(11), (10) numbered from 1 to 6, the sta-tions are automatically stored that give astrong signal in that moment in the presetband.

After storage the radio automatically tuneson the frequency stored on button 1 (17).

Every station is stored only once, exceptin the case of regional programmes whichin certain cases might be stored twice.

During the automatic storage process thedisplay shows the wording “A-STORE”.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

172

The behaviour of the set during Autostoreis as follows:

– at the beginning of the Autostore func-tion all the other functions are disabled

– any change in volume is not shown onthe display

– pressing one of the radio function but-tons, for example “PTY” (2), “˙ ”̇ (7),“¯¯” (4), (17), (16), (15), (12),(11), (10) the automatic storage processis interrupted, the last station heard beforeAutostore was turned on is tuned and thefunction associated with the button pressedis run

– pressing “AF-TA” (1) during auto-matic storage will interrupt it, the TA func-tion (traffic information) will be turnedon/off and a new automatic storage processwill be started

– changing the sound source (Radio, Com-pact Disc, CD-Changer) during automaticstorage, Autostore is not interrupted.

IMPORTANT Sometimes the Autostorefunction is unable to find 6 stations with astrong signal. In this case, the free presettingbuttons will be shown on the display, forabout 2 seconds, by 4 dashes and the laststation heard will be returned.

Listening to stored stations

Proceed as follows:

– select the required frequency band (FM,MW, LW)

– briefly press one of the six station stor-age buttons.

The display will show the number that cor-responds to the button.

In bands FM1, FM2 and FMT, if receptionis poor and the AF alternative frequencysearch function is active, the station with thestrongest signal that is broadcasting thesame programme will be sought automati-cally.

AF function (alternativefrequency search)

Within the RDS system the radio can workin two different modes:

AF ON: alternative frequency search on

AF OFF: alternative frequency search off.

When the signal of the RDS station tunedweakens, the following two cases may oc-cur:

– With AF ON the RDS system activatesautomatic tuning of the optimum frequencyof the station chosen, with the stations en-abled, therefore the radio is automaticallytuned to the station with the strongest sig-nal that is broadcasting the same pro-gramme. During the journey it will thus bepossible to continue listening to the stationchosen without having to change the fre-quency when changing area. Of course, thestation being listened to must be receivablein the area the car is crossing.

– With AF OFF the radio will not tunethe strongest station automatically and itwill have to be found manually using thetuner buttons.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

173

To turn alternative frequency search AF ofthe station chosen on/off, keep the “AF-TA” button pressed (1) until hearing the“beep”. The name RDS (if available) stayson the display and if the AF function hasbeen turned on the symbol “AF” is shown.

If the radio is working in AM band, whenthe “AF-TA” (1) is pressed, it passes tothe FM band on the last station selected.

TA function (traffic information)

Some stations in the FM band (FM1, FM2and FMT) are enabled to also broadcast in-formation about traffic conditions. In thiscase the display shows the wording “TP”.

To turn on/off the traffic information TAfunction briefly press (less than 1 second)the “AF-TA” button (1).

The listening conditions and informationgiven on the display may be the following:

TA and TP: if tuned to a station that sendstraffic information and the traffic informa-tion function is on

TP: if tuned to a station that sends traf-fic information but the traffic informationfunction is off

TA(*): the traffic information is on but theradio is tuned to a station that does not givetraffic information

TA and TP not shown on the display: theradio is tuned to a station that does not givetraffic information and the traffic informa-tion function is off.

(*) If the traffic information function TA is on,but the radio station chosen does not give traf-fic information, the device “beeps” every 30 sec-onds.

With the TA function on (traffic informa-tion) it is possible:

a) to search only RDS stations that trans-mit in the FM band, enabled to broadcasttraffic information

b) receive traffic information even if theCompact Disc player or CD-Changer is in use

c) receive traffic information at a prede-fined minimum volume even with the ra-dio volume off.

The operations to be carried out for eachof the three above conditions are listed be-low.

a) To receive stations enabled to broad-cast traffic information:

– select band FM1, FM2 or FMT

– briefly press (less than 1 second) the“AF-TA” button (1) so that the displayshows “TA”.

– press the tuner buttons “˙ ”̇ (7) or“¯¯” (4).

To store stations with TA on, carry out thestorage operations (see “Manual stationstorage”).

b) If wishing to receive traffic informa-tion when listening to a Compact Disc, be-fore inserting the Compact Disc, or turningon the CD-Changer, tune to a station enabledto broadcast traffic information (TP) andturn on the TA function. If while listening tothe Compact Disc, this station broadcaststraffic information, the Compact Disc will besuspended temporarily and resumed againautomatically after the end of the message.At the start of reception of traffic informa-tion, the display will briefly show “INFOTRA”, while the display continues givingfurther information (frequency, name, timeof CD etc.).

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

174

If the Compact Disc player is already work-ing and at the same time you want to re-ceive traffic information, briefly pressing(less than 1 second) the “AF-TA” button(1) the radio tunes to the last station heardin the FM band, the TA traffic informationfunction is activated and the traffic messagesare transmitted. If the station selected doesnot send traffic information, the search foran enabled station starts automatically.

If wishing to interrupt the traffic informa-tion message, briefly press (less than 1 sec-ond) the “AF-TA” button (1) during trans-mission of the message.

c) To receive traffic information while notlistening to the radio:

– turn on the TA function, briefly pressing(less than 1 second) the “AF-TA” button(1), so that the display shows “TA”

– tune to a station enabled to transmittraffic information so that the display shows“TP”, take the volume to zero keeping the“VOL-” (19) button pressed.

This way, if that station broadcasts trafficinformation, this will be heard at a minimumpredefined volume.

IMPORTANT In certain countries radiostations exist which, even if the TP functionis on (the display shows “TP”), do nottransmit traffic information.

If the radio is working in the AM bandwhen the “AF-TA” button (1) is pressed,it passes to the FM band on the last sta-tion heard. If the station selected does notbroadcast traffic information (wording “TP”not shown on the display), the search foran enabled station starts automatically.

The volume with which the traffic bulletinstransmitted varies depending on the listen-ing volume:

– listening volume below 30: traffic bul-letin volume = 20 (fixed value)

– listening volume above 30: traffic bul-letin volume the same as the listening vol-ume + 1.

If the volume is changed during a trafficbulletin the value is not shown on the dis-play and the new value is kept only for thebulletin in progress.

During a traffic bulletin it is possible to turnon sound adjustment with the “AUD” but-ton (18). The new values set are also keptat the end of the bulletin.

IMPORTANT If the TA function is onand the station tuned is not able to providetraffic information or it is no longer able toprovide this information (the display will notshow “TP”), so after 1 minute in which theradio is in these conditions:

– if listening to a Compact Disc anotherstation is sought that is enabled to trans-mit traffic information

– if, when listening to the radio, a “beep”is given to alert that it is not possible to re-ceive traffic information; to interrupt it, it isnecessary to tune to a station that can pro-vide traffic information or switch off the TAfunction.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

175

Emergency alarm reception

In the RDS mode the radio is set to receiveemergency announcements in the case ofexceptional circumstances or events thatmay cause general danger (earthquakes,floods, etc.) if they are broadcast by the sta-tion tuned.

This function is activated automatically andcannot be deactivated.

Program Type Function (PTY)(selecting a type of programme)

To turn on the PTY function, which makesit possible to give top priority to PTY pro-grammes, when present, which may involveemergency messages or various topics (e.g.music, news bulletins) briefly press the“PTY” button (2) until the display shows“PTY” and the subject of the last stationheard (e.g. “NEWS”).

IMPORTANT To turn on the PTY func-tion, the radio must be in the FM band.

If the station does not broadcast in the PTYmode, the wording “NO-PTY” is shownon the display for 5 seconds.

After 2 seconds the station name or fre-quency is shown on the display.

The list of the various subjects comprises:

NEWS

AFFAIRS

INFO

SPORT

EDUCATE

DRAMA

CULTURE

SCIENCE

VARIED

POP M

ROCK M

M, O, R, M Middle of the Road Music

LIGHT M

CLASSICS

OTHER M

To change the type of PTY programmepress “¯¯” (4) or “˙ ”̇ (7) or one ofthe 6 preset buttons. If the display showsthe station frequency or name, pressing“¯¯” (4) or “˙ ”̇ (7) the current typeof programme will be displayed.

To store the current type of programme onone of the 6 preset buttons, give a pro-longed press (over 1 second) on the pre-set button. Storage is confirmed by a“beep”. To seek a station with this pro-gramme see the “Automatic tuning” and“Scanning stations (Scan function)” para-graphs.

If no station is available with this type ofprogramme the system sounds a “beep”,the station selected previously is heard andfor 2 seconds the display shows the word-ing “NO-PTY”.

To turn the PTY function off briefly pressthe “PTY” (2) button again.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

176

Controlling the station type ofPTY programme

To know the type of PTY programme ofthe station heard keep the “PTY” button(2) pressed until a “beep” is heard. Afterthe “beep” the display will show the typeof programme (see previous paragraph) of-fered by the station tuned. If the station hasno PTY code the display will show the word-ing “NO-PTY”. After about 5 seconds thedisplay will again show the RDS name orfrequency of the station tuned.

EON function (Enhanced Other Network)

Some countries have circuits which grouptogether several stations enabled to broad-cast traffic information. In this case the pro-gramme of the station being heard will beinterrupted temporarily to receive traffic in-formation (only with the TA function on),every time these bulletins are given by oneof the stations of the same circuit.

Scrolling transmissions

It is possible to receive different pro-grammes in the same network and scrollthem (in FM band only) - e.g.: NDR1,NDR2, NDR3, NDR4, N-JOY...

To turn on this function, briefly press the“AF-TA” button (1) to turn on the AF func-tion. The user can then start scrolling press-ing “˙ ”̇ (7) or “¯¯” (4).

IMPORTANT The station must havebeen received previously at least once.

Stereophonic stations

If the signal received is weak, the deviceswitches automatically from Stereo to Mono.

MENU (fig. 154)

Functions of “MENU” button (9)

To turn on the Menu function briefly press(less than 1 second) the “MENU” button(9). The display will show the word“MENU”.

To scroll the Menu functions use “▲” (6)or “▼” (8). To turn on/off the function se-lected use “˙ ”̇ (7) or “¯¯” (4).

The display will show the current statusof the function selected.

The functions controlled by the menu arethe following:

– EQ SET (Equalizer settings, only if theequalizer is on)

– PRESET/USER/CLASSIC/ROCK/JAZZ (Turning on/off and choos-ing predefined equalizer adjustments)

– HICUT (Treble reduction)

– PHONE (Volume of phone, if installed)

– CD NAME (Allocation of CD names,only with CD inserted)

– SVC (Automatic volume control in re-lation to speed) (excluding versions withHI-FI BOSE sound system)

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

177

– SENS DX/LO (Tuning sensitivity)

– CD (CD display setting)

– CDC (CD-Changer display setting, if in-stalled)

– REG (Regional programmes).

To exit the Menu function, press the“MENU” button again (9).

IGN TIME function (switching offmode)

This function enables to set radio switch-ing off in two different modes. To turn thisfunction on/off, use buttons 4 (˜) or 7(÷).

The display will show the selected mode:

– “00 MIN”: deactivation dependent ofignition key. The radio will switch off auto-matically as soon as the ignition key isturned to STOP;

– “20 MIN”: deactivation independent ofignition key. The radio will stay on for max.20 minutes after turning the ignition keyto STOP.

IMPORTANT Should the radio turn offautomatically after turning the ignition keyto STOP (for the immediate or 20-minutedelayed deactivation), it will turn on auto-matically turning the ignition key to MAR.If the radio is turned off by pressing theknob/button 20 (VOLUME ON/OFF),when turning the key to MAR the radio willstay off.

Turning the equalizer on/off(excluding versions with HI-FIBOSE sound system)

The integrated equalizer can be turned onor off. With the equalizer off, it is possibleto change the sound settings only adjust-ing the bass (“BASS”) and treble tones(“TREBLE”), while activating the functionmakes it possible to adjust the sound curves.

To turn the equalizer off, select “PRE-SET” with “▲” (6) or “▼” (8).

To turn the equalizer on, select one of thefollowing with “▲” (6) o “▼” (8):

– “USER” (adjustment of the 7 equal-izer bands that can be changed by the user)

– “CLASSIC” (predefined equalizer ad-justment)

– “ROCK” (predefined equalizer adjust-ment)

– “JAZZ” (predefined equalizer adjust-ment).

After selecting the last adjustment set inthe Menu using “▲” (6) or “▼” (8), use“˙ ”̇ (7) or “¯¯” (4) to change it.

When one of the equalizer settings in on,the display shows “EQ”.

On versions with BOSE HI-FI system, ana-logue equalizing in amplitude and phase ofthe signal is done automatically by the am-plifier.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

178

Equalizer settings (only if the equalizer is on)

To set a personal equalizer adjustment use“▲” (6) or “▼” (8) “USER”; the displayshows “EQ SET”.

To change the equalizer settings, use“˙ ”̇ (7) or “¯¯” (4). The displayshows a graph with 7 bars, where each barrepresents a frequency for the left or rightchannel. Choose the bar to be adjusted us-ing “˙ ”̇ (7) or “¯¯” (4); the bar cho-sen starts to flash and it is possible to adjustusing “▲” (6) or “▼” (8).

To store new settings, press the “MENU”button again (9). The display still shows“EQ SET”.

Treble tone reduction function(HICUT)

Using this function it is possible to reducethe treble tones, in accordance with the sig-nal transmitted. To turn this function on/off,use “¯¯” (4) or “˙ ”̇ (7).

The display will show the current statusof the function:

– “HICUT ON”: function on

– “NO HICUT”: function off.

Phone volume adjustmentfunction (PHONE)

With this function it is possible to adjust(setting from 1 to 66) or cut off (OFF set-ting) the telephone sound.

To turn on/off, use “¯¯” (4) or “˙˙”(7).

To adjust the sound, use “VOL+” (21)or “VOL-” (19).

The display will show the current status ofthe function:

– “PHONE 23”: function on with vol-ume setting 23

– “PHONE OFF”: function off.

Allocating a name to a CD (CD NAME)

This function can be chosen only if a Com-pact Disc is inserted. To turn on, use “¯¯”(4) or “˙ ”̇ (7): the display will show“CD-NAME”. If the CD already has aname, this will be shown on the display, ifnot, eight dashes will be shown. If storageis no longer available for a new name, thedisplay will show the first name stored.

To change the name or give a name to thenew CD press “¯¯” (4) or “˙˙” (7).Press the buttons again to choose the posi-tion of the character to be changed. Press“▲” (6) or “▼” (8) to choose or changethe character.

To store the name, press the “MENU”button again (9). The display will show“CD-NAME”.

To clear a name, turn the function on andpress “▲” (6) or “▼” (8) to choose thename to be cleared, then press the“MENU” (9) button for about 2 seconds.The system beeps and the display shows“ONE CLR” for about 2 seconds. At thispoint the procedure can be started to give anew name.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

179

To clear all the names, turn the functionon and keep the “MENU” (9) buttonpressed for about 4 seconds. The set givestwo beeps and the display shows “ALLCLR” for about 2 seconds. At this point itis possible to start the name allocation pro-cedure.

Volume changing with speedfunction (SVC) (excludingversions with HI-FI BOSE soundsystem)

The SVC function makes it possible to au-tomatically adapt the volume level to thespeed of the car, increasing it as the speedincreases to maintain the ratio with the noiselevel inside the passenger compartment.

To turn the function on/off use “¯¯” (4)or “˙ ”̇ (7). The display will show the cur-rent status of the function:

– “SVC-ON”: function on

– “SVC-OFF”: function off.

Tuner sensitivity adjustment (SENS DX/LO)

With this function it is possible to changethe sensitivity of automatic station search-ing. When low sensitivity is set “SENS-LO” only stations with excellent receptionare sought, when high sensitivity is set“SENS-DX” all stations are sought. There-fore, if the car is in an area with a consid-erable number of stations and you want tochoose only those with a strong signal, setto low sensitivity “SENS-LO”.

To set the sensitivity, use “¯¯” (4) or“˙ ”̇ (7). The display will show the cur-rent status of the function:

– “SENS-LO”: low sensitivity

– “SENS-DX”: high sensitivity.

Compact Disc data displayfunction (CD)

With this function it is possible to choosethe information shown by the display, whenlistening to a Compact Disc.

Two settings are available:

– TIME (time elapsed since the start ofthe track)

– NAME (CD name).

After choosing “CD” in the Menu using“▲” (6) or “▼” (8), the display shows“CD-DISP”. To change the setting use“¯ ”̄ (4) or “˙ ”̇ (7).

CD-Changer data displayfunction(CDC)(if installed)

This function can be chosen only if a CD-Changer is connected. In this case the dis-play will show “CDC-DISP”.

To change function, use “¯¯” (4) or“˙ ”̇ (7).

The display shows the setting among thetwo possible: “TIME” and “CD-NR”.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

180

Regional broadcast receptionfunction (REG)

Some national broadcasters, at determi-nate times of the day, transmit regional pro-grammes which differ from region to region.This function makes it possible to tune in on-ly local stations (regional). However if aregional programme is heard and you wishto stay tuned to it, the function must be ac-tivated.

To turn the function on/off, use “˙ ”̇(7) or “¯¯” (4).


– “REG-ON”: function on

– “REG-OFF”: function off.

If the function is off and a regional pro-gramme is tuned that works in a determi-nate area and the car enters a different area,the regional station of the new area is re-ceived.

IMPORTANT When the function is off(“REG-OFF”) and the AF function is on(alternative frequencies) the radio auto-matically tunes to the frequency of the se-lection selected with the strongest signal.

COMPACT DISC PLAYER(fig. 154)

Selecting the Compact Disc player

To turn on the Compact Disc player inte-grated in the set, when a CD is already in-serted, turn the set on, then briefly and re-peatedly press the “SRC” button (14) toselect the “CD” operating mode. Insertinga CD, also with the device off, the CD play-er is turned on.

Inserting/ejecting a CD

To insert the CD set it gently in place (3)to activate the powered loading system,which will position it correctly.

Press “˚” (5), with the device on, to op-erate the powered CD eject system.

After ejection, the source heard before play-ing the CD will return. The CD cannot beejected if the device is off.

Possible error messages

If the CD inserted is illegible, the displaywill show the wording “CD-ERROR”, forabout 2 seconds, then the CD is ejected andthe previous source before the CD was se-lected returns.

Display information

When the CD player is working, the dis-play shows information which has the fol-lowing meaning:

“T05”: shows the number of the track onthe CD

“03:42”: shows the time elapsed sincethe start of the track (if the correspondingMenu function is on)

“MADONNA”: shows the name givento the CD.

Select track (forward/backward)

Briefly press “▲” (6) to play the nexttrack on the CD and “▼” (8) to play theprevious one.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

181

To select tracks continuously,keep the button pressed.

If playing the track started more than 3seconds ago, pressing “▼” (8) the track isplayed again from the start. In this case ifwanting to play the previous track, press thebutton twice consecutively.

Fast forward/backward

Keep “˙̇ ” (7) pressed to move the trackselected forward at high speed and keep“¯¯” (4) pressed to move it quickly back-ward. Fast forward/backward is interrupt-ed once the button is released.

If the CD name display has been chosenin the menu, this will be replaced by theCD time display. After about 2 seconds fromthe last time the button is pressed, the CDname will be displayed again.

Pause function

To pause the CD player press the presetbutton 3 (15). The display will show “CD-PAUSE”.

To listen again, press the preset button 3(15) again.

Scanning pieces on the CD (Scan function)

With this function it is possible to hear allthe pieces contained on a CD.

Keep the “SRC” button (14) pressed forover one second to play the first 10 secondsof each track on the CD. While the track isplaying the display will alternately show, for2 seconds, the CD function chosen (CD timeor name) and the wording “SCAN”. If theScan function is on, Repeat and Mix areturned off.

The scanning sequence is the following:

– from the track played up to the last oneon the CD

– from the first one on the CD up to theone played the moment scanning was start-ed.



– pressing the “SRC” button (14) againto continue listening to the track that wasbeing played

– pressing “▲” (6) or “▼” (8) (press-ing them together the track will be skipped)



– turning PTY on

– changing the sound source


– if the TA function is on the station se-lected is broadcasting a traffic bulletin

– pressing “MENU” (9).

If the Scan function is not interrupted, atthe end it will continue playing the trackplayed before scanning was started.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

182

Repeat

Briefly press the preset button 4 (12) tolisten repeatedly to the last track played: forabout 2 seconds the display will show “RPTTRUCK”.

Press preset button 4 (12) again to turnoff the repeat function: for about 2 secondsthe display will show“RPT OFF”. Whenthe function is on the display shows “RPT”.

Changing the sound source, the functionis turned off.

IMPORTANT When the repeat functionis turned on, the Scan and Mix functions areturned off.

Random playing (MIX function)

To start the random playing of tracks onthe Compact Disc, press the preset button 5(11). A new track will be played and forabout 2 seconds the display will show “CD-MIX-ON”. Press the preset button 5 (11)again to turn the function off: for about 2seconds the display will show “CD-MIX-OFF”.

When the Mix function is on, all the trackson the CD are played in random sequence.


IMPORTANT When The Mix function isturned on, Scan and Repeat are turned off.

TPM function (CD playingsequence storage)

With the TPM function (Track ProgramMemory) it is possible to store the sequencefor playing tracks of a CD, to be able to playthem later in the sequence set.

To turn the function on briefly press (lessthan 1 second) the preset button 1 (17),while listening to a CD. When the functionis on, the display shows “TPM”.

To store tracks, select the track required,then press the preset button 1 (17) forabout 1 second, until hearing the beep; thedisplay will show “STORED”. Repeat thisprocedure for all the other tracks to be stored.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

183

CLR function (clearing CD trackstorage)

With the CLR function it is possible to clearone or all the CD tracks stored with the TPMfunction.

To clear only one track from storage, se-lect it using button “▲” (6) or “▼” (8)when the TPM function is on, then press thepreset button 2 (16) for about 2 seconds;the TPM function is turned off, a beep isheard and the display shows “TR CLR”.

To clear all the tracks of the CD selectedfrom storage, turn on the TPM function, thenpress the preset button 2 (16) for about4 seconds; the TPM function is turned off, adouble beep is heard after about 2 and 4seconds and the display shows “CD CLR”.

CD-CHANGER(Compact Disc Player)

The CD-CHANGER (where fitted) is on theleft wall of the luggage compartment.

To gain access to it open the lid (A-fig. 156) and then move the lid in theshown direction (B-fig. 157).

Selecting the CD-CHANGER

To turn on the CD-Changer, turn on the set,then press briefly and repeatedly the “SRC”button (14) to select the “CHANGER”function.

When listening to a Compact Disc for thefirst time after putting it in the CD loader,playing starts from the first track on the firstdisc available.

Possible error messages

If the CD selected is not available due tolack of the loader or because the loader isnot inserted in the CD-Changer, the displayshows “CHANGER”.

If the CD played is illegible the displayshows “CD-ERROR”, the next CD will beselected; if there are no other CDs or if theyare also illegible, the display will show thewording “NO CD” until the sound source ischanged.

In the event of a fault to the CD-Changeror difficulty in removing the loader, the dis-play will show the wording “CD ERROR”.

fig. 156

A0A0678b

fig. 157

A0A0679b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

184

Display information

When the CD-Changer is working, the dis-play shows the following information whichmeans:

“T05”: shows the number of the track onthe CD

“03:42”: shows the time elapsed sincethe start of the track (if the correspondingMenu function is on)

“CD 04”: shows the number of the CDin the loader.

Chosing the CD

Press “¯¯” (4) to select the previous CDand “˙ ”̇ (7) to select the next CD. If inthe menu the CD time display function wasselected, this will be replaced for about 2seconds by the CD number.

If the loader does not contain a disc in theposition selected, the display briefly showsthe wording “NO CD”, and the next discis played automatically.


Briefly press “▲” (6) to play the nexttrack of the CD chosen and “▼” (8) to playthe previous track.

To select tracks continuously, keep the but-ton pressed.

If playing the track started more than 3seconds ago, pressing “▼” (8) the track isplayed again from the start. In this case ifwanting to play the previous track, press thebutton twice consecutively.


Keep “˙̇ ” (7) pressed to move the trackselected forward at high speed and keep“¯¯” (4) pressed to move it quickly back-ward. Fast forward/backward is interrupt-ed once the button is released.

A brief press on the button moves the trackforward or backward by 1 second.

If the CD number display function was se-lected in the menu, this will be replaced forabout 2 seconds by the CD time display func-tion.

Scanning CD tracks (Scan function)

With this function it is possible to listen toall the tracks contained on the CD selected.

Keep the “SRC” (button 14) pressed formore than one second to play the first 10seconds of every track on the CD. Whileplaying, the display will alternately show forabout 2 seconds the CD function chosen (CDname, time or number) and the word“SCAN”. If the Scan function is on, the Re-peat and Mix functions are turned off.


– from the track played up to the last ofthe tracks on the CD

– change of CD and scanning all the tracks(and so on for all the CDs in the changer)

– from the first track up to the one playeduntil the start of scanning.



– pressing the “SRC” button (14) againto continue listening to the track that wasbeing played

– pressing “▲” (6) or “▼” (8) (press-ing them together the track will be skipped)

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

185



– turning PTY on

– changing the sound source


– if the TA function is on the station se-lected is broadcasting a traffic bulletin

– pressing “MENU” (9).

If the Scan function is not interrupted, atthe end it will continue playing the trackplayed before scanning was started.

Pause function

To pause the CD-Changer press the presetbutton 3 (15). The display will show “CD-PAUSE”.

To resume playing the track, press the pre-set button 3 (15).

Repeat

Briefly press the preset button 4 (12) tolisten repeatedly to the last track played: forabout 2 seconds the display will show “RPTTRUCK”.

Press preset button 4 (12) again to turnoff the repeat function: for about 2 secondsthe display will show“RPT OFF”. Whenthe function is on the display shows “RPT”.


IMPORTANT When the repeat functionis turned on, the Scan and Mix functions areturned off.

Random playing (Mix function)

To start the random playing of tracks onthe Compact Disc, press the preset button 5(11). A new track will be played and forabout 2 seconds the display will show “CD-MIX-ON”. Press the preset button 5 (11)again to turn the function off: for about 2seconds the display will show “CD-MIX-OFF”.

When the Mix function is on, all the trackson the CD are played in random sequence.


IMPORTANT When the Mix function isturned on, the Scan and Repeat functionsare turned off.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

186

COMPACT DISC MP3PLAYER

INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes only the operationof the MP3 player. For the operation of Ra-dio, Compact Disc and CD Changer refer tothe chapter “Radio with Compact Disc play-er”.

NOTE: MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding tech-nology licensed from Fraunhofer IISand Thomson multimedia.

MP3 MODE

Besides playing normal audio CDs, the ra-dio can also play CD-ROM with MP3 com-pressed audio files. When a common au-dio CD is inserted, the radio works as de-scribed previously (“Radio with CompactDisc player”) .

To ensure optimal playing you are recom-mended to use good quality CDs a the low-est speed possible.

The structure of a CD MP3 is the follow-ing:

– there is a main folder with/withoutMP3 tracks;

– below this folder there are other folderswith/without “subfolders” and/or MP3tracks;

– inside the “subfolders” there may befurther “subfolders” and/or MP3 tracks;

Each CD MP3 folder is counted as illus-trated in the diagram (see example on thefollowing page).

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

187

Example:

5 Folder 2

8 Folder 3Track 1Track n

12 Folder nTrack 1Track n

6 “Subfolder” 2.1Track 1Track n

9 “Subfolder” 3.1

10 “Subfolder” 3.1.1

Key:

n = Number of folders/tracks

= Structure of folders

7 “Subfolder” 2.nTrack 1Track n


1 Main folderTrack 1Track n

2 Folder 1Track 1Track n

3 “Subfolder” 1.1Track 1Track n


GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

188

– the main folder is always assigned num-ber 1;

– the first folder is assigned number 2 andthen the following “subfolders” are assignednumber 3 and 4;

– the first folder is assigned number 5 andthen the following “subfolders” are assignednumber 6 and 7;

– this operation will be repeated for all theother folders.

To enter the MP3 folders press button 6(N) (selection of next folder) or 8 (O)(selection of previous folder).

Example: if you are in folder 1 (n° 2), thefollowing available folders are:

– pressing button 6 (N) you can enterthe main folder (n° 1);

– pressing button 6 (N) you can enter“subfolder” 4 (n° 3).

The folders which do not contain MP3tracks (like for example folder 2 (n° 5) and“subfolder” 3.1 (n° 9) cannot be selected.

Example: if you are in folder 3 (n° 8), the following available folders are:

– pressing button 8 (O) you can enter“subfolder” 2.X (n° 7);

– pressing button 8 (O) you can enter“subfolder” 3.1.1 (n° 10).

The characteristics and operating conditionsto play MP3 files are the following:

– the CD-ROM used must be written com-plying with Specification ISO9660;

– the music files must have extension“.mp3”: the files with different extensionwill no be played;

– the sampling frequencies that can beplayed are: 44.1 kHz, stereo (96 to 320kbit/s) - 22.05 kHz, mono or stereo (32to 80 kbit/s);

– it is possible to play tracks with variablebit-rate.

IMPORTANT The names of the tracksshall not contain the following characters:spaces, ‘ (apostrophes), ( and ) (open orbetween parenthesis). When writing a CDMP3 make sure the file names do not con-tain these characters; if they do, the radiocannot play the corresponding tracks.

Folder name shown on display

The name of the MP3 folder shown on thedisplay corresponds to the name with whichthe folder is memorised on the CD, followedby an asterisk.

Example of complete MP3 folder name:“BEST OF *”.

Track name shown on display

The name can be assigned to the MP3track in two ways:

– if the track selected is fitted with ID3-TAG, the MP3 track name is created in thefollowing way:

– the first part of the track name corre-sponds to the track memorised in the ID3-TAG, followed by an asterisk;

– the second part of the track name indi-cates the name of the artist memorised inthe ID3-TAG, followed by an asterisk.

– If the track selected is not fitted withID3-TAG, the track name (without “MP3”extension) corresponds to the file name withwhich the track is memorised on the CD(e.g. “TITLE1*”).

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

189

Selection of following/previousfolder

Press button 6 (N) to select a subsequentfolder or button 8 (O) to select a previousfolder. The name of the new folder selectedwill be shown on the display.

The folder selection occurs cyclically: af-ter the last folder, the first is selected andvice versa.

IMPORTANT It is possible to select on-ly the folders containing at least one track.

If no other folder/track is selected in thenext 2 seconds, the first track in the newfolder will be played.

If the last track in the current folder is be-ing played, the next folder selected will bethe one with at least one track.

Display information

When a CD MP3 is inserted, “MP3” isshown on the display together with the in-dications having the following meaning:

– “T05”: indicates the number of thetrack in the CD MP3;

– “BEST OF”: indicates the name assignedto the folder (if the corresponding menufunction is on);

– “XXXXX”: indicates the track name (ifthe corresponding menu function is on);

– “03:42”: indicates the time elapsedsince the track has started (if the corre-sponding menu function is on);

– “BEST 01”: indicates the name as-signed to the CD MP3 (if the correspond-ing menu function is on).

If the CD Name mode has been selectedand no CD name has been memorised, thedisplay will show the track time.


Briefly press button 4 (¯¯) to select theprevious track or press button 7 (˙˙) toselect the following track. The track selec-tion occurs cyclically: after the last track, thefirst is selected and vice versa.

If no other folder/track is selected in thenext 2 seconds, the following track will beplayed.

If the track has been playing for over 3 sec-onds, briefly pressing button 4 (¯¯) thetrack is played again from the start. In thiscase if wanting to play the previous track,press the button twice consecutively.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

190


Keep button 7 (˙˙) pressed to move thetrack selected forward at high speed andkeep button 4 (¯¯) pressed to move itquickly backward. Fast forward/backwardis interrupted once the button is released.

If the the folder data, CD name or trackname function has been chosen in themenu, this will be replaced by the CD timedisplay for about 2 seconds.

Scan function(scanning pieces on the CD MP3)

With this function it is possible to hear thestart of all the tracks contained on a CD.

Keep the 14 (SRC-SC) button presseduntil a sound is heard and the start of eachtrack on the CD is played for 10 seconds.When the track is playing the display will al-ternatively show, for 2 seconds, the CD func-tion chosen (CD time, name or number) andthe wording “SCAN”. If the Scan function ison, Repeat and Mix are turned off.


– from the track played up to the last onein the folder;

– change of folder and scanning of thetracks present from the beginning to the end(and so on for all the folders on the CD un-til the function is interrupted).


– pressing again button 14 (SRC-SC)to continue listening to the track that wasbeing played;

– pressing 6 (N) or (O) (in CD MP3mode, the previous/next folder will be cho-sen);

– pressing a preset button (from 1 to 6);

– turning the Mute function on;

– changing the sound source;

– pressing button 1 14 (SRC-SC), 9(MENU-PS) or 18 (AUD-LD);

– if the TA function is on and the stationselected is broadcasting a traffic bulletin.

The Scan function continues working un-til it is interrupted by the user.

Repeat function

Press button 12 (4-RPT) to listen re-peatedly to the last track played: for about2 seconds the display will show “REPEATTR”.

Press button 12 (4-RPT) again to listenrepeatedly to the MP3 tracks contained ina folder: for about 2 seconds the display willshow “REPEAT DIR”.

Press again button 12 (4-RPT) to turnoff the Repeat function: for about 2 secondsthe display will show “REPEAT OFF”.

After playing the track, for about 2 secondsthe display shows “REPEAT TRACK” or “RE-PEAT DIRECTORY”.


IMPORTANT When the Repeat functionis turned on, the Scan and Mix functions areturned off.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

191

Mix function (random playing)

To start the random playing of tracks con-tained in a folder on the CD MP3, press but-ton 11 (5-MIX). A new track will beplayed and for about 2 seconds the displaywill show “MIX DIRECTORY”.

Press button 11 (5-MIX) again to startrandom playing of all the folders containingMP3 tracks: for about 2 seconds the displaywill show “MIX ALL DIRECTORIES”. In thiscontext there will be first randomly repro-duced all the pieces contained in current fold-er, then the reproduction will shift to nextfolder, the pieces of which are reproducedunder a random order. This process is re-peated for all remaining disk folders.

Press button 11 (5-MIX) again to turnthe function off: for about 2 seconds the dis-play will show “MIX OFF”.

When the Mix function is turned on, all thetracks of the currently selected CD or of anyCD inside the CD Changer are played ran-domly.

After playing a track, for about 2 secondsthe display will show “MIX DIRECTORY” or“MIX ALL DIRECTORIES”.


IMPORTANT When the Mix function isturned on, Scan and Repeat are turned off.

Info MP3 function (folder data)

Briefly press button 10 (6-MP3 |) toview the current folder: for about 5 secondsthe display will show twice the name of thefolder currently selected. Then the displaywill show again the CD mode previously se-lected.

If button 10 (6-MP3 |) is pressedagain when the folder name is being dis-played, for about 5 seconds the display willshow twice the name of the MP3 track cur-rently played. Then the display will showagain the CD mode previously selected.

MENU

Functions of button 9 (MENU-PS)

To turn on the Menu function briefly pressbutton 9 (MENU-PS). The display willshow “MENU”.

To scroll the Menu functions use button6 (N) or 8 (O). To turn on/off the se-lected function use button 4 (¯¯) or7 (˙˙).

The display will show the current statusof the function selected.

The functions controlled by the menu arethe following:

– USER EQ SETTINGS (equalizer settings,only if the USER equalizer is on);

– PRESET/USER/CLASSIC/ROCK/JAZZ(turning on/off and choosing predefinedequalizer adjustments);

– REGIONAL MODE (regional pro-grammes);

– CD DISPLAY (CD display setting);

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

192

– MP3 DISPLAY (CD MP3 display setting);

– CDC DISPLAY (CD Changer display set-ting, if installed);

– SENSITIVITY (tuning sensitivity);

– SVC SETTING (automatic volume con-trol in relation to speed) (excluding versionswith HI-FI BOSE sound system);

– CD NAMING FUNCTION (allocation of CDnames, only with CD or CD Changer select-ed);

– PHONE setting (volume of phone, if in-stalled);

– HICUT FUNCTION (treble reduction);

– IGNITION TIME (turning off mode);

To exit the Menu function, press button 11(MENU-PRESET SCAN) again.

PRESET/USER/CLASSIC/ROCK/JAZZ function (turningthe equalizer on/off)

The integrated equalizer can be turned onor off. With the equalizer off, it is possibleto change the sound settings only adjust-ing the bass (“BASS”) and treble tones(“TREBLE”), while activating the functionmakes it possible to adjust the sound curves.

To turn the equalizer off, select “PRESET”with 6 (N) or 8 (O).

To turn the equalizer on, select one of thefollowing with 6 (N) or 8 (O):

– “USER” (adjustment of the 7 equaliz-er bands that can be changed by the user);

– “CLASSIC” (predefined equaliser ad-justment for optimal listening conditions ofclassic music);

– “ROCK” (predefined equaliser adjust-ment for optimal listening conditions of rockand pop music);

– “JAZZ” (predefined equaliser adjust-ment for optimal listening conditions of jazzmusic).

After selecting the last adjustment set inthe Menu using 6 (N) or 8 (O), use 4 (¯¯) or 7 (˙˙) to change it.

When one of the equalizer settings is on,the display shows “EQ”.

USER EQ SETTINGS function (equalizer settings only if theUSER setting has been selected)

To set a personal equalizer adjustment, use6 (N) or 8 (O) to selected the “USER EQSETTINGS” function.

To change the equalizer settings, use 4 (¯¯) or 7 (˙˙).

The display shows a graph with 7 bars,where each bar represents a frequency forthe left or right channel. Choose the bar tobe adjusted using 4 (¯¯) or 7 (˙˙); thebar chosen starts to flash and it is possibleto adjust it using 6 (N) or 8 (O).

To store the new settings, press button 9(MENU-PS) again. The display still shows“USER EQ SETTINGS”.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

193

REGIONAL MODE function (regional broadcast reception)

Some national broadcasters, at determi-nate times of the day, transmit regional pro-grammes which differ from region to region.This function makes it possible to tune in on-ly local stations (regional). However if aregional programme is heard and you wishto stay tuned to it, the function must be ac-tivated.

To turn the function on/off, use 4 (¯¯)or 7 (˙˙).


– “REGIONAL MODE: ON”: function on;

– “REGIONAL MODE: OFF”: function off.

If the function is off and a regional pro-gramme is tuned that works in a determi-nate area and the car enters a different area,the regional station of the new area is re-ceived.

IMPORTANT When the function is off(“REGIONAL MODE-OFF”) and the AF func-tion is on (alternative frequencies) the ra-dio automatically tunes to the frequency ofthe station selected with the strongest sig-nal.

CD DISPLAY function (compact Disc data display)

With this function it is possible to choosethe information shown by the display, whenlistening to a Compact Disc.

After selecting the “CD” function in the Me-ny with 6 (N) or 8 (O) the display shows“CD DISPLAY”. To change the setting usebuttons 4 (¯¯) or 7 (˙˙).

Two settings are available:

– “TIME” (time elapsed since the startof the track);

– “NAME” (CD name).

MP3 DISPLAY function(Compact Disc MP3 data display)

With this function it is possible to choosethe information shown by the display, whenlistening to Compact Disc containing MP3tracks.

The function can be turned on only if aCD MP3 is inserted: in this case the displayshows “MP3 DISPLAY”. To change the func-tion use 4 (¯¯) or 7 (˙˙).

Four settings are available:

– “DIR” (folder name);

– “TRACK” (track name);



CDC DISPLAY function(CD Changer data display) (ifinstalled)

It is possible to select this function only ifthere is CD Changer connected. In this casethe display shows “CDC DISPLAY”.

To change the function use button4 (¯¯) or 7 (˙˙).

Three settings are available:


– “CD NR” (CD number);


GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

194

SENSITIVITY function (tuner sensitivity adjustment)

With this function it is possible to changethe sensitivity of automatic station search-ing. When low sensitivity is set “SENSITIV-ITY LOCAL” only stations with excellent re-ception are sought, when high sensitivityis set “SENSITIVITY DISTANCE” all stationsare sought. Therefore, if the car is in an areawith a considerable number of stations andyou want to choose only those with a strongsignal, set the low sensitivity “SENSITIVI-TY LOCAL”.

To set the sensitivity, use 4 (¯¯) or 7(˙˙). The display will show the current sta-tus of the function:

– “SENSITIVITY: LOCAL”: low sensitivity;

– “SENSITIVITY: DISTANCE”: high sensi-tivity.

SVC SETTING function(volume changing with speed)(excluding versions with HI-FIBOSE sound system)

This function makes it possible to auto-matically adapt the volume level to thespeed of the car, increasing it as the speedincreases to maintain the ratio with the noiselevel inside the passenger compartment.

To turn the function on/off use 4 (¯¯)or 7 (˙˙). The display will show the cur-rent status of the function:

– “SVC SETTING: ON”: function on;

– “SVC SETTING: OFF”: function off.

CD NAMING function(allocating a name to a CD)

With the CD NAME function it is possibleto assign names (maximum 8 characters)up to 30 CD.

This function can be chosen only if a Com-pact Disc or CD Changer is on. To turn on,use 4 (¯¯) or 7 (˙˙): the display willshow “CD NAMING FUNCTION”. If the CDalready has a name, this will be shown onthe display, if not, eight dashes will beshown. If storage is no longer available fora new name, the display will show the firstname stored.

To change the name or give a name to thenew CD press 4 (¯¯) or 7 (˙˙). Pressthe buttons again to choose the position ofthe character to be changed. Press 6 (N)or 8 (O) to choose or change the charac-ter.

To store the name, press button 9(MENU-PS). The display will show “CDNAME”.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

195

To clear the name of the CD inserted, turnthe function on and press 16 (2-CLR) forabout 5 seconds. The system beeps and forabout 2 seconds the display shows “ONENAME DELETED”. At this point the procedurecan be started to give a new name.

To clear all the names, turn the functionon and keep button 16 (2-CLR) for over8 seconds. The set gives two beeps and thedisplay shows “ALL NAME DELETED” forabout 2 seconds. At this point, it is possi-ble to start the name allocation procedure.

PHONE function (phone volume adjustment)

With this function it is possible to adjust(setting from 1 to 66) or cut off (OFF set-ting) the telehpone sound.

To turn on/off, use 4 (¯¯) or 7 (˙˙).

To adjust the sound, use 19 (VOL–) or21 (VOL+).


– “PHONE FUNCTION”: function on;

– “PHONE VOLUME: 23”: function onwith volume setting 23;

– “OFF”: function off.

HICUT function (treble tone reduction)

Using this function it is possible to reducethe treble tones, in accordance with the sig-nal transmitted. To turn this function on/off,use 4 (¯¯) or 7 (˙˙).


– “HICUT FUNCTION: ON”: function on;

– “HICUT FUNCTION: OFF”: function off.

IGNITION TIME function (turning off mode)

With this function it is possible to set theradio turning off mode according to two dif-ferent procedures. To turn on/off, use4 (¯¯) or 7 (˙˙).

The display shows the mode chosen:

– “00 MIN”: turning off depends on theignition key. The radio turns off automati-cally as soon as the ignition key is turned toSTOP;

– “20 MIN”: the radio turns off regard-less of the ignition key position. The radiostays on after turning the ignition key toSTOP for a maximum of 20 minutes.

IMPORTANT If the radio turns off au-tomatically after turning the ignition key toSTOP (for immediate switching off or de-layed switching off after 20 minutes), theset will turn on automatically turning the ig-nition key to MAR. Instead, if the radio isturned off using button 20, when the igni-tion key is turned to MAR, the radio setwill stay off.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

196

Protection fuse

The radio has a 10A fuse located in therear part of the set. To replace the fuse, theradio needs to be pulled out: therefore con-tact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

fig. 160

A0A0128b

fig. 159

A0A0127b

TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Radio

Maximum power: 4 x 40W.

Aerial (fig. 158)

The aerial is located on the car roof. Youare recommended to slacken and removethe aerial from the roof to avoid damagingit when washing the car in automatic sys-tem.

fig. 158

A0A0641b

Speakers (fig. 159-160)

The sound system is formed of a systemcomprising:

– 4 tweeters (A) (2 front and 2 rear)with 30W power

– 4 speakers (B) with a diameter of 165mm (2 front and 2 rear) with 40W power.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

197

BOSE HI-FI SOUND SYSTEM (upon request forversions/markets whereapplicable)

The BOSE HI-FI system has been accuratelydesigned for Alfa GT, to offer out-standing sound quality and reproduce themusical realism of a live concert, for all theseats in the passenger compartment.

The system feature include outstandinglyfaithful reproduction of crystalline trebletones and full, rich basses which among oth-er things, make the Loudness function su-perfluous. In addition, the complete rangeof the sounds is reproduced in the whole pas-senger compartment enveloping the occu-pants with the natural spatial sensation thatis felt when listening to live music.

The components adopted are patented andare the result of the most sophisticated tech-nology, but at the same time they are easyand intuitive to use, so that even less expertpeople can use the system.

fig. 163

A0A0642b

fig. 161

A0A0336b

fig. 162

A0A0337b

TECHNICAL INFORMATION(fig. 161-162-163)

System comprises:

– four high efficiency woofers (A) with di-ameter165 mm, two at the front and two at theback, each having a coaxial tweeter inside;

– a bass box with a volume of 12 dm3

(B) housed on the left-hand side of theboot;

– a high power HI-FI amplifier (150W)with 6 channels, analogue equalising in am-plitude signal phase and with 130 mm di-ameter sub-woofer.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

198

FUEL CAP

The fuel cap (C-fig. 164) is electricallycontrolled. To open it, press button (D-fig. 165); the flap can be opened onlywhen the engine is off.

The fuel cap (A-fig. 164), accessible af-ter opening the lid (C), is fitted with a catchto prevent losing it (B) which fastens it to thelid.

When refuelling, hook the cap to the de-vice on the inner flap, as illustrated.

REFUELLING

PETROL ENGINES

Use only unleaded petrol.

To prevent accidentally filling with leadedpetrol, the diameter of the fuel tank filleris of such a size as not to accept the noz-zle of this type of petrol.

The unleaded petrol octane number(R.O.N.) used shall not be less than 95.

IMPORTANT An inefficient catalystleads to harmful emission at the exhaust,thus environment pollution.

IMPORTANT Never put leaded petrol,even in small quantity, in the tank, even ifit is an emergency. This would irreversiblydamage the exhaust gas catalyst.

JTD ENGINES

At low temperatures the degree of fluidi-ty of fuel oil may become insufficient due tothe formation of paraffins leading to mal-functioning of the fuel system.

Therefore, to avoid inconveniences, sum-mer and winter fuel oils are normally dis-tributed depending on the season.

In the event the car is filled with fuel oilunsuitable for the using temperature, mixit with DIESEL MIX additive in the propor-tions stated on the can, firstly putting theantifreeze in the tank and then the fuel oil.

The vehicle must only befilled with fuel oil for mo-tor vehicles, in compliance

with European SpecificationEN590. The use of other productsor mixtures may irreparably dam-age the engine with invalidation ofthe warranty due to the damagecaused. In the event of accidental-ly filling with another type of fuel,do not start the engine and emptythe tank. If the engine has been runeven for only a very short time, inaddition to the tank, it is also nec-essary to empty the whole supplycircuit.

fig. 164

A0A0644b

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

199

ENVIRONMENTALPROTECTION

The devices used to reduce petrol engineemissions are:

– trivalent catalytic converter (catalytic si-lencer);

– Lambda sensors;

– anti-evaporation system.

If one or more spark plugs are discon-nected, do not run the engine, even for atest.

The devices used to reduce diesel fuel en-gine emissions are:

– oxidising catalyst;

– exhaust gas re-circulation system (E. G. R.).

Do not go near the fuelfiller with naked flames orlit cigarettes: danger of

fire. Avoid going too near the fuelfiller with your face, to avoid in-haling harmful vapours.

In the case of need, onlyreplace the fuel cap withanother genuine one, or the

efficiency of the fuel vapour re-covery system could be adverselyaffected.

Should it be not possible to open the fuelflap electrically, use the special cable in theboot (A-fig. 166) to open it manually.

Due to the high tempera-tures reached during oper-ation of the catalytic si-

lencer the vehicle should not beparked over inflammable materials(grass, dry leaves, pine needles,etc.).

fig. 165

A0A0643b

fig. 166

A0A0652b

IMPORTANT The sealing of the tankmay cause light pressurising. A little breath-ing off, while slackening the cap is ab-solutely normal.

After refuelling, turn the cap clockwise andclose the flap.

IMPORTANT For your safety, beforestarting the engine, also make sure that thefuel nozzle is correctly inserted in the fueldistributor.

CO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE

CAR

200

STARTING PROCEDUREFOR PETROL VERSIONS

IMPORTANT It is important never topress the accelerator before the enginehas started.

1) Make sure the handbrake is engaged.

2) Move the gear lever to neutral.

3) Fully depress the clutch pedal, so thatthe starter motor is not forced to crank thegears.

4) Ensure that the electric systems anddevices, especially if they absorb highquantities of energy (e.g. heatedrearscreen), are switched off.

5) Turn the ignition key to the AVVposition and release it as soon as theengine starts.

6) If the engine does not start, returnthe key to STOP,then repeat the proce-dure.

IMPORTANT If it is difficult to startthe engine do not insist with extendedattempts which may damage the catalyst,but contact Alfa Romeo AuthorisedServices.

The ignition switch is fitted with a safetydevice which obliges the driver to returnthe key to the STOP position beforerepeating the starting operation if theengine does not start immediately.

Similarly, when the engine is running,the device prevents the key being movedfrom the MAR to the AVV position.

STARTING THE ENGINE

IMPORTANT The car is fitted with anelectronic engine lock device. If the enginefails to start, see the “Alfa Romeo CODEsystem”.

CCOORRRREECCTT UUSSEE OOFF TTHHEE CCAARR

We recommend that dur-ing the initial period youdo not drive to full vehicle

performance (for example exces-sive acceleration, long journeysat top speed, hard braking etc.).

Running the engine inconfined areas isextremely dangerous. The

engine consumes oxygen andproduces carbon monoxide whichis a highly toxic and lethal gas.

When the engine isswitched off never leavethe ignition key in the

MAR position to prevent point-less current absorption fromdraining the battery.

CO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE

CAR

201

STARTING PROCEDUREFOR JTD VERSIONS

1) Make sure the handbrake isengaged.

2) Set the gearshift lever to neutral.

3) Turn the ignition key to MAR.Thereconfigurable multifunction display willshow the m warning light.

4) Wait for the m to turn off, whichtakes place sooner, the warmer theengine. With the engine very warm thelight might stay on for such a short timeas to pass unnoticed.

5) Fully depress the clutch pedal.

6) Turn the ignition key to AVV assoon as the m warning light has goneout. Waiting too long, makes the warmingwork of the glow plugs useless .

IMPORTANT The electric devicesthat absorb a high amount of energy (cli-mate control, rearscreen heating, etc.) arecut off automatically during starting.

If the engine does not start at the firstattempt, move the ignition key to STOPbefore repeating starting.

If starting is difficult (with the AlfaRomeo CODE system working properly),do not insist with prolonged attempts.

Only use an auxiliary battery if the causeis due to low battery charge. Never use abattery charger to start the engine.

WARMING THE ENGINE

– Drive off slowly, at medium revs with-out accelerating abruptly.

– Do not drive at full performance forthe initial kilometres of the journey. Waituntil the engine coolant temperaturereaches 50-60 °C.

Never push, tow orcoast start the vehicle.This could cause fuel to

flow into the catalyst damagingit irreversibly.

Remember that theengine brake and powersteering are not opera-

tional until the engine is started,therefore, much greater effortthan usual is needed on the brakepedal and steering wheel.

CO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE

CAR

202

For cars with tur-bocharger in particular,but for all cars in general,

sharp accelerating should beavoided before switching theengine off.A “kick” on the accelerator

serves no purpose, consumes fuelpointlessly and may cause seri-ous damage to the turbochargerimpeller bearings.

EMERGENCY STARTING

If the Alfa Romeo CODE system does notrecognise the code transmitted by the igni-tion key (warning light Y on the instru-ment cluster glowing on steadily) emer-gency starting may be carried out usingthe code of the CODE card.

For the correct procedure see the chapter“In an emergency”.

IMPORTANT If the engine turns offwith the vehicle on the move, the nexttime it is started, the Alfa Romeo CODEwarning light may turn on(Y). In thiscase, check that switching off and startingthe engine again with the vehicle station-ary, the warning light stays off. If not, con-tact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

ENGINE SWITCHING OFF

– Release the accelerator pedal and waituntil the engine reaches idle speed.

– Turn the ignition key to the STOPposition and switch off the engine.

IMPORTANT After a tiring journey it isadvisable to let the engine “get its breathback” allowing it to idle a while to lowerthe temperature in the engine compart-ment.

Never leave childrenunattended in the vehicle.Always remove the igni-

tion key when leaving the vehicleand take it with you.

To avoid useless con-sumption of power andpossible draining of the

battery, never leave the ignitionkey in the MAR position whenthe engine is not running.

CO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE

CAR

203

PARKING

When the vehicle is parked, proceed asfollows:

– Switch off the engine.

– Engage the handbrake.

– Engage first gear if the vehicle is faceduphill or reverse if the vehicle is facingdownhill.

– Turn the front wheels so that the vehi-cle will immediately come to a halt if thehandbrake slips.

REDUCING RUNNINGCOSTS AND ENVIRONMENTPOLLUTION

By following a few simple guidelines, itis possible to save vehicle running costsand reduce harmful emissions.

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

Vehicle maintenance

To take care of the car maintenancehave the checks and adjustments carriedout in accordance with the “ScheduledMaintenance Programme”.

Tyres

Check the pressure of the tyres routinelyat an interval of no more than 4 weeks: ifthe pressure is too low consumption levelsincrease as resistance to rolling is higher.

Useless loads

Never travel with an overload in theboot. The weight of the vehicle (especial-ly in urban traffic), and its geometry heav-ily affect consumption levels and stability.

Electric services

Use electric devices only for the amountof time needed. Rearscreen heating, addi-tional headlights, windscreen wipers andheater fan need a considerable amount ofenergy, therefore increasing the require-ment of current increases fuel consump-tion (up to +25% in the urban cycle).

Climate control system

The climate control system is a furtherload bearing heavily on the engine induc-ing higher consumption levels(up to+20% on average). Outside temperaturepermitting, preferably use the air vents.

Aerodynamic items

The use of non-certified aerodynamicitems may adversely affect air drag andconsumption levels.

CO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE

CAR

204

CONDITIONS OF USE

Cold starting

Short journeys and frequent cold startsdo not allow the engine to reach optimumoperating temperature. This results in asignificant increase in consumption levels(from +15 to +30% on the urban cycle)and emission of harmful substances.

Traffic situations and roadconditions

Rather high consumption levels are tiedto situations with heavy traffic, for exam-ple in queues with frequent use of thelower gears or in cities with many trafficlights. Also winding mounting roads andrough road surfaces adversely affect con-sumption.

Stopping in the traffic

During prolonged stops (e.g. level cross-ings) it is advisable to switch the engineoff.

DRIVING STYLE

Starting

Do not warm the engine with the car ata standstill or at idle or high speed: underthese conditions the engine warms upmuch more slowly, increasing electricalconsumption and emissions. It is thereforeadvisable to move off immediately, slow-ly, avoiding high speeds. This way theengine will warm faster.

Pointless manoeuvres

Avoid accelerating when waiting at traf-fic lights or before switching off theengine. This and also double declutching isabsolutely pointless on modern cars andalso increase consumption and pollution.

Gearshifting

As soon as the conditions of the trafficand road allow, use a higher gear.

Using a low gear to obtain brilliant per-formance increases consumption.

In the same way improper use of a highgear increases consumption, emissionsand engine wear.

Top speed

Fuel consumption considerably increaseswith speed. Maintain an even as possiblespeed, avoiding superfluous braking andaccelerating, which cost in terms of bothfuel and emissions.

Acceleration

Accelerating heavily taking the engine toa high speed has a considerably adverseeffect on consumption and emission lev-els; it is wise to accelerate gradually andnot exceed the maximum torque.

CO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE

CAR

205

TOWING TRAILERS

IMPORTANTS

For towing caravans or trailers the vehiclemust be fitted with a certified tow hookand an adequate electric system.Installation should be carried out by spe-cialised personnel who release a specialdocument for circulation on the road.

Install any specific and/or additionalrearview mirrors as specified by law.Remember that when towing a trailer,steep hills are harder to climb, the brakingspaces increase and overtaking takeslonger depending on the overall weight.

Engage a lower gear when driving down-hill, rather than constantly using thebrake.

The weight the trailer exerts on the vehi-cle tow hook reduces by the same amountthe actual vehicle loading capacity.

To make sure the maximum towableweight is not exceeded (given in the logbook) account should be taken of the fullyladen trailer, including accessories and per-sonal belongings.

Drive within the specific speed limit inevery country for vehicle trailers. In anycase the maximum speed should neverexceed 100 km/h.

INSTALLING THE TOW HOOK

The towing device should be fastened tothe body by specialised personnel accord-ing to the following instructions and anyadditional and/or integrative informationsupplied by the Manufacturer of the deviceitself.

The towing device must meet currentregulations with reference to Directive94/20/CEE and subsequent amend-ments.

For any version the towing device usedmust match the towable weight of thevehicle on which it is to be installed.

For the electric connection a unified con-nector should be used which is generallyplaced on a special bracket normally fas-tened to the towing device itself.

The ABS system withwhich the car may be fit-ted does not control the

trailer braking system. Particularcare is therefore necessary onslippery surfaces.

Under no circumstancesshould the vehicle brakesystem be altered to con-

trol the trailer brake. The trailerbraking system must be fullyindependent of the vehicle’shydraulic system.

CO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE

CAR

206

For the electrical connection a 7 or 13pole 12VDC connection must be used(CUNA/UNI and ISO/DIN standards) fol-lowing any reference instructions given bythe vehicle Manufacturer and/or towingdevice Manufacturer.

Any electric brake should be supplieddirectly by the battery through a cablewith a cross-section of no less than 2.5mm2. In addition to the electrical branch-es, the vehicle electric system can only beconnected to the supply cable for an elec-tric brake and to the cable for an internallight, though not above 15W.

INSTALLATION LAYOUT (fig. 1)

The tow hook structure must be fas-tened in the points shown by thesymbol Ø using 4 M8 screws and 7M10 screws.

The inner plate (2) should have aminimum thickness of 6 mm.



The fastening points (1) should befitted with 25 mm x 6 mm spacers.

After assembly, the fas-tening screw bores shallbe sealed to prevent pos-

sible exhaust gas infiltrations.

IMPORTANT It is compulsory to fas-ten a label (plainly visible) of suitable sizeand material with the following wording:

MAX LOAD ON BALL 60 kg.

CO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE

CAR

207fig. 1

A0A0680b

Existing holes

Existing holes

N°2 M10N°3 M10

N°4 M8

Regulation ball

N°2 M10

SEZ. A-A

Fully

lade

n

Existing holes

CO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE

CAR

208

It is necessary therefore to limit their useto the purposes for which they are certified.

IMPORTANT When winter tyres areused with a maximum speed index belowthe one that can be reached by the vehicle(increased by 5%), place a notice in thepassenger’s compartment, plainly in the dri-ver’s view, which states the maximum per-missible speed of the winter tyres (as perCE Directive).

Fit the same type of tyre on all fourwheels (brand and profile) to ensure high-er driving safety when braking and goodhandling.

Remember that it is inappropriate tochange the direction of rotation of tyres.

WINTER TYRES

These tyres are specially designed for dri-ving on snow and ice, to be fitted inreplacement of those fitted on the car.

Use winter tyres of the same size as nor-mal tyres provided on the car.

Alfa Romeo Authorised Services will bepleased to advise you on the choice of thetyre most suited to the use the Customerintends to make of it.

For the type of tyre to be used, inflationpressures and specifications of wintertyres, follow the instructions given in the“Technical Specifications” chapter.

The winter features of these tyres arereduced considerably when the treaddepth is below 4 mm. In this case, theyshould be replaced.

Due to the winter features, under normalconditions of use or long motorway jour-neys, the performance of these tyres islower than that of normal tyres.

SNOW CHAINS

Use of snow chains should be in compli-ance with local regulations.

For versions 1.8 T. SPARK, 2.0JTS and 1.9 JTD, tyre 195/60 R15 canbe fitted with snow chains (use snow chainswith reduced size with max. protrusion be-yond the tyre profile of 12 mm), whereastyres 205/60 R15 - 205/55 R16 -205/55 ZR16 - 215/45 R17 - 215/45ZR17 - 225/40 ZR18 cannot be fitted withsnow chains.

On version 3.2 V6, tyres 215/45R17” and 215/45 ZR 17” can only be fit-ted with chains of the spiker spider typewhereas tyres 225/45 ZR17 - 225/40ZR18 cannot be fitted with snow chains.

Snow chains SPIKES SPIDER COMPACT(model 17003 compact) with 9 spikes with16 mm adjustable length and 17 inch wheelcap adapter are available at LineaccessoriAlfa Romeo.

Snow chains should only be applied tothe drive wheels (front).

Before purchasing or using snow chains,you are recommended to contact AlfaRomeo Authorised Services.

Check the tensions of the chain after thefirst few metres have been driven.

CO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE

CAR

209

Keep your speeddown when snowchains are fitted.

Do not exceed 50 km/h. Avoidpotholes, steps and pavements toprevent damaging the tyres, sus-pension and steering. Rememberthat with snow chains fitted thebrake distance will increase.

VEHICLE INACTIVITY

If the vehicle is to be left inactive forlong periods, the following precautionsshould be noted:

– House the vehicle under cover in a dryand possibly ventilated place.

– Engage a gear.

– Check that the handbrake is notengaged.

– Clean and protect the paintwork byprotective wax.

– Cover the rubber windscreen andrearscreen wiper blades with talcum pow-der and raise them off the glass.

– Open the windows slightly.

– Inflate the tyres to a pressure of 0.5bars above normal. If possible rest thetyres on wooden planks and periodicallycheck the pressure.

– Do not turn on the electronic alarmsystem.

– Disconnect the battery negative termi-nal (–) from the battery and check thebattery charge. This check should berepeated once a month during stowage.Charge the battery if the loadless voltageis below 12,5V.

– Do not empty the engine cooling sys-tem.

– Cover the vehicle with a fabric or per-forated plastic cover. Do not use compactplastic covers which prevent the humidityon the surface of the vehicle from evapo-rating.

Snow chains cannot befitted to the compactspare wheel. So, if a front

(drive) wheel is punctured andchains are needed, a rear wheelshould be fitted to the front ofthe vehicle (inflate the tyres tothe specified pressure as soon aspossible) and the spare wheelshould be fitted to the rear. Thisway, with two normal drivewheels, snow chains can be fittedto them to solve an emergency.

With snow chains fittedit is advisable to turn offthe ASR system. Press

the ASR-OFF button, led on but-ton on.

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

210

3) Fully depress the accelerator pedaland keep it pressed. The U warning lightwill come on for eight seconds and thengo off, now release the accelerator pedal.

4) The U warning light begins to flash:after it has flashed the same number oftimes as the first digit on the CODE card,press the accelerator pedal and keep itpressed until the U warning light turnson (for four seconds) and then goes off;now release the accelerator pedal.

5) The U warning light starts to flash:after the number of flashes correspondingto the second digit on the CODE card,press the accelerator pedal and keep itpressed.

6) Repeat this procedure for the remain-ing digits on the CODE card.

7) After entering the last figure, keepthe accelerator pedal pressed. The Uwarning light turns on (for four seconds)and then goes off; now release the accel-erator pedal.

8) A quick flash of the U warning light(for about four seconds) confirms that theoperation has been carried out correctly.

9) Start the engine turning the ignitionkey from MAR to AVV without return-ing the key to the STOP position.

Conversely, if the U warning light stayson, turn the key to STOP and repeat theprocedure starting from point 1).

IMPORTANT After emergency startingit is advisable to contact Alfa RomeoAuthorised Services, because the emer-gency procedure must be repeated eachtime the engine is started.

EMERGENCYSTARTING

If it is not possible to deactivate theengine inhibitor with the Alfa RomeoCODE system, the Y andU warninglights stay on and the engine will notstart. Emergency starting is needed tostart the engine.

IMPORTANT You are advised to care-fully read the entire procedure before car-rying it out.

If a mistake is made during the emer-gency procedure, the ignition key shouldbe turned to STOP and the operationsmust be repeated from the start (point 1).

1) Read the 5-figure electronic code onthe CODE card.

2) Turn the ignition key to MAR.

IINN AANN EEMMEERRGGEENNCCYY

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

211

STARTING WITH AN AUXILIARY BATTERY

If the battery is flat (for battery withoptical hydrometer: dark colour withoutgreen area in the centre), it is possible tostart the engine using an auxiliary batterywith the same capacity or a little higherthan the flat one.

Proceed as follows (fig. 1):

1) Remove the protective cover on thepositive battery post pressing on the open-ing catches (front), then connect the pos-itive terminals (+ sign next to the termi-nal) of the two batteries using a specialcable.

2) Connect the end of the second jumplead to the negative terminal (–) of theauxiliary battery with an earth point E onthe engine or gearbox of the vehicle to bestarted.

IMPORTANT Do not directly connectthe negative terminals of the two batter-ies: any sparks may ignite the detonatinggas which could come out of the battery.If the auxiliary battery is installed onanother car, avoid metal parts touchingaccidentally between this car and the onewith the flat battery.

3) Start the engine.

4) When the engine has started, removethe cables, reversing the sequence fol-lowed for connection.

If after a few attempts the engine doesnot start, do not insist but contact the near-est Alfa Romeo Authorised Service.

fig. 1

A0A0149b

This starting proceduremust be carried out byqualified personnel

because incorrect operations maycause electrical discharge of con-siderable intensity. The liquidcontained in the battery is poiso-nous and corrosive. Avoid contactwith the skin and the eyes. Keepnaked flames and lighted ciga-rettes away from the battery anddo not cause sparks.

Never use a batterycharger to start theengine as this could dam-

age the electronic systems of yourvehicle, particularly the ignitionand fuel supply control units.

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

212

STARTING BY INERTIA

If the car is equipped with “Kit for tyrerepair Fix&Go“, see the instructions con-tained in the following chapter.

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

As an alternative to FIX & GO, the com-pact spare wheel or a wheel with the nor-mal size can be supplied upon request;wheel changing and correct use of thejack and compact spare wheel call forsome precautions as listed below.

IN THE EVENT OF A PUNCTURE

Never push, tow orcoast start the vehicle.This could cause fuel to

flow into the catalyst damagingit irreversibly.

Remember that theengine brake and powersteering are not opera-

tional until the engine is started,therefore, much greater effortthan usual is needed on the brakepedal and steering wheel.

Signal the presence ofthe stationary vehicleaccording to current regu-

lations: hazard warning lights,reflecting triangle etc..Any passengers should leave

the car and wait for the wheel tobe changed out of harm of thetraffic.If parked on a slope or rough

surface, chock the wheels withwedges or other suitable devicesto prevent the car from rolling.

Never start the enginewith the car jacked.When driving with a

trailer, disconnect the trailerbefore raising the car.The compact spare wheel is spe-

cific to your car, do not use it onother models, or use the sparewheel of other models on yourvehicle.Should the type of wheels used

be changed (alloy rims instead ofsteel), it is also necessary tochange the whole set of fasteningbolts with others of suitable size.The compact spare wheel is nar-

rower than normal wheels, itshould be used only for the dis-tance necessary to reach a servicepoint to have the punctured tyrerepaired and, during its use, thecar speed must not exceed 80km/h.

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

213

The spare wheel has asticker that summarisesthe main cautions for use

and limitations. The stickershould never be removed or cov-ered. The sticker contains the fol-lowing in four languages:CAUTION! FOR TEMPORARY

USE ONLY! MAX 80 km/h!REPLACE BY NORMAL WHEEL ASSOON AS POSSIBLE. DO NOTCOVER THIS LABEL IN USE.Never fit a wheel cap on a com-

pact spare wheel.The vehicle will handle differ-

ently with the spare wheel fitted:avoid heavy braking and acceler-ating, sharp corners and fastbends.

The life of the sparewheel is approx. 3000km, after this distance it

should be replaced with anotherof the same type.Never attempt to fit a conven-

tional tyre on a rim designed foruse as a compact spare wheel.Have the punctured wheelrepaired and refitted as soon aspossible.Two or more compact spare

wheels should never be usedtogether. Do not grease the threads of

bolts before installing them; theymight slip out.The jack only serves for chang-

ing wheels on the car with whichit is provided or on cars of thesame model. It must not be usedfor other purposes such as forinstance raising cars of othermodels. In no case should it beused for repairs under the vehi-cle.Incorrect positioning of the jack

may cause the jacked vehicle tofall.Do not use the jack for higher

capacities than stated on itslabel.

Snow chains cannot befitted on the compactspare wheel, so, if a front

wheel is punctured and chainsneed to be used, the front axleshould be fitted with normalwheels and the compact sparewheel fitted to the rear. Thisway, with two normal wheels atthe front, snow chains can be fit-ted thereby solving the emer-gency situation.Never tamper with the inflation

valve.Do not insert tools of any kind

between the rim and the tyre.Check, and if necessary, restore

the pressure of the tyres and ofthe compact spare wheel to thevalues given in the “TechnicalSpecifications” chapter.

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

214

CHANGING A WHEEL

Please be informed that:

– the jack mass is 2,100 kg.

– the jack requires no adjustment.

– the jack cannot be repaired. In theevent of breakage, it must be replaced byanother original one.

– no tools other than its operating crankcan be fitted to the jack.

To change a wheel, proceed as follows:

– Stop the car in such a position that itis not dangerous for the traffic, where it ispossible to change the wheel safely.Where possible, park on a level, compactsurface.

– Switch off the engine and engage thehandbrake.

– Engage first gear or reverse.

– Use handle(A-fig.2) to remove thestiff covering (B).

– Loosen the clamping device (A-fig. 3).

– Take out the tool container (B) andtake it near the wheel to be changed.

– Take the spare wheel (C).

– Remove the wheel cap (A-fig. 4)(only versions with steel rims)

fig. 2

A0A0645b

fig. 3

A0A0151b

fig. 4

A0A0154b

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

215

– Using the wrench provided (A-fig. 5), loosen the fastening bolts byabout one turn.

– Set the jack under the car, near thewheel to be changed taking care not todamage the plastic streamlined guard.

– Work the jack crank (A-fig. 6), toextend it until the groove (B) on theupper part of jack is correctly inserted onthe lower profile of the body (C) approx.40 cm from the profile of the wheelhouse.

– Work the jack and raise the car untilthe wheel is a few centimetres from theground.

– Completely unscrew the fasteningbolts and remove the wheel.

– Make sure that the contact surfaces ofthe spare wheel with the hub are cleanand free of impurities which may latercause the fastening bolts to slacken.

– Install the spare wheel matching thehole (A-fig. 7) with the correspondingpin (B).

– Using the wrench provided, fasten thefive bolts.

– Lower the car and remove the jack.

– Using the wrench provided, fully tightenthe bolts in the sequence shown in fig. 8.

REFITTING A NORMAL WHEEL

– Following the procedure describedpreviously, raise the car and remove thespare wheel.

For versions with steel rims:

– Fit the normal wheel matching thehole (A-fig. 7) with the correspondingpin (B).

– Make sure that the contact surfaces ofthe wheel with the hub are clean and freeof impurities which may later cause thefastening bolts to slacken.

fig. 5

A0A0694b

fig. 6

A0A0695b

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

216

– Using the wrench provided, tightenthe fastening bolts.


– Using the wrench provided, fully tight-en the bolts in the sequence shown previ-ously for the compact spare wheel fig. 8.

– Place the cap near the wheel so thatthe inflation valve can come through theslot provided on the cap.

– Press the circumference of the cap,starting from the parts nearest to the infla-tion valve until it is inserted completely.

IMPORTANT Incorrect fitting maycause the wheel cap to come off when thecar is travelling.

For versions with alloy rims:

– Tighten the pin (A-fig. 9) in one ofthe fastening bolt holes on the wheel hub.

– Insert the wheel on the pin and, usingthe wrench provided, tighten the four boltsavailable. This is facilitated by the exten-sion provided (B).

– Remove the pin (A-fig. 9) and tight-en the last fastening bolt.


– Using the wrench provided, tightenthe bolts in the sequence shown previous-ly for the compact spare wheel fig. 8.

After refitting a wheel:

– stow the spare wheel in the space pro-vided in the boot

– insert the jack in its container forcingit lightly to prevent it from vibrating whentravelling

– place the tools used in the housings inthe container

– stow the container complete with toolson the spare wheel and secure everythingwith the clamping device (A-fig. 3)

– correctly re-position the stiff cover.

fig. 7

A0A0155b

fig. 8

A0A0156b

fig. 9

A0A0693b

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

217

QUICK TYRE REPAIRKIT FIX&GO automatic

The car is provided with the quick tyre re-pair kit “FIX&GO automatic”, instead of thetraditional tool kit and space-saver sparewheel.

The kit fig. 10, is placed in the boot. Inthis container are also housed the screw-driver and the tow hitch.

The quick tyre repair kit includes:

– a bottle A-fig. 10 containing the seal-er, fitted with:

– filling pipe B

– sticker C bearing the notice “max. 80km/h”, to be placed in a position visibleto the driver (on the instrument panel) af-ter fixing the tyre;

– compressor D with pressure gauge andfittings;

– instruction brochure fig. 11, to be usedfor prompt and proper use of the quick re-pair kit and to be then handed to the per-sonnel charged with handling the tyre treat-ed with the tyre repair kit;

– a pair of protection gloves located in theside space of the compressor;

– adapters for inflating different elements.

fig. 10

A0A1095b

fig. 11

A0A1096b

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

218

Hand the instructionbrochure to the personnelcharged with treating the

tyre repaired with the kit.

In the event of a puncturecaused by foreign bodies,it is possible to repair tyres

showing damages on the track orshoulder up to max 4 mm diame-ter.

IT SHOULD BE NOTICED THAT:

The sealing fluid of the quick tyre repair kitis effective with external temperatures be-tween –20°C and +50°C. The sealing flu-id has limited life.

Holes and damages onthe tyre side walls cannotbe repaired. Do not use the

quick tyre repair kit if damagingis due to running with flat tyre.

Repairs are not possiblein case of damages on thewheel rim (bad groove dis-

tortion causing air loss). Do not re-move foreign bodies (screws ornails) from the tyre.

The cylinder contains eth-ylene glycol. The cylindercontains latex: it can cause

allergic reactions. It is harmful if in-gested or inhaled and irritant forthe eyes and in case of contact. Incase of contact rinse immediatelywith water and take off contami-nated clothes. If swallowed, do notinduce vomit, rinse out the mouth,drink a lot of water and call thedoctor immediately. Keep awayfrom children. This product mustnot be used by asthmatics. Do notinhale vapours. Call the doctor im-mediately in case of allergic reac-tions. Keep the cylinder in thespace provided for the purpose andfar from heat. The sealing fluid haslimited life.

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

219

The compressor shall notbe operated for more than20 minutes. Risk of over-

heating!. Tyres repaired with thequick tyre repair kit shall be usedtemporarily only.

Replace the cylinder ifsealer has run out. Do notthrow away the cylinder

and the sealing fluid. Have thesealing fluid and the cylinder dis-posed of in compliance with na-tional and local regulations.

INFLATING PROCEDURE

Put on the protectiongloves provided togetherwith quick tyre repair kit.

Proceed as follows:

– set the wheel to be repaired with valveA-fig. 13 in the position shown in the fig-ure, then pull up the handbrake, takethe quick tyre repair kit and put it on theground near the wheel to be repaired;

– loosen tyre inflation valve cap, take outthe filler hose A-fig.1 4 and screw the ringnut B-fig. 15 on the tyre valve;

fig. 13

A0A1097b

fig. 14

A0A1098b

fig. 15

A0A1099b

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

220

– make sure the compressor switch A-fig. 16 is set to 0 (off), start the engineand fit plug A-fig. 17 into the outlet/cig-ar lighter on the front console and then turnon the compressor by setting switch A-fig.16 to I (on);

– inflate the tyre to the proper pressurevalue. Check tyre pressure on gauge B-fig.16 with compressor off to obtain precisereading;

– if after 5 minutes it is still impossibleto reach at least 1.5 bar, disengage com-pressor from valve and current outlet, thenmove the car forth for approx. 10 metres inorder to distribute the sealing fluid inside thetyre evenly, then repeat the inflation oper-ation;

– if after this operation it is still impossi-ble after 5 minutes to reach at least 1.8 bar,do start driving since the tyre is excessive-ly damaged and the quick tyre repair kit can-not guarantee suitable sealing, contact Al-fa Romeo Authorized Services;

– after reaching the proper tyre pressure,start driving immediately;

Apply the sticker in a vis-ible position for the driverto indicate that the tyre

has been treated with the quicktyre repair kit. Drive carefully es-pecially when cornering and do notexceed 80 km/h. Avoid heavybraking and accelerating.

fig. 16

A0A1100b

fig. 17

A0A0647b

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

221

– after driving for about 10 minutes stopand check again the tyre pressure; pull upthe handbrake;

If pressure falls below1.8 bar, stop the car sincethe tyre is excessively

damaged and the quick tyre repairkit Fix & Go automatic cannotguarantee suitable sealing, contactAlfa Romeo Authorized Services.

– if at least 1.8 bar pressure is read, re-store proper pressure (with engine runningand handbrake on) and restart;

– drive with the utmost care to the near-est Alfa Romeo Authorized Service.

You shall absolutely com-municate that the tyre hasbeen repaired with the

quick tyre repair kit. Hand the in-struction brochure to the personnelcharged with treating the tyre re-paired with the kit.

CHECKING AND RESTORINGPRESSURE ONLY

The compressor can be also used just forrestoring pressure. Disconnect the quick con-nection A-fig. 18 and connect it directlyto the tyre valve fig. 19; in this way thecylinder is not connected to compressor andthe sealing fluid will not flow into the tyre.

fig. 18

A0A1101b

fig. 19

A0A1102b

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

222

CYLINDER REPLACEMENTPROCEDURE

To replace the cylinder proceed as follows:

– disconnect connection A-fig. 20 andhose B;

– turn counter-clockwise the cylinder to re-place and raise it;

– fit the new cylinder and turn it clockwise;

– refit connection A or connect hose B in-to its seat.

Inform other people dri-ving the car that the tyrehas been repaired using the

quick tyre kit. Hand the sticker tothe personnel that will carry outrestoring operations.

fig. 20

A0A01103b

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

223

Halogen bulbs must behandled touching only themetallic part. If the trans-

parent bulb is touched with thefingers, its lighting intensity isreduced and the life of the bulbmay be compromised. If touchedaccidentally, rub the bulb with acloth moistened with methylatedspirit and allow to dry.

Halogen bulbs containpressurised gas, in thecase of breakage they

may burst.

WHEN NEEDING TOCHANGE A BULB

Alterations or repairs tothe electric system notcarried out correctly and

without taking account of thesystem specifications may causefailures and the risk of fire.

Where possible, it isadvisable to have bulbschanged c/o Alfa Romeo

Authorised Services. The correctoperation and aiming of the outerlights are vital to the safety ofthe vehicle and its passengersand the subject of specific laws.

Due to high voltage, thebulb of (Xenon) gas-dis-charge headlights must on-

ly be replaced by experts: dangerof death! Contact Alfa Romeo Au-thorized Services.

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

224

D.-E. Halogen bulbsTo remove, free it from the clip onits housing.

F. Xenon lights To remove the bulb, slacken the fas-tening ring nut and release theretaining ring.

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

– When a light is not working, checkthat the corresponding fuse is intactbefore changing a bulb.

– For the location of fuses, refer to theparagraph “In the event of a burnt fuse”in this chapter.

– Before changing a bulb check the con-tacts for oxidation.

– Burnt bulbs must be replaced by oth-ers of the same type and power.

– Always check headlight aiming afterchanging a bulb to ensure they are safe.

TYPES OF BULBS (fig. 21)

Various types of bulbs are fitted to yourvehicle:

A. All glass bulbsThese are pressed on. Pull toremove.

B. Bayonet type bulbsPress the bulb, turn counter-clock-wise to remove this type of bulbfrom its holder.

C. Tubular bulbsFree them from their contacts toremove.

fig. 21

A0A0503b

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

225

BULBS

High beam

Low beam

Xenon lights

Front sidelights

Foglights

Front direction indicators

Side direction indicators

Rear direction indicators

Rear sidelights - braking lights

Third stop (additional braking lights)

Reversing light

Rear foglights

Number plate light

Puddle lights

Front roof light

Rear roof light

Courtesy mirror light

Glovebox light

Boot light

FIGURE 21

D

D

F

B

E

B

A

B

B

–

B

B

A

C

C

C

A

A

C

POWER

55W

55W

35W

6W

55W

21W

5W

21W

5W/21W

–

21W

21W

5W

5W

10W

10W

1.2W

5W

5W

TYPE

H7

H7

DS2

H6W

H1

PY21W

W5W

P21W

P21/5W

Led

P21W

P21W

W5W

C5W

C10W

C10W

W1.2W

W5W

C5W

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

226

IF AN EXTERIORLIGHT GOES OUT

XENON LIGHTS

Due to high voltage, thebulb of (Xenon) gas-dis-charge headlights must on-

ly be replaced by experts: dangerof death! Contact Alfa Romeo Au-thorized Services.

HALOGEN HEADLIGHTS The bulbs are arranged inside the lightunit as follows (fig. 22):

(A) Fog lights.

(B) Dipped beam headlights.

(C) Sidelights.

(D) Main beam headlights.

To change the bulbs of the sidelights, lowbeams and main beams it is necessary toremove the cover (A-fig. 23) releasingthe catches (B).

To change the fog lights, remove thecover (C) turning counter-clockwise.

IMPORTANT See the previous chapter“When needing to change a bulb” for thetype of bulb and power rating.

The front light units contain the sidelight,the dipped beam, main beam and foglight bulbs.

fig. 22

A0A0159b

fig. 23

A0A0160b

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

227

– Fit a new bulb, making the tab of themetal part coincide with the one on thelamp unit, then hook the bulb holder catch(B).

– Re-connect the electric connector (A).

– Refit the protective cover correctly.

Fog lights (fig. 24)

IMPORTANT When needing tochange the left bulb, the side trim next tothe light itself needs to be removed tofacilitate access to the engine compart-ment.

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

– Remove the protective cover turningcounter-clockwise.

– Disconnect the electric connector (A).

– Release the bulb catch (B).

– Remove the bulb and replace it.

fig. 24

A0A0161b

After replacement, refitthe covers correctlychecking that they are

properly secured.

IMPORTANT A slight layer of steam(fogging) can appear on the inside surfaceof the beam transparent cover: this is nota defect. The presence of condensatetraces in beams is a natural phenomenon,due to a low temperature and to thedegree of humidity in the air. These traceswill disappear when the beams are turnedon. Drops of water inside the headlightindicate instead water infiltration: contactAlfa Romeo Authorised Services.

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

228

Dipped beam headlights(fig. 25)


– Remove the protective cover releasingthe catches.




– Fit a new bulb, making the tabs of themetallic part coincide with the grooves onthe reflector, then hook the bulb holdercatch (B).



fig. 25

A0A0162b

Main beam headlights (fig. 27)






– Fit a new bulb, making the tabs of themetallic part coincide with the grooves onthe reflector, then hook the bulb holdercatch (B).



fig. 27

A0A0164b

Front side lights (fig. 26)



– Using the extension (A), integral withthe bulb holder (B), withdraw the bulbholder itself which is snap-fitted.

– Remove the bulb (C), pushing gentlyand turning counter-clockwise.

– Change the bulb and re-insert the bulbholder making sure that it clicks intoplace; also check that the bulb is in thecorrect position looking at the lamp fromoutside.


fig. 26

A0A0342b

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

229

– Replace the bulb;

– Refit the bulb holder turning counter-clockwise and check that it is secured cor-rectly;

– Refit the transparent.

SIDE DIRECTION INDICATORS(fig. 30)

– Push the transparent cover towardsthe rear of the car to compress the catch(A). Release the front part and removethis unit.

– Turn the bulb holder (B) counter-clock-wise and remove it from the cover.

– Remove the snap-fitted bulb andreplace it.

– Insert the bulb holder (B) in the trans-parent cover, then position the unit mak-ing sure the catch clicks into place (A).

fig. 29

A0A0626b

fig. 30

A0A0166b

FRONT DIRECTION INDICATORS (fig. 28-29)


– Using the screwdriver provided,remove the transparent unit operating onthe two metal clips as shown in the figure;

– Turn the bulb holder clockwise (A)and remove it;

– Remove the bulb (B) pushing gentlyand turning counter-clockwise;

fig. 28

A0A0625b

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

230

REVERSING LIGHT AND REAR FOG GUARDS (fig. 31-32)

The reversing light and rear fog guard arein the tail light unit fastened to the tailgate;they are to be found respectively one on theright and the other on the left of the vehiclefacing forwards.


– from the bumper lower side (fig. 31),operate on the bulb holder (A-fig 32) turn-ing it counter-clockwise and remove it. Takecare not to get burnt if the muffler is still hot;

fig. 31

A0A0627b

fig. 33

A0A0629b

– Remove the bulb pushing gently andturning counter-clockwise;

– Replace the bulb, then refit the bulbholder.

Anyway, you are advised to have thisoperation carried out by Alfa RomeoAuthorised Services.

REAR DIRECTION INDICATORSAND REAR SIDELIGHTS-BRAKING LIGHTS (fig. 33-34)

The rear direction indicators and the side-lights-braking lights are in the tail lightunit fastened to the body.


– From inside the boot, open the com-partment (A-fig. 33) and then the door(B) through the tab (C);

– Turn the bulb for sidelight and brakinglight counter-clockwise (D-fig. 34),or the bulb for the direction indicator (E-fig. 34) and remove it;

fig. 32

A0A0628b

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

231

NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS (fig. 35)

To change the bulbs, proceed as follows:

– Work on the transparent cover frame,in the point shown by the arrow to com-press the catch (B). Free the opposite endand remove the unit.

– Turn the bulb holder counter-clockwise(A) and remove it from the transparentcover.

– Remove the snap-fitted bulb andreplace it.

– Insert the bulb holder (A) in the trans-parent cover then refit the unit checkingthat the catch clicks into place (B).

ADDITIONAL BRAKING LIGHT (THIRD STOP) (fig. 36-37)

To change the led unit, proceed as fol-lows:

– Open the tailgate and use a screwdriv-er to open the two covers (A-fig. 36);

– Slacken the two fastening screws of(B) the led unit;

fig. 35

A0A0171b

fig. 36

A0A0631bA0A0630b

– Withdraw the light (F or G) push itgently and turn counter-clockwise;

– Replace the bulb;

– Refit the bulb holder turning clockwiseand make sure it is secured correctly;

– Refit the door (B) and close the com-partment (A).

fig. 34

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

232

– disconnect the connector (C-fig. 37),remove the led unit (D) and replace it witha new unit;

– Refit the unit on the tailgate reversingthe above mentioned procedure.

fig. 37

A0A0632b

fig. 39

A0A0175b

PUDDLE LIGHTS (fig. 38)(per versions/market where provided)


– Open the door and slacken the screw(A) fastening the transparent covers.

– Remove the unit composed of the twotransparent covers then change the bulb,releasing it from the side contacts makingsure that the new bulb is correctlyclamped between the contacts.

– Realign the two transparent coversand tighten the fastening screw (A).

IF AN INTERIOR LIGHT GOES OUT

FRONT ROOF LIGHT (fig. 39-40)

To change the bulbs, proceed as follows:

– Remove the light unit (A) levering inthe points shown by the arrow (in corre-spondence with the retainer catches).

– Open the protective cover (B).

– Replace the bulb concerned releasingit from the side contacts making sure thatthe new bulb is correctly clampedbetween the contacts.

fig. 38

A0A0174b

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

233

REAR ROOF LIGHT (fig. 41-42)


– Remove the light unit (A) levering inthe point shown by the arrow.

– Replace the bulb releasing it from theside contacts making sure that the newbulb is correctly clamped between the con-tacts.

– Refit the light unit in the correct posi-tion inserting first the side with the con-nector, then pressing the other side untilthe catch clicks into place (B).

fig. 41

A0A0177b

fig. 42

A0A0178b

– Close the protective cover (B).

– Refit the light unit pressing gently incorrespondence with the retainer catches,until hearing the click.

fig. 40

A0A0176b

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

234

COURTESY MIRROR LIGHT (fig. 43-44)


– Open the mirror cover (A).

– Remove the transparent cover (B) lev-ering in the point shown by the arrow.

– Gently raise the bulb holder (C) fromits housing, remove the snap-fitted bulband change it.

– Put the bulb holder correctly (C) backin its housing.

– Refit the transparent cover (B) insert-ing it in its correct position firstly on oneend and then on the other until it clicksinto place.

fig. 43

A0A0179b

fig. 44

A0A0180b

GLOVEBOX LIGHT (fig. 45-46)


– Open the glovebox, then remove thelight unit (A) levering in the point shownby the arrow.

– Open the protection (B) and changethe snap-fitted bulb.

– Close the protection (B) on the trans-parent cover.

fig. 45

A0A0181b

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

235

BOOT LIGHT (fig. 47-48)


– Open the tailgate;

– Remove the light unit (A-fig. 47)levering in the point shown by the arrow;

– Refit the light unit inserting it in its cor-rect position firstly on one end and thenon the other until it clicks into place.

– Replace the bulb (B-fig. 48) releas-ing it from the side contacts, making surethat the new bulb is correctly clampedbetween the contacts;

– Refit the light unit inserting it in its cor-rect position firstly on one end and thenon the other until it clicks into place (C).

fig. 46

A0A0182b

fig. 47

A0A0648b

fig. 48

A0A0649b

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

236

IN THE EVENT OF A BLOWN FUSE

GENERAL

The fuse is a protective device for theelectric system: it comes into action (i.e. itcuts off) mainly due to a fault or improp-er action on the system.

When a device does not work, check theefficiency of its fuse. The conductor ele-ment(A-fig. 49) must be intact; if not,replace the fuse with one of the sameamp rating (same colour).

(B) - Undamaged fuse

(C) - Fuse with damaged filament.

Remove the blown fuse using the pincerprovided (D), in the control box.

fig. 49

A0A0185b

Never replace a fusewith metal wires or any-thing else. Always use an

intact fuse of the same colour.

Never replace a fusewith another with a high-er amp rating; DANGER

OF FIRE.

If a general fuse (MAXI-FUSE or MEGA-FUSE) cutsin, do not attempt any

repair and contact Alfa RomeoAuthorised Services.

Before replacing a fuse,make sure the ignitionkey has been removed

and that all the other services areswitched off and/or disengaged.

If a fuse blows again,contact an Alfa RomeoAuthorised Service.

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

237

To locate the protection fuses, consultingthe summary table on the followingpages, refer to the following illustrationsfig. 52, fig. 53 and 54.

Alfa GT fuses are located in threefuse boxes set on the dashboard, on bat-tery positive terminal and near the bat-tery.

Access is gained to the control box onthe dashboard by slackening the tworetainers (A-fig. 50) and removing theprotective trim (B).

To gain access to the fuses in the fuse-box on the battery post, remove the pro-tective cover pressing the opening catches(front).

Access is gained to the control box nextto the battery releasing the perimetralcatches (A-fig. 51) and removing theprotective cover (B).

fig. 50

A0A0186b

fig. 51

A0A0187b

fig. 52 - Control box on dashboard

A0A0134b

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

238

fig. 53 - Control box next to battery

A0A0137b

fig. 54 - Control box on battery positive pole

A0A0215b

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

239

30

30

10

7.5

15

7.5

7.5

F03 (MAXI-FUSE)

F73 (MAXI-FUSE)

F13

F31

F39

F19

F31

SERVICES FIGURE FUSE AMPERES

Hazard warning lights

Right dipped-beam headlight

Left dipped-beam headlight

Right main-beam headlight

Left main-beam headlight

Foglights

Braking light

Reversing light

+30 direction indicators

10

10

10

10

10

15

10

7.5

10

F53

F12

F13

F14

F15

F30

F37

F35

F53

LIGHTS FIGURE FUSE AMPERES

FUSE SUMMARY TABLE

Selespeed transmission pump

Additional heater

Headlight aiming device



Climate control compressor

Heater unit relay coils

52

52

52

53

53

53

52

52

52

53

54

52

52

52

53

52

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

240

15

15

7.5

15

15

30

30

20

15

7.5

7.5

20

20

15

7.5

15

7.5

F32

F32

F51

F39

F39

F40

F43

F44

F45

F41

F35

F38

F09

F39

F39

F42

F42


Key-operated +30

Selespeed transmission

Selespeed transmission

Radio

Navigator

Rearscreen heating

Windscreen - rearscreen washer (pump)

Cigar lighter

Seats with electric heating

Heated wing mirrors – heated nozzles

Cruise control

Central door locking

Headlight washer

Services + 30

Primary services (electronic injection)

Secondary services (electronic injection)

Secondary services

52

52

52

52

52

52

52

52

52

52

52

52

53

52

53

53

52

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

241

Volumetric sensors

ESP system sensor

Steering angle sensor

EOBD system diagnosis socket

Cell phone provision

Driver’s door control unit supply

Passenger’s door control unit supply

Control lighting

Climate control system control lighting

Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster

Driver’s door control unit

ABS control unit

ABS control unit

Dashboard control unit

Air - bag control unit

Electronic injection control unit +30

Engine compartment control box (petrol versions)

Dashboard control unit

Trailer control unit

15

7.5

7.5

15

15

20

20

7.5

7.5

10

10

15

7.5

50

50

7.5

7.5

125

70

10

F39

F42

F42

F39

F39

F47

F48

F49

F35

F37

F53

F39

F42

F04 (MAXI-FUSE)

F02 (MAXI-FUSE)

F50

F18

F70 (MEGA-FUSE)

F71 (MAXI-FUSE)

F36

52

52

52

52

52

52

52

52

52

52

52

52

52

53

53

52

53

54

54

52


IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

242

40

30

50

15

15

15

15

25

7,5

15

15

30

30

50

20

150

40

60

20

F05 (MAXI-FUSE)

F06 (MAXI-FUSE)

F07 (MAXI-FUSE)

F10

F21

F22

F21

F60 (*)

F16

F61 (*)

F62 (*)

F08

F72 (MAXI-FUSE)

F01 (MAXI-FUSE)

F20

F70 (MEGA-FUSE)

F06 (MAXI-FUSE)

F07 (MAXI-FUSE)

F22

53

53

53

53

53

53

53

52

53

52

52

53

54

53

53

54

53

53

53


(*) Fuse behind dashboard control box on an auxiliary bracket.

Climate control fan

Radiator fan (first speed - petrol versions)

Radiator fan (second speed - petrol versions)

Horn

Fuel pump

Injectors (petrol versions)

Ignition coils

Tailgate electric unlocking

Electronic injection system

Bose system

Bose system

Additional heater

Ignition switch

Glow plug warming (JTD versions)

Heated fuel oil filter (JTD versions)

Engine compartment control box (JTD versions)

Radiator fan (first speed – JTD versions)

Radiator fan (second speed – JTD versions)

Injectors (JTD versions)

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

243

IN THE EVENT OF A FLAT BATTERY

Before anything else, you are advised toread the precautions for preventing thebattery from draining and for ensuringlong life in the “Vehicle maintenance”chapter.

CHARGING THE BATTERY

IMPORTANT The battery chargingprocedure is described only for informationpurposes. This operation should be carriedout by Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

Charging should be slow at a low amprating for 24 hours. Charging for a longertime may damage the battery.

Charge the battery as follows:

– Disconnect the battery negative termi-nal (–).

– Connect the charger cables to the bat-tery terminal ensuring that the bias is cor-rect.

– Turn on the charger.

– After charging, turn off the chargerbefore disconnecting it from the battery.

– Re-connect the battery negative termi-nal (–).

The liquid contained inthe battery is poisonousand corrosive. Avoid con-

tact with the skin or eyes. Thebattery should be charged in awell ventilated place, away fromnaked flames or possible sourcesof sparks: danger of explosionand fire.

Do not attempt tocharge a frozen battery:it must firstly be thawed,

otherwise it may burst. If freez-ing has occurred, the batteryshould be checked by skilled per-sonnel to make sure that theinternal elements are not dam-aged and that the body is notcracked, with the risk of leakingpoisonous and corrosive acid.

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

244

IF THE VEHICLE IS TO BE TOWED

The tow ring supplied with the vehicle ishoused in the tool box under the bootmat.

To install the tow ring, proceed as fol-lows:

– Take the tow ring from the tool box.

– Remove the cover (A) snap-fitted onthe front (fig. 55) or rear (fig. 56)bumper. To do this, using the flat-bladedscrewdriver provided, protect the tip witha soft cloth to avoid damaging the car.

– Firmly screw the ring in its housing.

fig. 55 - front

A0A0650b

fig. 56 - rear

A0A0670b

Before tightening thering carefully clean thethreaded housing. Before

beginning to tow the car, makesure that the ring is firmly tight-ened in its threaded housing.

Before starting to tow,turn the ignition key toMAR and back to STOP,

again without removing it.Removing the key automaticallyengages the steering lock result-ing in the impossibility to steerthe wheels. When towingremember that without the helpof the engine brake and powersteering greater effort is requiredon the pedal and steering wheel.Do not use flexible cables fortowing and avoid jerks. Duringtowing operations make surethat fastening the joint to the cardoes not damage the componentsin contact with it. When towingthe car, it is compulsory to followspecific traffic regulations con-cerning both the towing deviceand behaviour on the road.

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

245

Take care when position-ing the arms of the lift orworkshop lift to avoid

damaging the side strips.USING AN ARM LIFT ORWORKSHOP LIFT

The vehicle should be lifted only at theside, setting the end of the arms or theworkshop lift in the illustrated areas, atapprox. 40 cm from the wheelhouse pro-file (fig. 57).

These areas are highlighted by the sym-bol ▼ on the lower part of the side mem-ber.

The car may fall if thejack is not positioned cor-rectly. Never use the jack

for higher capacities than the onestated on the label.

IMPORTANT For versions withSelespeed transmission, make sure thatthe gears are in neutral (N) (checkingthat the vehicle moves if pushed) andthen proceed as for towing a normal carwith mechanical transmission, followingthe instructions given previously.

Should it be impossible to set the gearsto neutral, do not tow the car and contactAlfa Romeo Authorised Services.

Do not start the enginewhen towing the car.

IF THE VEHICLE IS TO BE LIFTED

fig. 57

A0A0672b

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

246

other crashes is high. Leave the car imme-diately and go beyond the guard-rail.

– If doors are blocked, do not try to getout of the car breaking the windscreenwhich is stratified. The windows and rearscreen are easier to break.

– Remove the ignition key of the vehi-cles involved.

– If you note a smell of fuel or otherchemical products, do not smoke andhave a cigarette stubbed out.

– To put out fires, even small ones, usethe extinguisher, blankets, sand, or earth.Never use water.

– If use of the lighting system is not nec-essary, disconnect the battery negativeterminal (–).

IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENT

– It is important to keep calm.

– If you are not directly involved, stop atleast a few dozen metres away from theaccident.

– On motorways, stop without blockingthe emergency lane.

– Turn the engine off and the hazardwarning lights on.

– At night, illuminate the place of theaccident with the headlights.

– Take care, do not risk being run over.

– Signal the accident placing the trian-gle at regulation distance in a clearly visi-ble place.

– Call the emergency organisation, giv-ing the most accurate information possi-ble. On motorways use the special phonesprovided.

– In motorways pileups, especially withpoor visibility, the risk of being involved in

IF PEOPLE ARE INJURED

– An injured person must never be aban-doned. Helping is compulsory also for per-sons not directly involved in the accident.

– Do not crowd around injured people.

– Reassure the injured person that helpis on the way, and stay near to overcomeany panic.

– Release or cut the seat belt restraininginjured persons.

– Do not give injured persons anythingto drink.

– An injured person should never bemoved except in the following circum-stances.

– Remove an injured person from thecar only in danger of fire, sinking orfalling. When removing an injured person:do not pull the limbs or bend the head andkeep the body as horizontal as possible.

FIRST AID KIT

In addition to the first-aid kit, it is alsowise to keep an extinguisher and a blan-ket in the car.

VEH

ICLE

MAIN

TEN

AN

CE

247

It is however wise to remember thatProgrammed Maintenance does not com-pletely cover all the car’s requirements:also in the initial period before the20,000 km service coupon and later,between one coupon and another, ordi-nary care is still necessary such as forexample routinely checking and toppingup the level of fluids, checking the tyrepressure, etc...

IMPORTANT The Programmed Mainte-nance coupons are specified by the Manu-facturer. The failure to have them carried outmay invalidate the warranty.

The Programmed Maintenance service iscarried out by all Alfa Romeo AuthorisedServices, at pre-established times.

If during each operation, in addition tothe ones programmed, the need arises forfurther replacements or repairs, these maybe carried out only with the explicit agree-ment of the customer.

IMPORTANT You are advised to con-tact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services in theevent of any minor operating faults, with-out waiting for the next service coupon.

SCHEDULEDSERVICING

Correct maintenance is determined inensuring long vehicle life under the bestconditions.

This is why Alfa Romeo has programmeda series of checks and maintenance oper-ations every 20,000 km.

IMPORTANT On versions fitted withreconfigurable multifunction display, at2000 km from the maintenance deadline,the display will show “REFER TO SERVICEMANUAL” which is shown again turningthe ignition key to MAR, every 200 km.For further details, see “Service” in the“Reconfigurable multifunction display”.

VVEEHHIICCLLEE MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE

VEH

ICLE

MAIN

TEN

AN

CE

248

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE PROGRAMME

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180Thousands of km

Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure if necessary

Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warninglights, boot, passenger compartment, glovebox lights, warning lights, etc..)

Check operation of windscreen washer system, adjust spray jets

Check position/wear of windscreen/rearscreen wiper blades

Check operation of front disk brake pad wear indicator

Check wear conditions of rear disk brake pads

Sight check the conditions of: body exterior, underbody protection, stiff pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel supply - brakes), rubber parts(boots - sleeves - bushes etc..)

Check for bonnet and boot lock cleanness, lever cleanness and lubrication

Sight check for accessory drive belt conditions

Check handbrake lever stroke adjustment

Check antievaporation system (petrol versions)

Change air cleaner cartridge (petrol versions)

Change air cleaner cartridge (JTD versions)

Top up fluid levels (engine coolant, brakes, windscreen washer, battery, etc..)

Check and if necessary top up the Selespeed automatic transmission oil level(2.0 JTS versions)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ●

● ● ● ●

● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ●

●

●

●

● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

VEH

ICLE

MAIN

TEN

AN

CE

249

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180Thousands of km

(*) Or every 3 years for harsh conditions (cold climates, city driving or prolonged lengths of time at idle speed, dusty roads or roads covered with sand and/or salt).Or every 5 years, regardless of mileage.

Sight check for conditions of timing gear drive toothed belt

Change counter-rotating shaft drive belt

Change timing gear drive belt (*)

Change accessory poly-V drive belt

Change spark plugs

Check operation of engine control system (through diagnosis socket)

Check mechanical transmission oil level

Change engine oil and engine oil filter

Change brake fluid (or every 2 years)

Change fuel filter (JTD versions)

Change pollen filter (or every year)

Check emissions/smoke at the exhaust (JTD versions)

VEH

ICLE

MAIN

TEN

AN

CE

250

ADDITIONALOPERATIONS

Every 1000 km or before long jour-neys, check and if necessary top up:

– engine coolant fluid level

– brake/hydraulic clutch control fluidlevel

– power steering fluid level

– windscreen and headlamp washerfluid level

– tyre pressure and conditions.

Every 3000 km check and if necessarytop up the engine oil level.

The use of FL Selenia products is rec-ommended which have been designedand made expressly for Alfa Romeo cars(see “Refuelling” in the “TechnicalSpecifications” chapter).

ANNUAL INSPECTION PROGRAMME

For cars with an annual mileageof below 20,000 km (for exam-ple about 10,000 km) the follow-ing yearly inspection programmeis advised:

– Check tyre conditions/wear and ifnecessary adjust the pressure (includingspare wheel)

– Check operation of lighting system(headlights, direction indicators, hazardwarning lights, boot, passenger compart-ment, glovebox lights, warning lights,etc.)

– Check operation of windscreen wipersystem, spray jet adjustment

– Check position/wear of windscreen

– Check front disk brake pad conditionsand wear

– Sight check for conditions of: engine,gearbox, transmission, pipes (exhaust -fuel supply - brakes), rubber parts (boots- sleeves - bushes etc..), brake and fuelsupply system hoses

– Check for bonnet and boot lock clean-ness, lever cleanness and lubrication

– Check battery charge

– Sight check for conditions of variousdrive belts

– Check and if necessary top up fluidlevels (engine coolant, brakes, wind-screen washer, battery etc. )

– Change engine oil and engine oil filter

– Change pollen filter.

VEH

ICLE

MAIN

TEN

AN

CE

251

IMPORTANT Engine oil

Should prevailing use of the car be underone of the following specially heavy con-ditions:

– trailer or caravan towing

– dusty roads

– short distances (less than 7-8 km)repeated and with external temperaturesbelow zero

– frequently idling engines or long dis-tance low speed driving or in case of along term inactivity

replace engine oil more frequently thanrequired on Service Schedule.

IMPORTANTDiesel filter

The different grades of purity in dieselfuel normally available might make it nec-essary to replace the filter more frequent-ly than indicated in the Service Schedule.If the engine misfires it shows the filterneeds changing.

IMPORTANT Air cleaner

Using the car on dusty roads change theair cleaner more frequently than specifiedin the Schedule Maintenance Programme.

For any doubts concerning the intervalsbetween the engine oil and air cleanerreplacement in relation to how the vehicleis used, contact Alfa Romeo AuthorisedServices.

VEH

ICLE

MAIN

TEN

AN

CE

252

Vehicle maintenanceshould be entrusted toAlfa Romeo Authorised

Services. For routine and minormaintenance operations you wishto carry out yourself, alwaysmake sure you have the properequipment, genuine Alfa Romeospares and the necessary fluids;do not however carry out theseoperations if you have no experi-ence.

IMPORTANT Pollen filter

If the vehicle is used frequently in dustyor heavily polluted environments it isadvisable to replace the filtering elementmore frequently; in particular it should bereplaced if a reduction of the amount ofair admitted to the passenger compart-ment is noted.

IMPORTANT Battery

It is advisable to check the batterycharge, preferably at the onset of winter,to prevent the possibility of the electrolytefreezing.

This check should be carried out morefrequently if the car is used mainly forshort trips, or if it is fitted with accessoriesthat permanently absorb electricity evenwith the ignition key removed, especiallyin the case of after market accessories.

If the vehicle is used in hot climates orparticularly harsh conditions it is wise tocheck the level of the battery fluid (elec-trolyte) more frequently than specified inthe Scheduled Maintenance Programme.

VEH

ICLE

MAIN

TEN

AN

CE

253

1 Engine oil - 2 Battery - 3 Brake fluid - 4Windscreen/rearscreen/headlampwasher fluid - 5 Engine coolant fluid - 6 Power steering fluid - 7 Selespeedtransmission oil (2.0 JTS Selespeed ver-sions)

CHECKING LEVELS

Never smoke whileworking in the enginecompartment; gas and

inflammable vapours may be pre-sent, with the risk of fire.

When topping up takecare not to confuse thevarious types of fluids:

they are incompatible with oneanother and could seriously dam-age the vehicle.

fig. 1 - 1.8 T. SPARK version

A0A0736b

A0A0681b

fig. 1a - 2.0 JTS version

VEH

ICLE

MAIN

TEN

AN

CE

254 fig. 3 - JTD 16V version

1 Engine oil - 2 Battery - 3 Brake fluid - 4Windscreen/rearscreen/headlampwasher fluid - 5 Engine coolant fluid - 6 Power steering fluid

A0A0396b

A0A0683b

fig. 2 - 3.2 V6 version

1 Engine oil - 2 Battery - 3 Brake fluid - 4Windscreen/rearscreen/headlampwasher fluid - 5 Engine coolant fluid - 6 Power steering fluid

VEH

ICLE

MAIN

TEN

AN

CE

255

ENGINE OIL (fig. 4-4a-5-6)

The engine oil should be checked withthe vehicle on a level surface a few min-utes (about 5) after the engine has beenswitched off.

Remove the dipstick (A), clean it, put itback in completely, remove it and checkthat the level is within the MIN andMAX marks on the dipstick. The intervalbetween the MIN and MAX marks cor-respond to about one litre of oil.

When the engine is hot,take care when workinginside the engine com-

partment to avoid burns.Remember that when the engineis hot, the fan may cut in: dangerof injury.

Do not add oil with spec-ifications (classification,viscosity) other than

those of the oil already in theengine.

fig. 4 - 1.8 T. SPARK version

A0A0737b

fig. 6 - JTD 16V version

A0A0398b

A B

fig. 5 - 3.2 V6 version

A0A0406b

If the oil level is near or even below theMIN mark, add oil through the filter neck(B), until reaching the MAX mark.

IMPORTANT If a routine checkreveals that the level is above the MAXmark, contact Alfa Romeo AuthorisedServices to have the correct level restored.

IMPORTANT After topping up the oil,before checking the level again, run theengine a few seconds and wait for a fewminutes ater stopping it.

fig. 4a - 2.0 JTS version

A0A0682b

VEH

ICLE

MAIN

TEN

AN

CE

256

Used engine oil and filtercontain harmful sub-stances for the environ-

ment. Contact Alfa RomeoAuthorised Services to have theoil and the filter changed, as theyare equipped to dispose of thewaste oil and filters respectingnature and the law.

SELESPEED TRANSMISSIONOIL (fig. 7)

The Selespeed transmission oil should bechecked with the vehicle on a level sur-face and with the engine stopped andcold.

To check the level, proceed as follows:

– turn the ignition key to MAR;

– disconnect the breather tube andremove the cap (A) checking that thelevel corresponds with the MAX mark onthe dipstick integrated with the cap;

– if the oil is below the MAX mark, topup to reach the correct level;

Do not add oil with spec-ifications other than thatalready in the gearbox.

fig. 7

A0A0197b

Used gearbox oil con-tains dangerous sub-stances for the environ-

ment. For changing the oil weadvise contacting Alfa RomeoAuthorised Services who areequipped for disposing of used oilrespecting nature and the law.

Be very careful workinginside the engine com-partment if the engine is

hot: danger of burns. Rememberthat the fan may cut in if theengine is very hot: danger ofinjury.

Engine oil consumption

Max engine oil consumption is usually400 grams every 1000 km.

During the initial period of use theengine settles, therefore engine oil con-sumption may be considered stabilisedonly after the first 5000 ÷ 6000 km.

IMPORTANT Engine oil consumptiondepends on the way of driving and theconditions of use of the vehicle.

– after refitting the cap, insert thebreather tube firmly on the housing on thecap and turn the ignition key to STOP.

VEH

ICLE

MAIN

TEN

AN

CE

257

The cooling system ispressurised. If necessary,replace the cap only with

another genuine one, otherwisethe system efficiency could becompromised. Do not remove thetank cap with the engine hot:danger of burns.

The engine cooling sys-tem uses antifreeze pro-tective fluid PARAFLU UP.

For topping up use the same typeof fluid contained in the coolingsystem. The PARAFLU UP fluidcannot be mixed with any othertype of fluid. Should it occur,never start the engine and contactAlfa Romeo Authorised Services.

ENGINE COOLANT FLUID (fig. 8)

Do not remove the capwhen the engine is hot:danger of burns.

The level of the coolant in the headertank (reservoir) should be checked withthe engine cold and the car on a level sur-face and it should be between the MINand MAX marks on the tank.

fig. 8

A0A0240b

If the level is low, loosen the header tankcap (A) and slowly pour a mixture of 50%distilled water and 50% PARAFLU UPFL Selenia through the filler neck untilnearing the MAX mark.

The antifreeze mixture of 50%PARAFLU UP and 50% distilled waterguarantees protection down to –35 °C.

Oil consumption is verylow; if topping up again isneeded shortly after-

wards, have the system checkedfor possible leaks by Alfa RomeoAuthorised Services.

VEH

ICLE

MAIN

TEN

AN

CE

258

When loosening thereservoir cap do notallow the fluid to come

into contact with painted parts. Ifit does, wash it off immediatelywith water.

Do not allow the powersteering fluid to touch hotparts of the engine: it is

inflammable.

fig. 10

A0A0217b

fig. 9

A0A0400b

BRAKE AND HYDRAULICCLUTCH FLUID (fig. 10)

Slacken the cap (A) and check that thefluid contained in the reservoir reaches themaximum mark.

POWER STEERING FLUID (fig. 9)

Check that the level of the oil in thereservoir is at maximum.

This operation should be carried out withthe vehicle on a level surface and theengine switched off and cold.

Check that the level reaches the MAXmark on the reservoir or coincides with theupper notch (maximum level) on the dip-stick (A) integral with the reservoir cap.

If the oil level in the reservoir is belowthe specified one, top up only with one ofthe products listed in the “Fluid and lubri-cant Specification” table in the “TechnicalSpecifications” chapter proceeding as fol-lows:

– Start the engine and wait for the oillevel in the reservoir to stabilise.

– With the engine running, turn thesteering wheel lock to lock a few times.

– Top up to the MAX level notch, thenrefit the cap.

VEH

ICLE

MAIN

TEN

AN

CE

259

Do not travel with thewindscreen washer reser-voir empty: the action of

the windscreen washer is funda-mental for improving vision.

To avoid damaging thepump motor, do not use thewindscreen/rearscreen

washers when the reservoir isempty.

Some commercial addi-tives for windscreen wash-ers are inflammable. The

engine compartment contains hotcomponents which may set it onfire.

IMPORTANT Brake and hydraulicclutch fluid is hygroscopic (i.e. it absorbsmoisture). For this reason, if the car ismainly used in areas with a high degree ofatmospheric humidity, the fluid should bereplaced at more frequent intervals thanspecified in the Scheduled MaintenanceProgramme.

WINDSCREEN/REARSCREENHEADLIGHT WASHER FLUID(fig. 11)

Open the cap (A) and check the level inthe reservoir.

If necessary top up using a mixture ofwater and TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35 fluid as follows:

– 30% of TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35 and 70% water in summer;

– 50% of TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35 and 50% water in winter;

– in the case of temperatures below -20°C use TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35 fluid neat.

Brake and clutch fluid ispoisonous and highly cor-rosive. In the event of

accidental contact, wash theparts concerned immediately withneutral soap and water, thenrinse thoroughly. See a doctor atonce if the fluid is swallowed.

The π symbol on thecontainer indicates syn-thetic brake fluid, distin-

guishing it from the mineral kind.Using mineral fluids irreversiblydamages the special braking sys-tem rubber seals.

fig. 11

A0A0242b

VEH

ICLE

MAIN

TEN

AN

CE

260

DIESEL FUEL FILTER(JTD 16V versions)

DRAINING CONDENSATION WATER

The presence of water inthe supply circuit maycause serious damage to

the entire injection system andcause irregular running of theengine. If the c warning lightturns on together with the mes-sage on the reconfigurable multi-function display, contact AlfaRomeo Authorised Services assoon as possible to have the sys-tem relieved.

AIR CLEANER

The air cleaner is connected to the tem-perature and air flow sensors which sendto the control unit the electric signalsneeded for correct operation of the injec-tion and ignition system.

It must therefore always be in perfectconditions, to ensure correct operation ofthe engine, low consumption and exhaustemission levels.

If the operations con-cerning cleaner replace-ment described below are

not carried out correctly and withthe due precautions, they maycompromise the travelling safetyof the vehicle. You are recom-mended to have this operationcarried out by Alfa RomeoAuthorised Services.

If the car is habituallyused in dusty areas, thecleaner should be replaced

at shorter intervals than thosespecified in the ProgrammedMaintenance Schedule.

Any attempt to clean thecleaner may damage it,leading to serious engine

damage.

VEH

ICLE

MAIN

TEN

AN

CE

261

BATTERY

The battery is of the “LimitedMaintenance” type and is fitted with anoptical indicator (A-fig. 12) for check-ing the electrolyte level and charge.

Under normal conditions of use the elec-trolyte does not need topping up with dis-tilled water. To make sure that it is in effi-cient conditions, at routine intervals checkthe indicator on the battery cover whichshould be dark in colour with a green cen-tral area.

If the indicator is a bright light colour, ordark without the green central area, con-tact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

fig. 12

A0A0224b

Batteries contain harmfulsubstances for the envi-ronment. To change the

battery we advise contacting AlfaRomeo Authorised Services whoare equipped for disposal respect-ing nature and the law.

The incorrect installationof electric accessoriesmay cause serious dam-

age to the vehicle. If, after buy-ing the car, you wish to installaccessories (alarm, radio,radiotelephone, etc.) contact AlfaRomeo Authorised Services whowill be able to suggest the mostsuitable devices and above alladvise about the need to use amore powerful battery.

If the car is to remaininactive for a long time invery cold conditions,

remove the battery and take it toa warm place, otherwise it mayfreeze.

POLLEN FILTER

Have the dust/pollen filter checked oncea year by Alfa Romeo Authorised Services,preferably at the onset of summer.

If the car is mainly used in dusty or heav-ily polluted areas, the filter should bechanged at more frequent intervals thanspecified in the Scheduled MaintenanceProgramme.

IMPORTANT The failure to replacethe pollen filter can considerably reducethe effectiveness of the climate controlsystem.

When working on thebattery or near to it,always protect the eyes

with goggles.

The liquid contained inthe battery is poisonousand corrosive. Avoid con-

tact with the skin or eyes. Thebattery should be charged in awell ventilated place away fromnaked flames or possible sourcesof sparks: danger of explosionand fire.

VEH

ICLE

MAIN

TEN

AN

CE

262

– Turn on the charger.

– After charging, turn off the chargerbefore disconnecting it from the battery.

– Re-connect the battery negative termi-nal (–).

Never attempt to chargea frozen battery: it mustfirstly be thawed, other-

wise it may burst. If freezing hasoccurred, the battery should bechecked before charging by spe-cialised personnel, to make surethat the internal elements are notdamaged and that the body is notcracked, with the risk of leakingpoisonous and corrosive acid.

CHARGING THE BATTERY

IMPORTANT The battery chargingprocedure is described only for informationpurposes. This operation should be carriedout by Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

Charging should be slow at a low amprating for 24 hours. Charging for a longertime may damage the battery.

Charge the battery as follows:

– Disconnect the battery negative termi-nal (–).

– Connect the charger cables to the bat-tery terminal ensuring that the bias is cor-rect.

CHECKING THE CHARGE

The battery charge may be checked sat-isfactorily using the indicator, and actingaccording to the colour the indicatorshows.

Refer to the table below or to the label(fig. 13) on the battery itself.

Working with a low fluidlevel may damage thebattery irreversibly, even

causing it to burst.

Brilliantwhite colour

Dark colour without green area in the centre

Dark colour with greenarea in the centre

Top up the electrolyte

Low charge level

Sufficient electrolyte level and charge

Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services

Charge the battery (you are advised to contact

Alfa Romeo Authorised Services)

No action

fig. 13

A0A0393b

VEH

ICLE

MAIN

TEN

AN

CE

263

2. close the driver's window completelykeeping the button pressed for atleast 3 seconds after window closing (win-dow upper stop);

3. repeat the same procedure (point 1and 2) also for the front passenger's win-dow;

4. check for proper initialisation by oper-ating the windows automatically.

USEFUL HINTS TO EXTEND THE LIFE OF YOUR BATTERY

To avoid rapidly draining the battery andensure that it continues to work correctly,the following should be noted:

– The terminals must always be firmlytightened.

– Within reason, avoid using electrical de-vices for a long time when the engine isswitched off (radio, hazard warning lights,parking lights, etc.).

IMPORTANT If the battery is keptwith a charge of below 50% it is damagedby sulphation, its starting capability isreduced and it is also more subject to thepossibility of freezing (this may occuralready at -10 °C). In the event of a pro-longed inactivity, refer to the paragraph“Vehicle inactivity”, in the chapter“Correct use of the car”.

CHANGING THE BATTERY

When changing the battery it should bereplaced with another original one withthe same characteristics. If it is replacedby a battery with different characteristics,the maintenance intervals given in theScheduled Maintenance Programme inthis chapter are no longer valid and formaintenance it will be necessary to followthe battery Manufacturer’s instructions.

IMPORTANT After control unit powerdisconnection (battery replacement or dis-connection and replacement of power win-dow control unit protection fuses), thepower window automatism shall berestored.

Proceed as follows with doors closed:

1. open the driver's window completelykeeping the button pressed for atleast 3 seconds after window opening(window lower stop);

– When the vehicle is parked in a garage,ensure that the doors, bonnet, boot and in-ner lids are closed properly so that the lightsdo not stay on permanently.

– Before carrying out any work on theelectric system, disconnect the negative ca-ble from the battery.

– If after buying the car, you wish to in-stall electric accessories which require a per-manent electric supply (alarm, voice feature,radionavigator with satellite antitheft func-tion etc.) or accessories that burden the elec-tric system, contact Alfa Romeo AuthorisedServices whose qualified personnel, in ad-dition to suggesting the most suitable de-vices belonging to Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo,will evaluate the overall electric absorption,checking whether the vehicle’s electric sys-tem is capable of withstanding the load re-quired, or whether it should be integratedwith a more powerful battery. In fact, assome of these devices continue absorbingenergy even when the ignition key is off (carstationary, engine off), they gradually drainthe battery.

VEH

ICLE

MAIN

TEN

AN

CE

264

Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyrewear:

(A): Normal pressure: tread evenlyworn.

(B): Low pressure: tread particularlyworn at the edges.

(C): High pressure: tread particularlyworn in the centre.

Tyres should be changed when the treadthickness is reduced to 1,6 mm.

In any case follow local regulations.

You are also reminded that services withhigh current absorption switched on by theuser, such as for example: baby bottlewarmers, vacuum cleaner, mobile phone,mini fridge, etc., quicken the batterydraining process if they are turned onwith the engine off or running at idlespeed.

IMPORTANT When installing addi-tional systems on the vehicle, bear inmind that improper branches on connec-tions of the vehicle wiring are dangerous,particularly if safety devices are involved.

WHEELS AND TYRES

TYRE PRESSURE

Check the tyre pressure of every wheel,including the spare, every two weeks andbefore a long journey. The pressure shouldbe checked with the tyre rested and cold.

It is normal for the pressure to increasewhen the car is in use; for the correct tyreinflation pressure, see “Wheels” in the“Technical Specifications” chapter.

Battery

60 Ah

70 Ah

Maximum permissible loadless absorption

36 mA

42 mA

The maximum absorption of all theaccessories (standard and fitted after-wards) should be 0,6 mA x Ah (of the bat-tery), as shown in the following table:

fig. 14

A0A0225b

VEH

ICLE

MAIN

TEN

AN

CE

265

Alloy rim paintinginvolving temperaturesexceeding 150 °C should

be avoided since wheel mechani-cal characteristics could beimpaired.

Do not cross switch thetyres, moving them fromthe right of the car to the

left and vice versa.

Excessive low pressurecauses overheating of thetyre with the possibility

of serious damage to it.

Remember that vehicleroad holding also dependson correct tyre inflation

pressure.

RUBBER HOSES

As far as the brake system and fuel sup-ply rubber hoses are concerned, carefullyfollow the Scheduled MaintenanceProgramme. Indeed, ozone, high temper-atures and the prolonged lack of fluid inthe system may cause hardening andcracking of the hoses, with possible leaks.Careful control is therefore necessary.

IMPORTANTS

– Where possible, avoid sudden brak-ing, tyre squealing starts, violent bumpsagainst kerbs, potholes or obstacles of var-ious kinds. Prolonged driving on roughroads may damage the tyres;

– Routinely check the tyres for cuts onthe sides, swellings or uneven tread wear.If necessary contact Alfa RomeoAuthorised Services;

– Avoid overloading the vehicle whentravelling: this may cause serious damageto the wheels and tyres;

– If a tyre is punctured, stop immedi-ately and change it to avoid damage tothe tyre itself, the rim, suspensions andsteering system;

– Tyres age even if they are not usedmuch. Cracks in the tread rubber are asign of aging. In any case, if the tyreshave been on the vehicle for over 6 years,they should be checked by specialised per-sonnel, to see if they can still be used.Also remember to check the compactspare wheel;

– In case of replacement, always fit newtyres, avoiding those of dubious origin;

VEH

ICLE

MAIN

TEN

AN

CE

266

SPRAY JETS (fig.16)

If the jet of fluid is inadequate, firstlycheck that there is fluid in the reservoir:see “Checking levels” in this chapter.

Then check that the nozzle holes are notclogged, if necessary use a needle.

If necessary, direct the jet of fluid work-ing on the adjustment screw.

Changing the windscreen wiperblade (fig. 15)

Instructions for removing thewindscreen wiper blade

Proceed as follows:

– raise the windscreen wiper arm (A);

– turn blade (B) 90° around pin (C),set at the end of the arm;

– remove the blade from pin (C).

Instructions for refitting thewindscreen wiper blade

To refit the blade proceed as follows:

– fit pin (C) into the hole located at themiddle of the blade (B);

– place the arm with the blade on thewindscreen.

Driving with worn wiperblades is a serious haz-ard, because visibility is

reduced in bad weather.

WINDSCREEN/REARSCREEN WIPERS

BLADES

Periodically clean the rubber part usingspecial products; TUTELA PROFES-SIONAL SC 35 is recommended.

If the rubber blades are bent or wornthey should be replaced. In any case theyshould be changed once a year.

A few simple notions can reduce the pos-sibility of damage to the blades:

– If the temperature falls below zeromake sure that ice has not frozen the rub-ber against the glass. If necessary, thawusing an antifreeze product.

– Remove any snow from the glass: inaddition to protecting the blades, this pre-vents effort on the motor and overheat-ing.

– Do not operate the windscreen andrearscreen wipers on dry glass.

fig. 16

A0A0696b

fig. 15

A0A0728b

VEH

ICLE

MAIN

TEN

AN

CE

267

HEADLIGHT WASHERS(fig.17)

Regularly check that the spray jets areintact and clean.

If it is necessary to direct the jet, contactan Alfa Romeo Authorised Service

BODYWORK

PROTECTION FROMATMOSPHERIC AGENTS

The main causes of corrosion are:

– atmospheric pollution

– salty air and humidity (coastal areas,or hot humid climates)

– seasonal environment conditions.

Not to be underestimated is also theabrasive action of wind-borne atmosphericdust and sand and mud and gravel raisedby other vehicles.

On your car Alfa Romeo has implement-ed the best manufacturing technologies toeffectively protect the bodywork againstcorrosion.

fig. 17

A0A0704b

These include:

– Painting products and systems whichgive the vehicle particular resistance tocorrosion and abrasion.

– Use of galvanised (or pretreated)steel sheets, with high resistance to corro-sion.

– Spraying of the underbody, enginecompartment, wheel arches and otherparts with highly protective wax products.

– Spraying of plastic parts, with a pro-tective function, in the more exposedpoints: underdoor, inner wheel arch lin-ings, etc.

– Use of “open” boxed sections to pre-vent condensation and pockets of mois-ture from triggering rust inside.

VEHICLE EXTERIOR ANDUNDERBODY WARRANTY

Alfa GT is guaranteed against perfo-ration due to rust of any original elementof the structure or body. For the generalterms of this warranty, refer to theWarrantly Booklet.

VEH

ICLE

MAIN

TEN

AN

CE

268

Detergents cause waterpollution. Therefore thevehicle should be washed

in areas equipped for collectingand purifying the liquid used inthe washing process.

Where possible, do not park under trees;the resinous substances many speciesrelease give the paint a dull appearanceand increase the possibility of triggeringthe rust processes.

IMPORTANT Bird droppings must bewashed off immediately and thoroughlyas the acid they contain is particularlyaggressive.

To correctly wash the car:

1) Remove the aerial from the roof to pre-vent damage to it if the car is washed inan automatic system.

2) Spray the vehicle with a low pressurejet of water.

3) Pass a sponge moistened with a lightdetergent solution, rinsing the sponge fre-quently.

4) Rinse well with water and dry with ajet of air or chamois leather.

When drying, take particular care withthe less visible parts like door surrounds,bonnet and around the headlights wherewater may stagnate. The vehicle shouldnot be taken to a closed area immediate-ly, but left in the open so that residualwater can evaporate.

Do not wash the vehicle after it has beenleft in the sun or with the bonnet hot: thismay alter the shine of the paintwork.

Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned inthe same way as the rest of the vehicle.

ADVICE FOR PRESERVING THE BODYWORK

Paint

The paintwork does not only serve anaestethic purpose but also protects theunderlying sheet metal.

In the case of deep scrapes or scores,you are advised to have the necessarytouching up carried out immediately toavoid the formation fo rust.

Only original products should be used fortouching up paint (see “Body paint identi-fication plate” in the “TechnicalSpecifications” chapter).

Normal paint maintenance consists inwashing at intervals depending on theconditions and environment of use. Forexample, in highly polluted areas, or if theroads are sprayed with salt, it is wise towash the car more frequently.

VEH

ICLE

MAIN

TEN

AN

CE

269

Engine compartment

At the end of the winter the engine com-partment should be carefully washed,without directing the jet against electroniccontrol units. Contact a specialised work-shop to have this done.

Detergents cause waterpollution. Therefore the en-gine compartment should

be washed in areas equipped forcollecting and purifying the liquidused in the washing process.

IMPORTANT The vehicle should bewashed with the engine cold and the igni-tion key at STOP. After washing make surethat the various protections (e.g. rubbercaps and various covers) have not beendamaged or removed.

Windows

Use specific products to clean the win-dows. Use clean cloths to avoid scratchingor altering the transparency of the glass.

IMPORTANT The inside of therearscreen should be wiped gently with acloth in the direction of the filaments toavoid damaging the heating device.

Front headlights

IMPORTANT Do not use aromatic sub-stances (e.g. petroleum) or ketones (e.g.acetone) to clean the front headlight plas-tic transparents.

Never use inflammableproducts like fuel oil etheror rectified petrol for

cleaning inside the car. The elec-trostatic charges generated whenrubbing to clean may cause fire.

INTERIOR FITTINGS

Periodically check that water is nottrapped under the mats (due to water drip-ping off shoes, umbrellas, etc.) whichcould cause oxidisation on the sheet metal.

CLEANING SEATS AND FABRICAND VELVET PARTS

– Use a soft brush or a vacuum cleanerto remove dust. Velvet is cleaned better ifthe brush is moistened.

– Rub the seat with a sponge moistenedwith a solution of water and neutral deter-gent.

VEH

ICLE

MAIN

TEN

AN

CE

270

Do not keep aerosol cansin the car. They mightexplode. Aerosol cans

must never be exposed to a tem-perature above 50°C. The tem-perature inside the car exposedto the sun may go well beyondthat figure.

CLEANING LEATHER SEATS

– Remove dried on dirt with a lightlymoistened chamois leather or cloth with-out pressing too hard.

– Remove liquid and grease stains witha dry absorbent cloth without rubbing.Then wipe with a soft cloth or chamoisleather with water and neutral soap. If thestain persists, use specific products, care-fully following the instructions for use.

IMPORTANT Never use alcohol. Makesure that cleaning products do not containalcohol and alcohol derivatives even atlow strength.

STEERING WHEEL/GEAR LEVERKNOB WITH GENUINELEATHER COVERING

These components shall only be cleanedwith water and neutral soap. Never use spir-it or alcohol-based products.

Before using special products for cleaninginteriors, read carefully label instructions andindications to make sure they are free fromspirit and/or alcohol-based substances.

If when cleaning the windscreen with spe-cial glass products, some drops fall on theleather covering of the steering wheel/gearlever knob remove them immediately andthen clean with water and neutral soap.

IMPORTANT Take the utmost carewhen engaging the steering lock to preventscratching the leather covering.

INTERIOR PLASTIC PARTS

Clean plastic parts with a clothmositened with water and non-abrasiveneutral detergent. To remove grease orhard stains, use appropriate productsdesigned to preserve the appearance ofcomponents.

IMPORTANT Never use spirit or petro-leum to clean the instrument panel orother plastic parts.



TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

271

IDENTIFICATION LABEL

This (fig. 2) is to be found on the frontcrossmember of the engine compartment.

It contains the following information:(A) Space for details of national ho-

mologation(B) Space for punching the consecutive

chassis number(C) Space available for maximum

weights authorised by various na-tional regulations

(D) Space for version and any supple-mentary indications to those specified

(E) Space for smoke coefficient (JTD ver-sions)

(F) Space for punching manufacturer’sname.

BODYWORK LABEL

This is located in the engine bay, to one sideof the upper right shock absorber (fig. 3)and contains:

– Type of vehicle: ZAR 937.000

– Manufacturer’s serial number (chassisnumber).

IDENTIFICATION DATA

You are advised to note the identificationcodes. The identification datastamped andgiven on the labels and their position arethe following (fig. 1):

1 - Identification label

2 - Body label

3 - Bodywork paint identification label

4 - Engine label.

TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL SSPPEECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONNSS

fig. 1

A0A0654b

fig. 2

A0A0246b

fig. 3

A0A0247b

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

272

BODYWORK PAINTIDENTIFICATION LABEL

The label (fig. 4) is on the inner left edgeof the tailgate. It contains the following in-formation:

A. Paint manufacturer.

B. Name of colour.

C. Colour code.

D. Indication on the type of product to beused for touching-up.

ENGINE STAMP

The engine marking is stamped on thegearbox side of the crankcase, in corre-spondence with the exhaust manifold.

ENGINE CODES - BODY VERSIONS

fig. 4

A0A0651b

Engine code Body versions

1.8 T. SPARK AR322005 937CXR1A 26

2.0 JTS 937A1000 937CXH1A 22

2.0 JTS 932A2000 937CXHT1A 29(For specific markets)

2.0 JTS Selespeed 937A1000 937CXH11 23

3.2 V6 936A000 937CXP1B 25

JTD 16V 937A5000 937CXN1B 24B

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

273

ENGINE2.0 JTS2.0 JTS

Selespeed

937A1000

Otto

4 in line

83 x 91

1970

11.5 : 1

1211656400

20621

3250

NGK PFR6BNGK BKR6EKPA

Unleadedpremium petrol

95 RON

2.0 JTS (**)

932A2000

Otto

4 in line

83 x 91

1970

11.5 : 1

1191636400

20122

3250

NGK PFR6BNGK BKR6EKPA


95 RON

JTD 16V

937A5000

Diesel

4 in line

82 x 90.4

1910

17.5 : 1

1101504000

30531

2000

Diesel for motorvehicles

(SpecificationEN 590)

3.2 V6

936A000

Otto

6 at V of 60°

93 x 78

3179

10 : 1

176.52406200

30030,64800

NGK PFR6B


95 RON

(*) There are two different spark plugs for each cylinder, one per type(**) For versions/markets where applicable.

1.8 T. SPARK

AR32205

Otto

4 in line

82.7

1747

11.5 : 1

1031406500

16316.63900

NGK PFR6B+NGK PMR7A

NGK BKR6EKPA+NGK PMR7A


95 RON

Code type

Cycle

Number and position of cylinders

Piston bore and stroke mm

Total displacement cm3

Compression ratio

Maximum horsepower (EEC):kWHP

at rpm

Maximum torque (EEC):Nm

kgmat rpm

Spark plugs (*)

Fuel

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

274

FUEL SUPPLY

Alterations or repairs to the fuel supply system carried out incorrectly and without taking account ofthe technical features of the system, may cause operating faults with the risk of fire.

TRANSMISSION

Supply

2.0 JTS

Direct electronic injection

Gearbox

Clutch

Drive

2.0 JTS

Five forward gears plusreverse with

synchronisers for forwardspeeds

Dry single disk withhydraulic control

Front

JTD 16V

Six forward gears plusreverse

all synchronised


Front

JTD 16V

Common Rail direct injectionwith supercharging

3.2 V6

Multi Point electronic injection

3.2 V6

Six forward gears plusreverse all synchronised


Front

2.0 JTS Selespeed

Five forward gears andreverse with electronic

control

Dry single disk withelectrohydraulic control

Front

1.8 T. SPARK

Multi Point electronicinjection

1.8 T. SPARK

Five forward gears plusreverse with

synchronisers forforward speeds


Front

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

275

Service brakes:– front

– rear

Parking brake

BRAKES

Front

Rear

Type

Turning radius(between pavements) m

1.8 T. SPARK - 2.0 JTS - 3.2 V6 - JTD 16V

rack and pinion with hydraulic power steering

11.5

SUSPENSIONS

STEERING SYSTEM

1.8 T. SPARK - 2.0 JTS - 3.2 V6 - JTD 16V

Disk

Disk

Controlled by hand lever, acting on the rear brakes

1.8 T. SPARK - 2.0 JTS - 3.2 V6 - JTD 16V

quadrilateral system with stabiliser bar

Mc Pherson type

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

276

WHEELS

RIMS AND TYRES

Pressed steel or alloy rims.

Radial tubeless tyres.

The log book shows all the homologatedtyres.

IMPORTANT In the event of any dis-crepancies between this Handbook and thevehicle Log Book, only the latter should beconsidered.

While the specified dimensions remain thesame, for driving safety, the vehicle must befitted with tyres of the same brand and typeon all wheels.

IMPORTANT Do not use inner tubeswith Tubeless tyres.

COMPACT SPARE WHEEL

Pressed steel rim.

WHEEL GEOMETRY

Convergence of front wheels measured be-tween the rims:

The values refer to the vehicle travelling.

CORRECT TYRE READING

Below, please find the instructions need-ed to understand the meaning of the codestamped on the tyre.

Example:

205/55 R 16 91 W

or

205/55 ZR 16

The code may be in one of the ways giv-en in the example.

205 = Nominal width (distance inmm between sides).

55 = Percentage height/width ratio.

R = Radial tyre.

ZR = Radial tyre, with speed over240 km/h.

16 = Rim diameter in inches.

91 = Load index (capacity), e.g. 91= 615 kg. Not present in ZRtyres.

W, Z = Maximum speed index. In ZRtyres the speed index Z is be-fore the R.

fig. 5

A0A0465b

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

277

Load index (capacity)

60 = 250 kg61 = 257 kg62 = 265 kg63 = 272 kg64 = 280 kg65 = 290 kg66 = 300 kg67 = 307 kg68 = 315 kg69 = 325 kg70 = 335 kg71 = 345 kg72 = 355 kg73 = 365 kg74 = 375 kg75 = 387 kg76 = 400 kg77 = 412 kg78 = 425 kg79 = 437 kg80 = 450 kg81 = 462 kg82 = 475 kg83 = 487 kg84 = 500 kg

85 = 515 kg86 = 530 kg87 = 545 kg88 = 560 kg89 = 580 kg90 = 600 kg91 = 615 kg92 = 630 kg93 = 650 kg94 = 670 kg95 = 690 kg96 = 710 kg97 = 730 kg98 = 750 kg99 = 775 kg100 = 800 kg101 = 825 kg102 = 850 kg103 = 875 kg104 = 900 kg105 = 925 kg106 = 950 kg

Maximum speed index for snow tyres

Q M + S = up to 160 km/h.

T M + S = up to 190 km/h.

H M + S = up to 210 km/h.

Maximum speed index

Q = up to 160 km/h.

R = up to 170 km/h

S = up to 180 km/h.

T = up to 190 km/h.

U = up to 200 km/h.

H = up to 210 km/h.

V = over 210 km/h.

ZR = over 240 km/h.

W = up to 270 km/h.

Y = up to 300 km/h.

Standard fittings

Rims

Tyres

Fittings on requestRims

Tyres

Winter tyres

2.0 JTS

7 J x 167 J x 17 (�)

7 1/2 J x 17 (�)

205/55 R16 91W (•)205/55 ZR16 (•)

215/45 R17 87W (�)

6 1/2 J x 157 J x 178 J x 18

195/60 R15 88V (**)215/45 R17 87W (•)

215/45 ZR17 87W (Pirelli P7000) (•) (*)

215/45 ZR17 87Y (Good Year Eagle F1) (•) (*)

225/40 ZR18 92Y(Michelin Pilot Sport 2) (•) (*)

195/60 R15 88Q (M+S)205/55 R16 91T (M+S)215/45 R17 87H (M+S)

3.2 V6

7 1/2 J x 17

225/45 ZR17 91Y (Pirelli Pzero Rosso) (•) (*)

225/45 ZR17 (Bridgestone S-02) (•) (*)

7 1/2 J x 178 J x 18

215/45 R17 87W (**)215/45 R17 87W

(Pirelli P7000) (*) (**)215/45 ZR17 87Y

(Good Year Eagle F1) (*) (**)225/40 ZR18 92Y

(Michelin Pilot Sport 2) (•) (*)

215/45 R17 87H (M+S)225/45 ZR17 91H (M+S)

(•) Unchainable tyres

(�) For versions/markets where applicable

(*) Size certified and admitted for specified tyres only

(**) IMPORTANT Chainable tyres; see paragraph "Snow chains" in section "Correct use of the car".

JTD 16V

6 1/2 J x 157 J x 16

7 J x 17 (�)7 1/2 J x 17 (�)

205/60 R15 91V (•)205/55 R16 91W (•)

205/55 ZR16 (•)215/45 R17 87W (�)

6 1/2 J x 157 J x 178 J x 18

195/60 R15 88V (**)215/45 R17 87W (•)

215/45 ZR17 87W (Pirelli P7000) (•) (*)215/45 ZR17 87Y

(Good Year Eagle F1) (•) (*)225/40 ZR18 92Y

(Michelin Pilot Sport 2) (•) (*)205/60 R15 91V

(Michelin Pilot Primacy) (•) (*)

195/60 R15 88Q (M+S)205/55 R16 91T (M+S)215/45 R17 87H (M+S)

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

278

1.8 T SPARK

6 1/2 J x 157 J x 16

7 J x 17 (�)7 1/2 J x 17 (�)

205/60 R15 91V (•)205/55 R16 91V (•)

205/55 ZR16 (•)215/45 R17 87W (�)

6 1/2 J x 157 J x 178 J x 18

195/60 R15 88V (**)215/45 R17 87W (•)

215/45 ZR17 87W (Pirelli P7000) (•) (*)

215/45 ZR17 87Y (Good Year Eagle F1) (•) (*)

225/40 ZR18 92Y(Michelin Pilot Sport 2) (•) (*)

205/60 R15 91V(Michelin Pilot Primacy) (•) (*)

195/60 R15 88Q (M+S)205/55 R16 91T (M+S)215/45 R17 87H (M+S)

TYRE INFLATION PRESSURES COLD

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

279

PERFORMANCE

1.8 T. SPARK 2.0 JTS 2.0JTS 3.2 V6 JTD 16VSelespeed

Maximum speed in km/h 200 216 216 243 209

With the tyre hot the inflating pressure should be +0,3 bar compared with the specified ratingWith winter tyres the inflation pressure should be +0,2 bar compared with the specified rating

Tyres

195/60 R15 bar

205/60 R15 bar

205/55 R16 bar

205/55 ZR16 bar

215/45 R17 bar

225/45 ZR17 bar

225/40 ZR18 bar

Compact spare wheel125/80 R15 bar

reduced loadfront rear

2.2 2.2

2.3 2.3

2.3 2.3

2.3 2.3

2.4 2.3

2.5 2.4

2.5 2..4

4.2

full loadfront rear

2.5 2.5

2.6 2.6

2.6 2.6

2.6 2.6

2.7 2.6

2.8 2.7

2.8 2.7

4.2

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

280

DIMENSIONS

fig. 5

A B C D E F G H

1.8 T. SPARK 2.0 JTS 4489 967 2596 926 1362 1763 1524 1510

3.2 V6 4489 967 2596 926 1355 1763 1524 1510

JTD 16V 4489 967 2596 926 1366 1763 1524 1510

The sizes are in mm and refer to the car fitted with standard tyres.

Slight changes with optional tyres.

Height with unladen vehicle.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENTVOLUME

Capacity ................................ 320 dm3

Capacity with rear seatback rest folded ...................... .. 905 dm3

A0A0653b

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

281

WEIGHTS

(*) With special equipment (trailer towing device, etc.) the loadless weight increases, thereby reducing the payload, with regard to the maximum permissi-ble loads.

(**)Loads not to be exceeded. It is the driver’s responsibility to place goods in the boot and/or on the loading surface in accordance with the maximum per-missible loads.

JTD 16V

1320

520

9909801885

1300400

60

3.2 V6

1410

520

10409801930

1400400

60

2.0 JTS

1320

520

9809801840

1300400

60

1.8 T. SPARK

1290

520

9809801810

1300400

60

Kerb weight(with fuel oil and fluids, spare wheel, toolsand accessories) kg

Payload (*) includingdriver kg

Max permissible weights (**):

– front axle kg– rear axle kg– total kg

Towable weights:– braked trailer kg– trailer without brake kg

Maximum load on ball(braked trailer) kg

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

282

REFILLING2.0 JTS

Selespeed

637

7.2

–

4.4

2.0

0.6

1.2

0.52

2.54.2

3.2 V6

637

7.2

–

5.9

2.0

–

1.2

0.52

2.54.2

1.8 T. SPARK

637

7.2

4.4

–

2.0

–

1.2

0.52

2.54.2

2.0 JTS

637

7.2

–

4.4

2.0

–

1.2

0.52

2.54.2

Fuel tank: litres– including a reserve of litres

Engine cooling system litres

Oil sump and filter litres

litres

Mechanical transmission/differential litres

Selespeed transmission litres

Hydraulic power steering litres

Hydraulic brake circuit withABS device litres

Windscreen washer reservoir: litres

– with headlamp washer litres

Specified fuels and original lubricants

Unleaded Premium petrol with noless than 95 R.O.N

Mixture of distilled water and PARAFLU UP at 50%

SELENIA 20 K Alfa Romeo

SELENIA RACING

TUTELA CAR TECHNYX

TUTELA CAR CS SPEED

TUTELA GI/A

TUTELA TOP 4 for Alfa Romeo

Mixture of water and fluidTUTELAPROFESSIONAL SC 35

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

283

JTD 16V

637

7.2

4.5

2.0

1.2

0.52

2.54.2

Fuel tank: litres– including a reserve of litres

Engine cooling system litres

Oil sump and filter litres

Mechanical transmission/differential litres

Hydraulic power steering litres

Hydraulic brake circuit withABS device litres

Windscreen washer reservoir: litres

– with headlamp washer litres

Specified fuels and original lubricants

Diesel fuel for motor vehicles (Specification EN590)

Mixture of distilled water and PARAFLU UP at 50%

SELENIA WR

TUTELA CAR TECHNYX

TUTELA GI/A


Mixture of water and fluidTUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

284

Use Fluid and lubricant specifications Genuine fluids Changefor correct car operation and lubricants intervals

Lubricants for petrol engines 1.8 T.SPARK

Lubricants forpetrol engines2.0 JTS - 3.2 V6

Lubricants for Multijet engines

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

RECOMMENDED PRODUCTS AND THEIR SPECIFICATIONS

Synthetic-based engine oils, grade SAE 10W-40, FIAT 9.55535-G2 qualification

Synthetic-based engine oils, grade SAE 10W-60, FIAT 9.55535-H3 qualification

Synthetic-based engine oils, grade SAE 5W-40, FIAT 9.55535-M2 qualification

Should non-genuine products be used, lubricants with minimum ACEA A3 properties for petrol engines and ACEA B4 for Diesel engines are tolerated; in thisevent top engine performance is not guaranteed. Using low-quality products, not compliant with ACEA A3 and ACEA B4 properties could cause engine damages not covered by warranty.

For very cold temperatures, consult Alfa Romeo Authorized Services for the proper Selenia product to use

SELENIA 20KALFA ROMEO

SELENIA RACING

SELENIA WR

As per Service Schedule



TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

285

Use Genuine fluids and lubricants

TUTELA CARTECHNYX

TUTELA GI/A

TUTELA CAR CS SPEED

TUTELA STAR 500


PARAFLU UP

TUTELAPROFESSIONAL SC 35

Applications

Mechanical gearbox and differential

Power steering

Selespeed gearboxelectric control electro-hydraulic actuator

CV joints on wheel side

Hydraulic brake andclutch controls

Cooling circuitsProportion: 50% water and 50% Paraflu UP

To be used diluted orundiluted

Fluid and lubricant specifications for correct car operation

Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 75W-85, that passes API GL-4 Plus specifications

Lubricant for hydrostatic transmissions that passes "ATF DEXRON II" specifications

Special lubricant with "ATF DEXRON III" type additive

Lithium-soap-based grease with molybdenum bisulphate, NLGI 2 consistency

Synthetic fluid, F.M.V.S.S. n. 116, DOT 4, ISO 4925, SAE J-1704, CUNA NC 956-01

Protective with antifreeze action, red colour, based on inhibited monoethylen glycol and organic formula, that passes CUNA NC 956-16, ASTM D 3306 specifications

Mixture of alcohol, water and surfactants CUNA NC 956-11

IMPORTANT Do not top-up or mix with products having different properties

Lubricants and greasesfor transmissions

Brake fluid

Protective agent for radiators

Windscreen and rear window washer fluid

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

286

FUEL CONSUMPTION

The fuel consumption figures given in thetable below are determined on the basis ofthe homologation tests set down by specif-ic European directives.

The procedures below are followed formeasuring consumption:

– urban cycle: cold starting followed bydriving that simulates urban use of the car;

IMPORTANT The type of route,traffic situations, weather condi-tions, driving style, general condi-tions of the vehicle, trimlevel/equipment/accessories, load,presence of a roof rack, use of theclimate control system, other situ-ations that affect air drag may leadto different fuel consumption levelsthan those measured (see “Reduc-ing running costs and environmentpollution” in the chapter “Correctuse of the car”).

3.2 V6

18.6

8.7

12.4

JTD 16V

8.7

4.8

6.2

2.0 JTS

12.2

6.7

8.7

1.8 T. SPARK

12.1

6.4

8.5

2.0 JTSSelespeed

12.2

6.7

8.7

– extraurban cycle: frequent acceler-ating in all gears, simulating extraurban useof the vehicle; the speed varies between 0and 120 km/h;

– Combined consumption: is calcu-lated weighing about 37% of urban cycleconsumption and about 63% of extraurbanconsumption.

Fuel consumption according to directive 1999/100/EC (litres x 100 km)

Urban

Extraurban

Combined

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

287

OF CO2 EMISSIONS

CO2 emission levels given in the following table refer to combined consumption.

CO2 EMISSIONS ACCORDING TO DIRECTIVE 1999/100/CE (g/km)

1.8 T. SPARK 2.0 JTS 2.0 JTS Selespeed 3.2 V6 JTD 16V

202 207 207 295 164

RIG

HT

HAN

D D

RIV

E VER

SIO

NS

288

fig. 6

A0A0724b

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONS - DASHBOARD

1. Side swivel air vents - 2. Fixed side window air vents - 3. Passenger's air bag - 4. Tailgate release button - 5. Card holder (for versions/markets whereapplicable) - 6. Sound system (for versions/markets where applicable) - 7. Centre swivel air vents - 8. Fixed upper vent - 9. Glass holder (for versions/mar-kets where applicable) - 10. Front fog light button - 11. Hazard light switch - 12. Rear fog light button - 13. Outside light control lever - 14. Speedome-ter with display for mileage recorder, trip meter and headlamp aiming device - 15. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light - 16. Multifunction display -17. Engine coolant temperature gauge - 18. Rev. counter - 19. Windscreen wiper control lever - 20. Bonnet opening lever - 21. Set of controls: trip meterreset, headlamp aiming device, trip computer - 22. Ignition key and switch - 23. Horn - 24. Steering wheel locking/release lever - 25. Driver's air bag -26. Door locking button - 27. Controls for heating, ventilation and climate control - 28. Cigar lighter/ashtray housing door - 29. Temperature sensor - 30.Glove box.

RIG

HT

HAN

D D

RIV

E VER

SIO

NS

289

fig. 7A0A0725b

fig. 8A0A0726b

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Petrol versions 2.0 JTS Selespeed

A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warn-ing light - B. Engine coolant temperaturegauge with maximum temperature warninglight - C. Speedometer - D. Odometer dis-play (mileage recorder, trip meter with head-lamp position display) - E. Reconfigurablemultifunctiondisplay - F. Rev. counter.

Petrol versions1.8 T. SPARK - 2.0 JTS

A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warninglight - B. Engine coolant temperature gaugewith maximum temperature warning light- C. Speedometer - D. Odometer display(mileage recorder, trip meter with headlampposition display) - E. Reconfigurable multi-function display - F. Rev. counter

RIG

HT

HAN

D D

RIV

E VER

SIO

NS

290

fig. 9A0A0727b

JTD 16V versions

A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warn-ing light - B. Engine coolant temperaturegauge with maximum temperature warninglight - C. Speedometer - D. Odometer dis-play (mileage recorder, trip meter with head-lamp position display) - E. Reconfigurablemultifunction display - F. Rev. counter

INDEX

291

IINNDDEEXX

ABS system .............................. 150

Accessories purchased by the user .. 144

Additional stop light (third stop) .... 230

Air bags

- deactivating passenger’s air bag 40

- driver’s front air bag ................ 39

- front air bags ......................... 38

- general cautions ..................... 43

- passenger’s front air bag .......... 40

- side air bags (side bag - window bag) .......... 41

Air cleaner .................................. 260

Air re-circulation .................... 105-120

Air vents............................... 100-101

Alfa Romeo CODE ........................ 6

Armrest (front/rear) .............. 17-22

Ashtray (front/ rear) ............ 140 -141

ASR (system) ............................. 154

Battery ..................................... 261

- advice for preserving the charge ............................. 263

- checking the charge ................ 262

- replacement ........................... 263

- starting with an auxiliary battery .................................. 211

Body marking/versions ......... 271-272

Bonnet ...................................... 147

Boot

- capacity ................................ 279

- extension .............................. 19

- lighting ................................. 146

- luggage net ........................... 22

- opening button ................ 124-145

- opening from inside ................ 145

- opening with remotecontro 18-145

- restraining the ........................ 146

- tailgate closing ....................... 146

- tailgate emergency opening ..... 146

- warnings for carrying luggage ... 146

Boot light

- changing bulbs ....................... 235

Brakes

- checking fluid level and topping up ....................... 258

- handbrake ............................. 126

- specifications ......................... 275

Braking lights (third stop) ............ 231

- changing bulbs ....................... 230

Bulbs replacement ....................... 221

Card holder ............................... 141

Cell phones (provision) ................ 143

Changing a wheel ....................... 212

Changing bulbs ........................... 222

Checking levels ........................... 253

Children (carrying safely) ............. 32

Cigar lighter ............................... 141

Cleaning and maintenance

- body ..................................... 268

- car interior ............................. 270

- engine compartment ............... 269

- fabric seats ............................ 270

- leather seats .......................... 270

- plastic parts ........................... 270

INDEX

292

- windows ............................... 269

Climate control, automatic two-zone ................................. 109

Climate control system .......... 103-111

Controls ..................................... 124

CO2 emissions ............................ 287

CODE card .................................. 7

Compact spare wheel .................. 214

- characteristics ........................... 277

Correct use of the car ........... 200

Courtesy light

- changing bulbs ....................... 234

Cruise control ............................. 49

Dashboard................................. 52

Demisting-defrosting

- door mirrors ................ 24-107-123

- rearscreen ....................... 105-123

- windscreen and front side windows ................... 107-122

Diesel fuel filter ........................... 260

Digital multifunction display .......... 57

Direction indicators

- changing front bulbs ................ 229

- changing rear bulbs ................. 230

- changing side bulbs ................. 229

- switching on .................... 44-45-46

Door locking system .................... 125

Door mirrors ............................... 23

Doors

- central locking ........................ 16

- opening/closing from inside ..... 15

- opening/closing from outside ... 15

- remote control ........................ 7

- remote locking/unlocking ........ 6-7

Electronic alarm system ............... 11

Emergency starting ...................... 210

- coasting ................................ 212

- starting with an auxiliary battery .................................. 211

Engine

- identification codes/marking .... 272

- specifications ......................... 273

Engine compartment

- bonnet .................................. 147

Engine starting ........................... 200

- emergency starting ................. 202

- ignition switch ........................ 14

- procedure for JTD versions ........ 201

- procedure for petrol versions ..... 200

- switching off .......................... 202

- warming the engine ................ 201

Engine oil consumption ................ 256

EOBD (system) ........................... 155

External lights (switching on) ....... 44

First-aid kit................................. 246

Flashing high beams .................... 45

Fluids (specifications) .................. 284

Follow me home device ............... 46

Foglights

- changing bulbs ................. 225-227

- switching on .......................... 124

Front ceiling light ........................ 138

- changing bulbs ....................... 232

Fuel

- at the filling station ................. 273

- automatic shut off switch ......... 125

- consumption .......................... 286

- fuel cap ................................. 198

- level gauge and reserve ........... 56

INDEX

293

- refuelling ............................... 198

Fuel consumption ........................ 286

Fuel flap .................................... 198

Fuses ........................................ 236

Gearbox lever ............................ 127

Getting to know your car .... 6

Glass holder ......................... 141-142

Glove compartment ..................... 138

Glove compartment light

- changing bulbs ....................... 234

Handbrake ................................ 126

Hazard warning lights .................. 124

Headlamp beam adjustment ......... 148

Headlight washers ................ 49-267

Headlights

- adjustment abroad .................. 148

- beam adjustment .................... 148

- changing bulbs ................. 221-224

- compensation for tilt ......... 148-149

Headrests (front/rear) .......... 18-21

Horn ......................................... 52

Hoses ........................................ 265

Ignition device ............................ 14

Ignition switch and steering lock 14-15

In an emergency..................... 210

In the event of an accident ........... 246

Inertial fuel cut off switch ............. 125

Instrument cluster ................. 53-54

Instrument lighting adjustment ...... 59

Intelligent washing (windscreen) ... 47

Interior fittings ............................ 269

Interior lighting

- boot lighting .......................... 146

- dashboard lighting (rheostat) ... 59

- front lighting .................... 138-139

- rear lighting ........................... 140

Jack ......................................... 215

Levers (steering wheel) ............... 44

Lights ........................................ 44

Load limiters (seat belts) ............. 29

Low beam headlights

- changing bulbs ................. 225-228

- switching on .................... 44-45

Luggage restrainer net ................. 22

Main beam headlights

- changing bulbs ................. 226-228

- switching on .......................... 45

Maintenance

- additional operations ............... 250

- annual inspection programme ... 250

- checking levels ....................... 253

- precautions and warnings ......... 251

- scheduled maintenance ........... 247

- scheduled maintenance programme ............................ 248

Manual heater ............................ 102

Mechanical gearbox ..................... 127

Number plate lights

- changing bulbs ........................ 231

INDEX

294

Oddment recesses ...................... 138

Outside temperature ..................... 58

Paintwork

- colour label ............................ 272

Parking ...................................... 203

Parking sensor ............................ 123

Pockets on doors ......................... 142

Pollen filter .....................108-123-261

Power steering oil ....................... 258

Power windows .......................... 24

Pretensioners .............................. 28

Puddle lights .............................. 140

- changing bulbs ....................... 232

Radio transmitters and cell phones......................... 144

Radio with CD player ................... 156

Rain sensor ................................ 48

Raising the car

- with an arm lift ...................... 245

- with a workshop lift ................ 245

- with the jack .......................... 215

Rear ceiling light ......................... 140

- changing bulbs ....................... 233

Rear fog guards

- changing bulbs ....................... 230

- switching on .......................... 125

Rear oddment pockets ................. 142

Rearview mirror .......................... 23

Reducing running costs and environment pollution ......... 203

Refuelling

- specifications ......................... 282

Remote control

- additional remote controls ........ 11

- door opening-closing ............... 7

- tailgate opening ..................... 8

Rev counter ................................ 55

Reversing light

- changing bulbs ....................... 230

Roof rack (provision) ................... 150

Scheduled maintenance programme .............................. 248

Seat belts .................................. 26

- carrying children safety ............ 31

- front belt height adjustment ..... 27

- general instructions ................. 29

- load limiters ........................... 29

- maintenance .......................... 31

- pretensioners ......................... 28

- rear centre lap belt .................. 27

- use of belts ............................ 26

Seats, front ................................ 16

- adjustments ..................... 16-17

- centre armrest ........................ 17

- headrest ................................ 18

- heating ................................. 18

- rear pockets ........................... 18

- tilting the back rest ................. 17

Seats, rear ................................. 19

- boot extension ....................... 19

- centre armrest ........................ 22

- headrest. ............................... 21

Selespeed gearbox ...................... 128

Sidelights

- changing front bulbs ......... 225-228

- changing rear bulbs ................. 230

- switching on .......................... 45

Snow chains ............................... 208

Spray jets

- windscreen/rearscreen ............ 267

INDEX

295

Steering lock .............................. 15

Steering system

- adjustment lever ..................... 22

- technical specifications ............. 275

Steering wheel

- adjustment lever ..................... 22

- horn control ........................... 52

Sun visors .................................. 143

Suspensions (specifications) ......... 275

Tailgate

- opening from inside .......... 124-145

- opening with remote control 8-145

Technical specifications ......... 271

Tools ......................................... 214

Towing the car ............................ 244

Towing trailers ............................ 205

Transmission ............................... 274

Tyres

- correct reading ....................... 276

- FIX&GO automatic .................. 217

- in the event of a puncture ........ 212

- inflating pressure .............. 279-304

- snow chains ........................... 208

- types of tyres and rims ............ 278

- wear ..................................... 264

- winter ................................... 208

VDC system .............................. 152

Vehicle maintenance ............. 247

Volumetric protection ................... 13

Warning lights .......................... 85

Washing the car

- engine compartment ............... 269

- exterior ................................. 268

- interior .................................. 270

Weights ..................................... 280

Wheels

- FIX&GO automatic .................. 217

- geometry .............................. 276

- replacement ........................... 214

- snow chains ........................... 208

- tyre inflating pressure ........ 279-304

- tyres and rims ........................ 278

- warnings ......................... 212-213

Windscreen washer

- operation ............................... 47

- spray jets .............................. 267

Windscreen wiper

- blade replacement .................. 266

- operation ............................... 47

- rain sensor ............................. 48

- spray jets .............................. 266

TYRE INFLATION PRESSURES COLD

ENGINE OIL REPLEACEMENTOil sump and filter (1.8 T. SPARK - 2.0 JTS) ...................... litres 4.4Oil sump and filter (3.2 V6)............................................. litres 5.9Oil sump and filter (JTD 16V)............................................ litres 4.5

Do not discard used oil in the environment.

REFUELLING

Fuel tank capacity .......................................................... litres 63Reserve......................................................................... litres 7

For cars with petrol engine, only use unleaded petrol with over 95 R.O.N.For cars with diesel engine only use Diesel fuel for motor vehicles (Speci-fication EN590)

QUALITYASSISTENZA TECNICA - INGEGNERIA ASSISTENZIALELargo Senatore G. Agnelli. 5 -10040 Volvera - Torino (Italia)Fiat Auto S.p.A.Publication no. 60431484 - 2nd Edition - 09/2005All rights reserved. Reproduction, even in part is prohibited without written permissionfrom Fiat Auto S.p.A.

S E R V I C E

With the tyre hot the inflating pressure should be +0,3 bar compared with the specified ratingWith winter tyres the inflation pressure should be +0,2 bar compared with the specified rating

Tyres

195/60 R15 bar

205/60 R15 bar

205/55 R16 bar

205/55 ZR16 bar

215/45 R17 bar

225/45 ZR17 bar

225/40 ZR18 bar

Compact spare wheel 125/80 R15 bar

reduced loadfront rear

2.2 2.2

2.3 2.3

2.3 2.3

2.3 2.3

2.4 2.3

2.5 2.4

2.5 2.4

4.2

full loadfront rear

2.5 2.5

2.6 2.6

2.6 2.6

2.6 2.6

2.7 2.6

2.8 2.7

2.8 2.7

4.2

001-056 alfa gt gb - fiat

Documents